WO2022089136A1 - Rrc连接释放控制方法和装置 - Google Patents

Rrc连接释放控制方法和装置 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022089136A1
WO2022089136A1 PCT/CN2021/121401 CN2021121401W WO2022089136A1 WO 2022089136 A1 WO2022089136 A1 WO 2022089136A1 CN 2021121401 W CN2021121401 W CN 2021121401W WO 2022089136 A1 WO2022089136 A1 WO 2022089136A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
duration
timer
rrc connection
terminal
application
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2021/121401
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
杨锐
金辉
窦凤辉
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to EP21884866.1A priority Critical patent/EP4221363A4/en
Publication of WO2022089136A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022089136A1/zh
Priority to US18/309,155 priority patent/US20230276532A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00—Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
    • H04W52/02—Power saving arrangements
    • H04W52/0209—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices
    • H04W52/0251—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices using monitoring of local events, e.g. events related to user activity
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00—Connection management
    • H04W76/20—Manipulation of established connections
    • H04W76/27—Transitions between radio resource control [RRC] states
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00—Connection management
    • H04W76/30—Connection release
    • H04W76/38—Connection release triggered by timers
    • Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02—TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02D—CLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES [ICT], I.E. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES AIMING AT THE REDUCTION OF THEIR OWN ENERGY USE
    • Y02D30/00—Reducing energy consumption in communication networks
    • Y02D30/70—Reducing energy consumption in communication networks in wireless communication networks

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of mobile communication technologies, and in particular, to an RRC connection release control method and apparatus.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the terminal When the terminal has data to transmit, it establishes an RRC connection with the network device, and when the data transmission is completed, the network device can release the RRC connection with the terminal.
  • the network device may release the RRC connection with the terminal when the inactive timer (inactive timer) configured by the network device for the terminal expires.
  • the duration of the inactive timer is a fixed value, for example, the fixed value is 10 seconds. .
  • the power consumption of the terminal may be relatively high.
  • Embodiments of the present application provide an RRC connection release control method and apparatus, so as to reduce power consumption of a terminal.
  • a first aspect provides an RRC connection release control method, which is applied to a terminal, where the terminal stores the timing duration of a first timer corresponding to a first type of application, and the first timer corresponding to the first type of application is stored.
  • the timing duration of the timer includes at least two duration values, the first timer is a timer used when the terminal is in the RRC connection state, and the first timer starts timing when the terminal is in the RRC connection state , when the terminal receives the data sent by the network device, the first timer is reset, and the method further includes:
  • the terminal determines the application type of the first application
  • the terminal determines a first duration value from the at least two duration values as the timing duration of the first timer;
  • the terminal Detecting a preset operation for the first application, the terminal establishes an RRC connection with the network device;
  • the first timer starts timing
  • the terminal When the count value of the first timer exceeds the first duration value, the terminal requests the network device to release the RRC connection.
  • the preset operation may be an operation of playing a certain video; for game applications, the preset operation may be an operation of clicking to start.
  • the preset operation is used to request to obtain data, and any operation that requests to obtain data belongs to the preset operation.
  • a first timer is set in the terminal, and the first timer is the timer used when the terminal is in the RRC connection state.
  • the first timer Start timing, when the terminal receives the data sent by the network device, the first timer is reset, and the RRC connection release is controlled through the first timer.
  • the first duration is determined from at least two duration values corresponding to the first application type to which the first application belongs The value is used as the timing duration of the first timer.
  • the terminal When the first timer times out (that is, when the timing value of the first timer exceeds the first duration value), the terminal requests the network device to release the RRC connection of the terminal.
  • the timing duration of the first timer is set according to the duration value corresponding to the application type to which the application belongs, so that the timing duration of the first timer used to control the release of the RRC connection is adapted to the application running in the foreground.
  • the data transmission situation of an application program controls the release of the RRC connection, thereby saving the power consumption of the terminal.
  • a RRC connection release control method comprising:
  • the first application of the terminal When the first application of the terminal is running in the foreground, determine the timing of the first timer corresponding to the first application, where the first timer is the timer used when the terminal is in the RRC connection state.
  • the first timer When the terminal is in the RRC connection state, the first timer starts timing, and when there is information exchange between the terminal and the network device, the first timer is reset;
  • the terminal When detecting a preset operation for the first application, the terminal establishes an RRC connection with the network device;
  • the first timer starts timing
  • the terminal When the timing value of the first timer exceeds the timing duration, the terminal requests the network device to release the RRC connection.
  • a first timer is set in the terminal, and the first timer is the timer used when the terminal is in the RRC connection state.
  • the first timer Start timing, when the terminal receives the data sent by the network device, the first timer is reset, and the RRC connection release is controlled through the first timer.
  • the timing duration of the first timer is set according to the timing duration corresponding to the first application program, and when the first timer times out (that is, the timing value of the first timer exceeds the When the timing duration), the terminal requests the network device to release the RRC connection of the terminal.
  • the timing duration of the first timer is set according to the timing duration corresponding to the first application, the timing of the first timer for controlling the release of the RRC connection is made.
  • the duration is adapted to the application running in the foreground, so that the release of the RRC connection can be controlled according to the data transmission situation of the first application, thereby saving the power consumption of the terminal.
  • the information interaction includes at least one of the following situations:
  • the terminal receives the downlink signaling sent by the network device
  • the terminal sends uplink signaling to the network device.
  • the first timer when the first timer is running, if there is information interaction between the terminal and the network device (such as receiving downlink data or signaling, or sending uplink data or signaling), the first timer The timer is reset, so that the release of the RRC connection can be controlled based on the first timer.
  • the determining the timing duration of the first timer corresponding to the first application includes:
  • the timing duration of the first timer can be set for the application type, so that the first timer corresponding to the applications belonging to the same application type is The timing duration is the same, so that the RRC connection release can be controlled based on the same timing duration for applications belonging to the same application type.
  • the determining the time duration of the first timer corresponding to the application type to which the first application belongs includes:
  • the timing duration of the first timer is the timing duration corresponding to the first application type
  • the timing length of the first timer is the timing duration corresponding to the second application type
  • the The timing duration corresponding to the second application type is the same as or different from the timing duration corresponding to the first type.
  • timing durations are set for different application types.
  • the duration sets the timing duration of the first timer, so that the RRC connection release control is performed based on the first timer, so that the RRC connection release control is adapted to the transmission characteristics of the application running in the foreground, thereby saving the power consumption of the terminal.
  • the method further includes:
  • the timing duration of the first timer is adjusted.
  • the timing of the first timer is adjusted based on the statistical result of the data transmission volume, so that the timing of the first timer is dynamically adjustable, so that the timing of the first timer can be adaptively adjusted according to the data transmission situation.
  • the duration can be matched with the data transmission situation, thereby saving the power consumption of the terminal.
  • the first application corresponds to at least two duration values
  • the determining the timing duration corresponding to the first timer of the first application includes: determining the duration of the first timer.
  • the timing duration is the first duration value in the at least two duration values
  • the adjusting the timing duration of the first timer based on the statistical result includes: if the statistical result is greater than a first threshold, changing the timing duration of the first timer by the first duration value is increased to the second duration value; or, after the terminal and the network device do not have the information interaction within the timing duration of the first timer, if the statistical result is less than the second threshold, the The timing duration of the first timer is reduced from the first duration value to the third duration value; or, if the statistical result is greater than the first threshold, the timing duration of the first timer is reduced from the first duration value Increase to the second duration value; after the terminal and the network device do not have the information interaction within the timing duration of the first timing, if the statistical result is less than the second threshold, the first timing The timing duration of the timer is reduced from the first duration value to a third duration value, wherein the second threshold is less than or equal to the first threshold.
  • the timing of the first timer can reduce the probability of prematurely releasing the RRC connection. Save the power consumption of the terminal. If the statistical result of data transmission is less than the second threshold, it indicates that data transmission and reception is sparse. In this case, reducing the timing of the first timer can reduce the probability of releasing the RRC connection too late, thereby saving the power consumption of the terminal.
  • the second duration value is ⁇ times the first duration value
  • the first duration value is ⁇ times the third duration value
  • ⁇ is a fixed value greater than 1. Based on the multiple relationship between the second duration value, the first duration value and the third duration value, when adjusting the value of the timing duration, it can be gradually increased or decreased to avoid an excessive adjustment range.
  • the method further include:
  • the terminal re-enters the RRC connected state, the first timer starts timing, and the timing duration of the first timer is the third duration value;
  • the first timer is reset
  • the terminal When the timing value of the first timer exceeds the timing duration, the terminal requests the network device to release the RRC connection.
  • the method further includes: the first module of the terminal sends a message to the second module of the terminal a first instruction, where the first instruction carries indication information used to indicate the timing of the first timer; the second module sets the timing of the first timer of the terminal according to the indication information duration.
  • the first module includes an application processor of the terminal
  • the second module includes a modem of the terminal.
  • the first application remains running in the foreground.
  • determining the timing duration of the first timer corresponding to the first application includes: when the first application runs to When in the foreground, determine the timing duration of the first timer corresponding to the first application, wherein, when the first application is run at the first time, the timing duration is the first duration value, and in the first When the first application program is run at the second time, the value of the timing duration is a fourth duration value, and the first duration value is different from the fourth duration value.
  • the timing duration of the first timer corresponding to the first application can be updated, so that at different times, when the first application runs to the foreground, the determined timing duration corresponding to the first application is different.
  • the timing duration of the first timer corresponding to the first application may be updated according to the statistical results of data transmission during the running of the first application in the foreground, so that the timing of the first timer is The duration is adapted to the data transfer characteristics of the first application.
  • the application type to which the first application belongs corresponds to at least two duration values
  • the determining the timing duration of the first timer corresponding to the first application includes: determining the at least two durations.
  • the maximum value of the duration values is used as the timing duration of the first timer; and/or the first duration value is less than or equal to the timing duration of the inactivity timer configured on the network device.
  • the timing duration of the first timer is set to the maximum value of at least two duration values corresponding to the first application, It can reduce the probability that the RRC connection is released prematurely. In this way, if the data transmission and reception of the first application is intensive, the data transmission and reception of the first application can be guaranteed, thereby ensuring the data transmission of the first application and reducing the power consumption of the terminal.
  • the first duration value is less than or equal to the timing duration of the inactivity timer configured on the network device, so that the adjustment range of the timing duration of the first timer can reach the default configuration on the network device.
  • the timing duration of the inactivity timer is such that the performance (such as power consumption and/or delay) of the terminal can be at least equal to the performance of the network side.
  • a third aspect provides a RRC connection release control method, comprising:
  • the terminal requests the network device to release the RRC connection of the terminal.
  • the terminal determines whether there is information interaction with the network device within the timing period. If there is no information interaction, the terminal requests the network equipment to release the RRC connection of the terminal. It can be seen that the timing period is used to control RRC connection release.
  • the timing period is used to control RRC connection release.
  • the information interaction includes at least one of the following situations:
  • the terminal receives the downlink signaling sent by the network device
  • the terminal sends uplink signaling to the network device.
  • the terminal in the downlink direction, if the terminal does not receive the data or signaling sent by the network device within the timing period, the terminal can request the network device to release the RRC connection to reduce the power consumption of the terminal; in the uplink direction , if the terminal has no data or signaling sent to the network device within the timing period, the terminal may request the network device to release the RRC connection to reduce the power consumption of the terminal.
  • the method further includes: if there is information interaction between the terminal and the network device within the timing period, taking the time when the information interaction occurs at the terminal as a starting point, restarting Perform the following steps:
  • the terminal requests the network device to release the RRC connection of the terminal.
  • the timing is restarted from the time when the current information interaction occurs to determine whether the terminal is connected to the network within the timing period of restarting the timing.
  • the network device is requested to release the RRC connection, and then the RRC connection can be requested to save the terminal power.
  • the data transmission of the first application is guaranteed.
  • the determining the timing duration corresponding to the first application includes: determining the timing duration corresponding to the application type to which the first application belongs.
  • the determining the timing duration corresponding to the application type to which the first application belongs includes:
  • the timing duration is the timing duration corresponding to the first application type
  • the timing duration is the timing duration corresponding to the second application type, and the second application type corresponds to The timing duration of is the same as or different from the timing duration corresponding to the first type.
  • the application type to which the first application belongs corresponds to at least two duration values; and the determining the timing duration corresponding to the application type to which the first application belongs includes: determining the at least two duration values.
  • the first duration value of the duration values is the value of the timing duration.
  • this design solution can provide support for the following solution: according to the specific situation of data transmission, a duration value matching the current situation is selected from the at least two duration values, so as to further save the power consumption of the terminal.
  • the first application program corresponds to at least two duration values; the determining the timing duration corresponding to the first application program includes: determining a first duration among the at least two duration values The value is the value of the timing duration.
  • determining the timing duration corresponding to the first application includes: determining a value of the timing duration as a first duration value corresponding to the first application;
  • the method further includes: performing statistics on the data transmission of the terminal in the RRC connection state, and obtaining statistical results; Statistical results are used to adjust the value of the timing duration.
  • the terminal can perform statistics on data transmission, and adjust the timing duration used for RRC connection release control according to the statistical results, so as to dynamically adjust the time period used for RRC connection release control according to the data transmission situation. time, thereby saving terminal power consumption.
  • the "to make statistics on the data transmission of the terminal in the RRC connected state” refers to the time period from when the terminal enters the RRC connected state to when the RRC connection is released (the terminal is always in the RRC connection state during this time period). connection state), and statistics the data transmission in this time period.
  • the method further includes: judging whether the terminal and the network device are within the timing duration after the value adjustment is adjusted. There is information exchange; if there is no information exchange, the terminal requests the network device to release the RRC connection of the terminal.
  • the terminal determines, based on the adjusted timing duration, whether there is information interaction between the terminal and the network device within the adjusted timing duration, and determines whether there is any information interaction between the terminal and the network device within the adjusted timing duration.
  • the network device is requested to release the RRC connection of the terminal, so that the RRC connection release control based on the dynamically adjusted timing duration can be implemented.
  • the adjusting the value of the timing duration based on the statistical result includes:
  • the timing duration is increased from the first duration value to the second duration value; wherein, if the statistical result of data transmission is greater than the first threshold, it indicates that data transmission and reception is intensive, In this case, increasing the value of the timing duration can reduce the probability of prematurely releasing the RRC connection, thereby saving the power consumption of the terminal.
  • the value of the timing duration is the first duration value
  • the value of the timing duration is reduced from the first duration value to the third duration value; wherein, if the statistical result of data transmission is less than the second threshold, it indicates that data transmission and reception is sparse, and the timing duration is reduced for this situation
  • the value of can reduce the probability of releasing the RRC connection too late, thereby saving the power consumption of the terminal;
  • the value of the timing duration is increased from the first duration value to the second duration value; when within the timing duration (the timing duration value is the first duration value), after the terminal and the network device do not have the information exchange, if the statistical result is less than the second threshold, the value of the timing duration is reduced from the first duration value to A third duration value, wherein the second threshold is less than or equal to the first threshold.
  • the second duration value is ⁇ times the first duration value
  • the first duration value is ⁇ times the third duration value
  • ⁇ is a fixed value greater than 1. Based on the multiple relationship between the second duration value, the first duration value and the third duration value, when adjusting the value of the timing duration, it can be gradually increased or decreased to avoid an excessive adjustment range.
  • the method further includes: the terminal re-enters the RRC connected state ; determine whether there is information interaction between the terminal and the network device within the timing duration, and the value of the timing duration is the third duration value; if there is no information interaction, the terminal requests the The network device releases the RRC connection of the terminal.
  • the RRC connection release is still controlled based on the adjusted third duration value.
  • the terminal determines that the first application is running
  • the value of the timing duration corresponding to the application type to which the program belongs is the first duration value, and after the terminal re-establishes the RRC connection, the RRC connection release is controlled based on the first duration value.
  • the timing duration remains unchanged before and after the RRC connection is re-established, but when the first application switches between the front and the back, it is necessary to reset the The timing duration, so that the timing duration used for controlling the release of the RRC connection is adapted to the application currently running in the foreground, so that the power consumption of the terminal can be saved.
  • the method further includes:
  • the value of the timing duration is increased from the third duration value to the first duration value. Reduce the chance of prematurely releasing the RRC connection, thereby saving the power consumption of the terminal;
  • the terminal If there is no information exchange between the terminal and the network device within the timing period, the terminal requests the network device to release the RRC connection; if the statistical result is less than the second threshold, it indicates that data transmission and reception is sparse, and for In this case, the value of the timing duration is reduced from the third duration value to the fourth duration value, which can reduce or avoid the probability of releasing the RRC connection too late, thereby saving the power consumption of the terminal.
  • the method further includes: if within the timing duration valued as the third duration value, the terminal There is information interaction with the network device, and the following steps are re-executed with the time when the information interaction occurs at the terminal as a starting point:
  • the timing is restarted from the time when the current information interaction occurs to determine whether the timing is restarted. Whether there is information interaction between the terminal and the network device within the timing duration of RRC connection, so that the data transmission of the first application can be guaranteed while saving the power consumption of the terminal by requesting to release the RRC connection.
  • the method further includes: the first module of the terminal sends a first instruction to the second module of the terminal, the The first instruction carries indication information for indicating the timing duration; the second module sets the timing duration of the first timer of the terminal to the value of the timing duration according to the indication information.
  • the judging whether there is the information interaction between the terminal and the network device within the timing duration includes: judging whether there is information interaction between the terminal and the network device during the running of the first timer , wherein, if during the running period of the first timer, there is information interaction between the terminal and the network device, the first timer is reset.
  • the first timer is used to control the release of the RRC connection, so as to reduce the difficulty of technical implementation.
  • the first module sends an instruction to the second module, so that the second module sets the timing duration of the first timer to the value of the timing duration, so that the first timer counts according to the timing duration, and when the During the running of the timer, if there is information interaction with the network device, the first timer is reset, so that the release of the RRC connection can be controlled based on the first timer.
  • the method further includes: if there is no information interaction between the terminal and the network device within the timing duration, The first module of the terminal sends a second instruction to the second module of the terminal, where the second instruction is used to instruct the second module to request the network device to release the RRC connection.
  • the first module is used to determine whether there is the information interaction between the terminal and the network device within the timing period, and when it is determined that the information interaction does not exist, an instruction is sent to the second module to indicate the first
  • the second module requests the network device to release the RRC connection, so as to control the release of the RRC connection.
  • the first module includes an application processor of the terminal
  • the second module includes a modem of the terminal.
  • the application processor sends instructions to the modem to control the release of the RRC connection, which is simple and easy to implement in technology, adapts to the hardware architecture of the terminal, and has little impact on the terminal structure.
  • the method further includes:
  • the timing duration is updated to the timing duration corresponding to the application running to the foreground.
  • the timing duration corresponding to the first application after determining the timing duration corresponding to the first application, if the first application is closed or switched to run in the background, it is determined whether there is an application running in the current foreground, and if not, the duration of the timing is maintained. The duration value remains unchanged, which simplifies technical implementation; otherwise, the timing duration is updated to the timing duration corresponding to the application currently running in the foreground, so that the timing duration is adapted to the application running in the foreground to reduce terminal power consumption.
  • determining the timing duration corresponding to the first application includes: when the first application is running in the foreground, determining all The timing duration corresponding to the first application, when running the first application at the first time, the timing duration is the first timing value; when running the first application at the second time , the value of the timing duration is a fifth duration value, and the first timing value is different from the fifth duration value.
  • the value of the timing duration may be different at different times, so that the timing duration used to control the release of the RRC connection can be dynamically adjusted.
  • the application type to which the first application belongs corresponds to at least two duration values
  • the determining the timing duration corresponding to the first application includes: determining one of the at least two duration values The first duration value is taken as the value of the timing duration, wherein the first duration value is the maximum value among the at least two duration values; and/or, the first duration value is less than or equal to the value of the The duration of the configured inactivity timer.
  • the timing duration is set to the maximum value of at least two duration values corresponding to the first application program, which can reduce the number of times the RRC connection is blocked.
  • the probability of premature release so that if the data transmission and reception of the first application is intensive, the data transmission and reception of the first application can be guaranteed, so that a balance can be obtained between ensuring the data transmission of the first application and reducing the power consumption of the terminal;
  • the first duration value is less than or equal to the timing duration of the inactivity timer configured on the network device, so that the adjustment range of the timing duration used for controlling the release of the RRC connection can reach the maximum inactivity timer configured by default on the network device.
  • the duration of the activity timer is such that the performance (such as power consumption and/or delay) of the terminal can be at least equal to the performance of the network side.
  • a fourth aspect provides a RRC connection release control method, comprising:
  • the terminal Based on the statistical result, adjust the timing duration of the first timer of the terminal, where the first timer is a timer used by the terminal in the RRC connection state, and the timing value of the first timer exceeds When the adjusted timing duration is reached, the terminal requests the network device to release the RRC connection of the terminal.
  • the timing of the first timer is adjusted based on the statistical result of the data transmission volume, so that the timing of the first timer is dynamically adjustable, so that the timing of the first timer can be adaptively adjusted according to the data transmission situation.
  • the duration can be matched with the data transmission situation, thereby saving the power consumption of the terminal.
  • the method further includes: when at least one of the following conditions is met, the first timer is reset:
  • the terminal receives downlink data
  • the terminal receives downlink signaling
  • the terminal sends uplink data
  • the terminal sends uplink signaling.
  • the reset of the first timer means that the first timer starts to count again.
  • the data transmission volume of the terminal includes: the data transmission volume of the application running in the foreground, and/or the data transmission volume of the application running in the background.
  • the data transmission of the application running in the foreground can be counted separately, so that the first timer is adjusted based on the statistical result of the data transmission amount of the application running in the foreground, so that the first timer is adjusted.
  • the timing of the first timer is adapted to the application running in the foreground; further, when there is a background application running, the data transmission amount of the application running.
  • the statistical result of the data transmission amount of the application program adjusts the timing duration of the first timer, so that the timing duration of the first timer is adapted to the applications running in the foreground and the background.
  • the adjusting the timing duration of the first timer based on the statistical result includes:
  • the value of the timing duration of the first timer is increased from the first duration value to the second duration value; wherein, if the statistical result of the data transmission amount is greater than the first threshold, It indicates that data transmission and reception is intensive, and in this case, increasing the timing of the first timer can reduce the probability of prematurely releasing the RRC connection, thereby saving the power consumption of the terminal;
  • the timing duration value of the first timer is reduced from the first duration value to The third duration value, the second threshold is less than or equal to the first threshold; wherein, if the statistical result of the data transmission amount is less than the second threshold, it indicates that data transmission and reception is sparse, and in this case, the first timer is reduced. It can reduce the probability of releasing the RRC connection too late, thereby saving the power consumption of the terminal.
  • the terminal may request the network device to release the RRC connection. If the statistical result is greater than the first threshold, it indicates that the previous period of time In this case, the data transmission and reception is relatively intensive. In this case, the timing of the first timer is increased.
  • the first timer can be based on the adjusted second duration. value for timing, thereby reducing the probability of prematurely releasing the RRC connection, thereby saving the power consumption of the terminal;
  • the statistical result is greater than the first threshold, increasing the value of the timing duration of the first timer from the first duration value to the second duration value, including: in all When the terminal is in the RRC connected state, if the statistical result is greater than the first threshold, the value of the timing duration of the first timer is increased from the first duration value to the second duration value.
  • the statistical result of the data transmission volume is greater than the first threshold, it indicates that the data transmission and reception is intensive.
  • increasing the timing of the first timer can reduce the premature release of RRC. The probability of connection, thereby saving the power consumption of the terminal.
  • the method further includes: acquiring at least two duration values corresponding to the first timer; and determining a duration value greater than the first duration value among the at least two duration values as the second duration value; and/or, acquiring at least two duration values corresponding to the first timer; determining a duration value smaller than the first duration value among the at least two duration values as the first duration value Three duration values.
  • the determining a duration value greater than the first duration value among the at least two duration values as the second duration value includes: setting the at least two duration values greater than the first duration value as the second duration value The minimum value of the first duration value is used as the second duration value.
  • Determining a duration value smaller than the first duration value among the at least two duration values as the third duration value includes: determining a maximum duration value smaller than the first duration value among the at least two duration values value as the third duration.
  • the above design solution can make the timing duration of the first timer gradually increase or decrease gradually, so as to avoid an excessive adjustment range.
  • the acquiring at least two duration values corresponding to the first timer includes: acquiring the at least two duration values corresponding to the application running in the foreground; or, according to the application running in the foreground The application type to which the program belongs, and the at least two duration values corresponding to the application type are obtained.
  • the obtained duration value can be adapted to the application or the application type to which the application belongs, so that the timing duration of the first timer is adapted to the application running in the foreground or the application type to which the application belongs.
  • the RRC connection release can be controlled according to the data transmission characteristics of the application running in the foreground or the application type to which the application belongs.
  • the method further includes: if the at least two duration values are not obtained according to the application type to which the application running in the foreground belongs; obtaining the at least two duration values corresponding to the universal first timer two duration values, so that in the above situation, the timing duration of the first timer can still be dynamically adjusted.
  • the application running in the foreground includes at least two applications
  • the at least two application types corresponding to the application type are acquired according to the application type to which the application running in the foreground belongs.
  • the duration value includes: acquiring the at least two duration values corresponding to the application type according to the application type to which the first application belongs.
  • the first application is an application with a higher priority among the at least two applications; or, among the at least two applications, at least two applications corresponding to the application type to which the first application belongs.
  • the maximum value among the duration values is not less than the maximum value among at least two duration values corresponding to the application types to which other applications belong.
  • the timing duration of the first timer can be set according to at least two duration values corresponding to the application with the highest priority among the multiple applications running in the foreground, so that While saving the power consumption of the terminal, the data transmission of the application with high priority can be guaranteed first.
  • the at least two duration values are arranged in an order from large to small or from small to large, and among two adjacent duration values, the duration value with the larger value is the duration with the smaller value ⁇ times the value, where ⁇ is a fixed value greater than 1.
  • the maximum value of the at least two duration values is less than or equal to the timing duration of the inactivity timer configured on the network device, so that the adjustment range of the timing duration of the first timer can be made
  • the maximum duration of the inactivity timer configured by default on the network device is reached, so that the behavior of the terminal does not conflict with the behavior of the network device.
  • the method further includes: obtaining the first threshold and the second threshold corresponding to the application type according to the application type to which the application running in the foreground belongs; or, obtaining a general the first threshold and the second threshold.
  • the first threshold and the second threshold corresponding to the application type are acquired, so that the acquired first threshold and the second threshold are used for It is judged whether to adjust the timing duration of the first timer, so that the RRC connection release control operation is adapted to the application type to which the application running in the foreground belongs, thereby reducing the power consumption of the terminal.
  • the method further includes: if the first threshold and the second threshold corresponding to the application type are not obtained according to the application type to which the application running in the foreground belongs, obtaining the first threshold and the second threshold corresponding to the application type.
  • the general first threshold and the second threshold are used to judge whether the timing duration of the first timer needs to be adjusted, so that the timing duration of the first timer can still be dynamically adjusted in the above situation.
  • the first threshold and all the first thresholds corresponding to the application types are acquired according to the application types to which the applications running in the foreground belong.
  • the second threshold including:
  • the first application is an application with a higher priority among the at least two applications; or, among the at least two applications, at least two applications corresponding to the application type to which the first application belongs.
  • the maximum value among the duration values is not less than the maximum value among at least two duration values corresponding to the application types to which other applications belong.
  • the timing duration of the first timer can be determined according to the first threshold and the second threshold corresponding to the application program with the highest priority among the multiple application programs running in the foreground. The adjustment is made so that the data transmission of the application with high priority can be ensured first while saving the power consumption of the terminal.
  • the method further includes:
  • each group of candidate durations includes at least two duration values, and N is an integer greater than or equal to 1;
  • each group of candidate thresholds in the M groups of candidate thresholds includes a first threshold and a second threshold, and M is an integer greater than or equal to 1;
  • each of the candidate combinations includes a group of candidate durations and a group of candidate thresholds, and K is an integer greater than or equal to 2;
  • each candidate combination of the K candidate combinations is used to simulate the adjustment of the timing of the first timer, and the RRC connection release statistics result corresponding to each candidate combination is obtained.
  • the optimal candidate combination is selected to obtain at least two duration values corresponding to the application type to which the first application belongs and at least two duration values corresponding to the application type to which the first application belongs. the first threshold and the second threshold.
  • the distribution characteristics of the data packet interval are obtained, and the N groups of candidate durations and the M groups of candidate thresholds are combined, and the result obtained by the combination is obtained.
  • the distribution characteristics of the data packet interval simulate the adjustment of the timing of the first timer, and obtain the RRC connection release statistical results corresponding to each candidate combination, so as to obtain the optimal combination, and then obtain the desired combination.
  • the optimal candidate combination including:
  • the false release rate corresponding to each candidate combination and the ratio of the RRC disconnected state duration to the statistical time duration, and the false release rate is determined.
  • the rate is used to indicate the proportion of the number of false releases to the number of random accesses
  • a first candidate combination is selected from the K candidate combinations, the false release rate corresponding to the first candidate combination is less than the set threshold, and the RRC non-connected state duration accounts for the largest proportion of the statistical duration.
  • the optimal candidate combination since the false release rate corresponding to the optimal candidate combination is less than the set threshold, and the RRC non-connected state duration accounts for the largest proportion of the statistical duration, under the same conditions, the optimal candidate combination is adopted.
  • the RRC connection release is controlled, and the effect of saving power consumption is not lower than that of other candidate combinations.
  • the method further includes:
  • each group of candidate durations includes at least two duration values, and N is an integer greater than or equal to 1;
  • each group of candidate thresholds in the M groups of candidate thresholds includes a first threshold and a second threshold, and M is an integer greater than or equal to 1;
  • each of the candidate combinations includes a group of candidate durations and a group of candidate thresholds, and K is an integer greater than or equal to 2;
  • the Markov state transition probability matrix corresponding to each candidate combination determine the value of the objective function for evaluating the optimal candidate combination, where the value of the objective function is used to indicate that the terminal is in an RRC connection within the statistical time period The duration in the RRC state or in the RRC disconnected state;
  • the distribution characteristics of the data packet interval are obtained, and the N groups of candidate durations and the M groups of candidate thresholds are combined, and the result obtained by the combination is obtained.
  • the Markov state transition probability matrix corresponding to each candidate combination is determined according to the distribution characteristics of the data packet interval, and the Markov state transition probability matrix corresponding to each candidate combination is determined for evaluation.
  • the value of the objective function of the optimal candidate combination so as to obtain the optimal combination, and then obtain a set of durations and a set of thresholds corresponding to the application type to which the first application belongs, so that the first application or the first application
  • the at least two duration values, the first threshold and the second threshold corresponding to the application type to which it belongs are adapted to the data packet interval distribution characteristics of the first application.
  • the generating N groups of candidate durations includes: generating the N groups of candidate durations according to a preset rule.
  • the adjusting the timing duration of the first timer of the terminal includes:
  • the first module of the terminal sends an instruction to the second module of the terminal, where the instruction carries indication information for indicating the timing duration of the first timer;
  • the second module sets the timing duration of the first timer according to the indication information.
  • the first module is an application processor
  • the second module is a modem
  • the application processor sends an instruction to the modem to realize the setting of the timing duration of the first timer, which is simple and easy to implement in terms of technology, and is compatible with the hardware architecture of the terminal.
  • the indication information further carries indication information used to instruct the terminal to enter an idle state or an inactive state after the RRC connection is released. Since the instruction sent by the application processor to the modem may also carry instruction information for indicating that the terminal enters the idle state or the inactive state after the RRC connection is released, the terminal can be made to enter the idle state or the inactive state after releasing the RRC connection according to the situation. , which improves system flexibility.
  • the statistical results include at least one of the following:
  • the throughput rate of the received data is the throughput rate of the received data
  • the bit rate of the received data is the bit rate of the received data.
  • the statistical results obtained by performing statistics on data transmission can reflect the density of data transmission.
  • the timing duration of the first timer is set or adjusted, so that the timing duration of the first timer can be adjusted. Adapting to the density of data transmission, it can reduce or avoid excessive random access processes caused by too frequent RRC connection release, or reduce or avoid no data transmission for a long time but not release RRC connection in time, and then can Save terminal power consumption.
  • a fifth aspect provides a RRC connection release control method, comprising:
  • the first timer is a timer used when the terminal is in the RRC connection state.
  • the terminal enters the RRC disconnected state.
  • the first timer receives a data packet, the first timer is reset, that is, the timing is restarted.
  • the timing duration of the first timer of the terminal is set to the first timing duration value corresponding to the first application program, and when the timing of the first timer exceeds all
  • the terminal requests the network device to release the RRC connection of the terminal, so as to control the release of the RRC connection based on the first timer. Since the timing duration of the first timer is the duration value corresponding to the foreground application, the timing duration of the first timer is adapted to the application running in the foreground, so that the RRC can be adjusted according to the data transmission of the first application. The connection release is controlled, thereby saving the power consumption of the terminal.
  • determining the first duration value corresponding to the first application includes: determining the first duration value corresponding to the application type to which the first application belongs. duration value.
  • the determining the first duration value corresponding to the application type to which the first application belongs includes:
  • the first duration value is the duration value corresponding to the first application type
  • the first duration value is the duration value corresponding to the second application type
  • the second application type The duration value corresponding to the type is the same as or different from the duration value corresponding to the first type.
  • the setting the timing duration of the first timer of the terminal to the first duration value includes: the first module of the terminal sending a first instruction to the second module of the terminal , the first instruction carries indication information for indicating the first duration value; the second module sets the timing duration of the first timer of the terminal to the first duration according to the indication information value.
  • the first module is an application processor, and the second module is a modem.
  • the method further includes: when the timing duration of the first timer of the terminal exceeds At the first duration value, the first module of the terminal sends a second instruction to the second module of the terminal, where the second instruction is used to instruct the second module to request the network device to release the RRC connection.
  • the first module is an application processor
  • the second module is a modem.
  • the method further includes: when at least one of the following conditions is met, the first timer is reset:
  • the terminal receives downlink data
  • the terminal receives downlink signaling
  • the terminal sends uplink data
  • the terminal sends uplink signaling.
  • the application type to which the first application belongs corresponds to at least two duration values; and the setting the timing duration of the first timer of the terminal to the first duration value includes: setting all The timing duration of the first timer is set to the first duration value among the at least two duration values.
  • the method further includes: the terminal enters an RRC connected state;
  • the method further includes:
  • the timing duration of the first timer is adjusted.
  • the adjusting the timing duration of the first timer based on the statistical result includes: if the statistical result is greater than a first threshold, adjusting the timing of the first timer The duration is increased from the first duration value to the second duration value; when the timing of the first timer exceeds the timing duration, a request is made to the network device to release the RRC connection; if the statistical result is less than the second threshold, Then, the timing duration of the first timer is reduced from the first duration value to a third duration value, wherein the second threshold is less than or equal to the first threshold.
  • the method further includes: The terminal re-enters the RRC connected state, and the timing duration of the first timer is the third duration value.
  • the method further includes:
  • timing duration of the first timer exceeds the third duration value, request the network device to release the RRC connection; if the statistical result is less than the second threshold, set the timing duration of the first timer It is reduced from the third duration value to the fourth duration value.
  • the first application remains running in the foreground.
  • the method further includes:
  • the timing duration of the first timer is set to a duration value corresponding to the application running to the foreground.
  • the value of the first duration value is a first value; at a second time, the value of the first duration value is a second value, and the first value value is different from the second value.
  • the application type to which the first application belongs corresponds to at least two duration values
  • the first duration value is the maximum value of the at least two duration values; and/or, the The first duration value is less than or equal to the duration of the inactivity timer configured on the network device.
  • a communication device in a sixth aspect, includes at least one processor, the at least one processor is connected to a memory, and the at least one processor is configured to read and execute a program stored in the memory, to The apparatus is caused to perform the method according to any one of the first, second, third, fourth and fifth aspects above, or any embodiment of the present invention.
  • a seventh aspect provides a chip, which is coupled to a memory for reading and executing program instructions stored in the memory, so as to implement the first, second, third, and fourth aspects described above and any one of the fifth aspect, or the method described in any embodiment of the present invention.
  • a computer-readable storage medium stores computer instructions, and when the instructions are executed on a computer, the computer is made to execute the first aspect, the second aspect, and the third aspect.
  • a ninth aspect provides a computer program product that, when invoked by a computer, causes the computer to execute any one of the first, second, third, fourth and fifth aspects above Or the method described in any embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a network architecture provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of cooperation between an application processor (AP) and a modem (modem) in an embodiment of the present application;
  • AP application processor
  • modem modem
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a software architecture of a terminal in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of signaling interaction of an RRC connection release control method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 6a is an RRC connection release timer adjustment process in the case where a candidate RRC connection release timer duration set is set in an embodiment of the present application;
  • Figure 6b is an RRC connection release timer adjustment process in the case of setting candidate RRC connection release timer duration sets for different applications respectively in an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of a Markov model state transition of an RRC release time in an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic flowchart of an online learning method in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of the principle of an online learning method in an embodiment of the present application.
  • 10a is a schematic diagram of a CDF curve of a packet interval in an embodiment of the present application.
  • 10b is a schematic diagram of a CDF curve of the number of packets in the embodiment of the application.
  • 11a is a schematic diagram of a CDF curve of a packet interval in an embodiment of the present application.
  • 11b is a schematic diagram of a CDF curve of the number of packets in the embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic flowchart of an offline learning method in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the data packet may be a data packet generated and sent to the corresponding application server when any application program (application, APP, also called an application) installed in the terminal is activated and accesses the corresponding application server.
  • the APP here can be a camera application, an instant messaging application (such as ), Internet short video applications (such as ), Internet long video applications (such as ), web browsing applications, games, etc. These applications may be applications preinstalled on the terminal before leaving the factory, or applications downloaded and installed by the terminal from the network side, or applications sent by the terminal receiving other terminals, which are not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the foreground application generally refers to: running an Activity window on the screen that the user is interacting with or a service bound to the Activity the user is interacting with, such as a notification listener or a voice text service, and everything else is in the background.
  • Background applications may be running and receiving data, such as Switching to the background, the application can also receive messages. For example, there are some news advertisement applications running in the background, and there may also be push messages.
  • each split-screen window can run one application, for example, a video-based application runs in the first split-screen window, and a social-based application runs in the second split-screen window, so that users can watch the video window of the video-based application. While the video is being played, chat is performed on the user interface of the social application.
  • the video application running in the first split-screen window and the social application running in the second split-screen window are both foreground applications.
  • the application processor in the terminal can listen for the launch of the application.
  • the application will send registration information to the application framework layer of the application processor.
  • the application processor listens to the application startup event, it can call the function topActivity.getPackageName() and obtain the foreground according to the return value of the function.
  • the application name of the application Another way to monitor application startup is for the application processor to call the queryUsageStats method in the UsageStatsManager, which returns information about the applications used in a certain period of time in a list, which includes each The mLastTimeUsed (last used time) and mPackageName (application name) of the application, where the application name with the latest last used time is the newly launched application.
  • the application processor may also obtain the name of the started application program in other ways, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the application processor can also listen to the switching behavior of the application.
  • the application processor can monitor the life cycle of the application by monitoring the life cycle of the Activity in the application, and then monitor the switching behavior of the application. For example, taking Activity A and Activity B as an example, when Activity A enters the foreground, its life cycle changes as: A.onStart(), A.onResume(); when switching from Activity A to Activity B, Activity A and The life cycle changes of Activity B are: A.onPause(), B.onStart(), B.onResume(), A.onStop(). It can be seen that onResume and onPause are a group, the two activities are called sequentially, onStart and onStop are a group, and the two activities are cross-called.
  • the application processor can use a global counter to count an application, the counter +1 in all Activity.onStart() of the application, and the counter -1 in all Activity.onStop() of the application.
  • the count value of the counter corresponding to an application program is greater than 0, it indicates that the application is in the foreground; when the count value of the counter corresponding to an application program is equal to 0, it indicates that the application is in the background.
  • the counter changes from 1 to 0, indicating that the corresponding application enters the background from the foreground; the counter changes from 0 to 1, indicating that the corresponding application enters the foreground from the background.
  • the application processor can also determine whether the application program has switched between the front and the back in other ways, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the application processor can also monitor the split-screen operation.
  • the application processor can receive the split-screen event, and can further obtain the split-screen window by calling the function topActivity.getPackageName(). the name of the application.
  • a timer can be configured on the terminal, which is referred to as the first timer here. It should be understood that the name of the timer is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the first timer may be named as RRC connection release. timer.
  • the first timer is called an RRC connection release timer, and it should be understood that the first timer and the RRC connection release timer have the same meaning.
  • the first timer is a timer used when the terminal is in an RRC connection state.
  • the terminal requests the network device to release the RRC connection of the terminal.
  • the time-out of the first timer can be understood as the timing value of the first timer exceeds the timing duration, that is, in the embodiment of the present application, the timing value of the first timer exceeds the timing duration, and the first timer is overtime, which has same meaning.
  • the first timer may count down according to the timing duration, and the first timer is reset when at least one of the following conditions is met:
  • the terminal receives downlink data
  • the terminal receives downlink signaling
  • the terminal sends uplink data
  • the terminal sends uplink signaling.
  • the data that the terminal interacts with the network device includes data associated with the application program of the terminal, such as: operation data generated by the terminal for the application program, data sent to the network device through the application program, and data associated with the application program sent by the network device to the terminal and many more.
  • the application can be a foreground application or a background application.
  • the signaling exchanged between the terminal and the network device includes, for example, signaling such as cell reselection, handover, and redirection.
  • the duration of the first timer is 8 seconds, and the first timer starts counting down from 8 seconds.
  • the terminal receives downlink data, and the first timer is reset, that is, the first timer is reset from 8 seconds.
  • Start the countdown that is, every time downlink data or downlink signaling is received, the first timer will be triggered to restart the countdown.
  • the first timer When the first timer counts down to 0, the first RRC timer times out.
  • the RRC connection release timer refers to the RRC connection release timer configured in the terminal, that is, the first timer.
  • setting the timing duration of the first timer, setting the timing duration of the first timer, setting the timing duration of the first timer/value of timing duration, or similar expressions have same meaning.
  • FIG. 1 exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of the architecture of a communication system to which the present application may be applied, and the communication system may include a network device and a terminal.
  • the communication system may include a network device and a terminal.
  • FIG. 1 it is illustrated by including one network device 101 and one terminal 100 as an example.
  • the network device 101 can communicate with the terminal 100 in a wireless manner, mainly using Uu air interface transmission.
  • the network device 101 includes an access network (access network, AN) device, which may also be referred to as a wireless access network device, and is used to connect a terminal to a device in a wireless network.
  • AN access network
  • a base station eg, an access point
  • the access network equipment may include an evolved base station (NodeB or eNB or e-NodeB, evolutional Node B) in the LTE system or long term evolution-advanced (LTE-A), or may also include Next generation node B (gNB), transmission reception point (TRP) (also known as transceiver node), baseband processing in the fifth generation mobile communication technology (the 5th generation, 5G) NR system Unit (building base band unit, BBU) and radio frequency unit (Radio Remote Unit, RRU), BBU and active antenna unit (active antenna unit, AAU), or can also include cloud radio access network (cloud radio access network, Cloud RAN) ) in the centralized unit (CU) and distributed unit (DU) in the system, or may also include the access point in the wireless fidelity (wireless fidelity, Wi-Fi) system, or may also include Radio network controller (RNC), network equipment controller (base station controller, BSC), network equipment transceiver station (base transceiver station, BTS), home network equipment (for example, home, home
  • the terminal 100 may be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a notebook computer, or a wearable device with a wireless communication function (such as a smart watch or smart glasses, etc.). Exemplary embodiments of the terminal include but are not limited to carrying Or other operating system devices.
  • the above-mentioned terminal may also be other portable devices, as long as the portable device can dynamically adjust the time duration of the RRC connection release timer. It should also be understood that, in some other embodiments of the present application, the above-mentioned terminal may not be a portable device, but a desktop computer that can implement the above-mentioned functions.
  • the communication system may be a long term evolution (long term evolution, LTE) system, a 5G communication system, such as a new radio (new radio, NR) system, a communication system that integrates multiple communication technologies (such as LTE technology and NR) technology fusion communication system), other communication systems, such as public land mobile network (Public Land Mobile Network, PLMN) system, or other communication systems that may appear in the future, etc., are not limited in this application.
  • LTE long term evolution
  • 5G communication system such as a new radio (new radio, NR) system
  • NR new radio
  • NR new radio
  • PLMN Public Land Mobile Network
  • the terminal 100 may include a processor 110, an external memory interface 120, an internal memory 121, a universal serial bus (USB) interface 130, a charging management module 140, a power management module 141, a battery 142, an antenna 1, an antenna 2, Mobile communication module 151, wireless communication module 152, audio module 170, speaker 170A, receiver 170B, microphone 170C, headphone jack 170D, sensor module 180, buttons 190, motor 191, indicator 192, camera 193, display screen 194, and user Identity module (subscriber identification module, SIM) card interface 195 and so on.
  • SIM subscriber identification module
  • the sensor module 180 may include a gyro sensor 180A, an acceleration sensor 180B, a fingerprint sensor 180H, a temperature sensor 180J, and a touch sensor 180K (of course, the terminal 100 may also include other sensors, such as pressure sensor, acceleration sensor, gyro sensor, ambient light sensors, bone conduction sensors, etc., not shown).
  • the terminal 100 may include more or less components than shown, or some components may be combined, or some components may be separated, or different component arrangements.
  • the illustrated components may be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.
  • the processor 110 may include one or more processing units, for example, the processor 110 may include an application processor (application processor, AP), a modem, a graphics processor (graphics processing unit, GPU), an image signal processor (image signal processor) signal processor, ISP), controller, memory, video codec, digital signal processor (DSP), baseband processor, and/or neural-network processing unit (NPU), etc. Wherein, different processing units may be independent devices, or may be integrated in one or more processors.
  • the controller may be the nerve center and command center of the terminal 100 . The controller can generate operation control signals according to the instruction opcode and timing signal, and complete the control of fetching and executing instructions.
  • memory may also be provided in the processor 110 for storing instructions and data.
  • the memory in the processor 110 may be a cache memory. This memory may hold instructions or data that have just been used or recycled by the processor 110 . If the processor 110 needs to use the instruction or data again, it can be called directly from memory. Repeated accesses are avoided and the latency of the processor 110 is reduced, thereby increasing the efficiency of the system.
  • Internal memory 121 may be used to store one or more computer programs including instructions.
  • the processor 110 executes various functional applications and data processing of the terminal 100 by executing the instructions stored in the internal memory 121 .
  • the internal memory 121 may include a storage program area and a storage data area. Among them, the stored program area can store the operating system, the code of the application program, and the like.
  • the storage data area can store the statistical results of data transmission recorded during the use of the terminal 100, the threshold (used to determine whether the condition for adjusting the duration of the RRC connection release timer is satisfied), and the like.
  • the internal memory 121 may include high-speed random access memory, and may also include non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, universal flash storage (UFS), and the like.
  • the processor 110 may cause the terminal 100 to perform the RRC connection release provided by the embodiments of the present application by executing the instructions stored in the internal memory 121 and/or the instructions stored in the memory provided in the processor 110 Control Method.
  • the code of the RRC connection release control method provided by the embodiment of the present application and information such as statistical results of data transmission may also be stored in an external memory.
  • the processor 110 may execute the code for releasing the RRC connection stored in the external memory through the external memory interface 120 .
  • the external memory interface 120 can be used to connect an external memory card (eg, a Micro SD card), so as to expand the storage capacity of the terminal 100.
  • the external memory card communicates with the processor 110 through the external memory interface 120 to realize the data storage function. For example, information such as statistical results obtained by the terminal performing data transmission statistics are stored in the external memory card.
  • the wireless communication function of the terminal 100 may be implemented by the antenna 1, the antenna 2, the mobile communication module 151, the wireless communication module 152, the modulation and demodulation processor, the baseband processor, and the like.
  • Antenna 1 and Antenna 2 are used to transmit and receive electromagnetic wave signals.
  • Each antenna in terminal 100 may be used to cover a single or multiple communication frequency bands. Different antennas can also be reused to improve antenna utilization.
  • the antenna 1 can be multiplexed as a diversity antenna of the wireless local area network. In other embodiments, the antenna may be used in conjunction with a tuning switch.
  • the mobile communication module 151 may provide a wireless communication solution including 2G/3G/4G/5G, etc. applied on the terminal 100 .
  • the mobile communication module 151 may include at least one filter, switch, power amplifier, low noise amplifier (LNA) and the like.
  • the mobile communication module 151 can receive electromagnetic waves from the antenna 1, filter and amplify the received electromagnetic waves, and transmit them to the modulation and demodulation processor for demodulation.
  • the mobile communication module 151 can also amplify the signal modulated by the modulation and demodulation processor, and then turn it into an electromagnetic wave for radiation through the antenna 1 .
  • at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 151 may be provided in the processor 110 .
  • at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 151 may be provided in the same device as at least part of the modules of the processor 110 .
  • the modem processor may include a modulator and a demodulator.
  • the modulator is used to modulate the low frequency baseband signal to be sent into a medium and high frequency signal.
  • the demodulator is used to demodulate the received electromagnetic wave signal into a low frequency baseband signal. Then the demodulator transmits the demodulated low-frequency baseband signal to the baseband processor for processing.
  • the low frequency baseband signal is processed by the baseband processor and passed to the application processor.
  • the application processor outputs sound signals through audio devices (not limited to the speaker 170A, the receiver 170B, etc.), or displays images or videos through the display screen 194 .
  • the modem processor may be a stand-alone device.
  • the modulation and demodulation processor may be independent of the processor 110, and may be provided in the same device as the mobile communication module 151 or other functional modules.
  • the wireless communication module 152 can provide applications on the terminal 100 including wireless local area networks (WLAN) (such as wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi) networks), global navigation satellite system (GNSS) ), and other wireless communication solutions.
  • the wireless communication module 152 may be one or more devices integrating at least one communication processing module.
  • the wireless communication module 152 receives electromagnetic waves via the antenna 2 , frequency modulates and filters the electromagnetic wave signals, and sends the processed signals to the processor 110 .
  • the wireless communication module 152 can also receive the signal to be sent from the processor 110 (eg, instruction information for instructing the network device to release the RRC connection), perform frequency modulation, amplify, and radiate it into electromagnetic waves through the antenna 2 .
  • the antenna 1 of the terminal 100 is coupled with the mobile communication module 151, and the antenna 2 is coupled with the wireless communication module 152, so that the terminal 100 can communicate with other devices.
  • the charging management module 140 is used to receive charging input from the charger.
  • the charger may be a wireless charger or a wired charger.
  • the charging management module 140 may receive charging input from the wired charger through the USB interface 130 .
  • the charging management module 140 may receive wireless charging input through the wireless charging coil of the terminal 100 . While the charging management module 140 charges the battery 142 , the terminal 100 can also be powered by the power management module 141 .
  • the power management module 141 is used for connecting the battery 142 , the charging management module 140 and the processor 110 .
  • the power management module 141 receives input from the battery 142 and/or the charging management module 141, and supplies power to the processor 110, the internal memory 121, the external memory interface 120, the display screen 194, the camera 193, and the like.
  • the power management module 141 can also be used to monitor parameters such as battery capacity, battery cycle times, battery health status (leakage, impedance).
  • the power management module 141 may also be provided in the processor 110 .
  • the power management module 141 and the charging management module 140 may also be provided in the same device.
  • the first module in the terminal and the second module in the terminal may cooperate with each other to implement the RRC connection release control method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the first module of the terminal may send a first instruction to the second module of the terminal, where the first instruction carries indication information for indicating the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer; the second module according to the instruction The information sets the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer of the terminal to the value of the timing duration.
  • the first module of the terminal sends a second instruction to the second module of the terminal, where the second instruction is used to instruct the second module to request the network device to release the RRC connection of the terminal.
  • the first module may be an application processor (AP) or its internal logic unit, and may also be other CPUs, digital signal processors (DSPs) or single-chip microcomputers, etc.; the second module may be a modem (modem) or its internal logic unit.
  • AP application processor
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • modem modem
  • FIG. 3 exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of an application processor (AP) and a modem (modem) cooperating with each other to implement an embodiment of the present application.
  • AP application processor
  • modem modem
  • the application processor collects statistics on the demodulated data of the modem, obtains a statistical result, and judges whether the timing of the RRC connection release timer needs to be adjusted according to the statistical result. It is judged that adjustment is required, and an instruction is sent to the modem to instruct the modem to adjust the time duration of the RRC connection release timer. More specifically, the application processor may send the target value of the duration of the RRC connection release timer to the modem through the instruction, so that the modem adjusts the duration of the RRC connection release timer to be equal to the target value. When the RRC connection release timer expires, the modem requests the network side to release the RRC connection. Alternatively, the application processor may send the adjustment value of the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer to the modem, so that the modem adjusts the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer by using the adjustment value.
  • the modem collects statistics on the demodulated data, obtains a statistical result, and judges whether the timing of the RRC connection release timer needs to be adjusted according to the statistical result, and if it is judged that adjustment is necessary, adjusts the RRC connection release The duration of the timer.
  • the modem requests the network side to release the RRC connection.
  • the application processor may set the value of the timing duration for performing RRC connection release timer control (the value may be one or more) and the threshold (the threshold may include one or more than one value). (for example, including a first threshold and a second threshold) is configured to the modem, so that the modem can perform RRC connection release control according to the value of the timing duration and the threshold.
  • the software architecture may include a hardware layer, a kernel layer, an application framework layer and an application layer from the lower layer to the upper layer.
  • the hardware layer includes various hardware circuit structures.
  • the kernel layer provides underlying drivers (such as display, positioning, audio, camera, Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, power management, etc.) for various hardware of the terminal, wherein the drivers related to the embodiments of the present application include modem drivers.
  • drivers such as display, positioning, audio, camera, Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, power management, etc.
  • the application framework layer is used to provide various system components and application components, wherein the components related to the embodiments of the present application include an RRC control component to implement RRC connection management, such as including RRC connection release, setting of RRC connection release timer Wait.
  • RRC control component may be included in the modem.
  • the application layer including various applications, such as video applications, games, etc.
  • the terminal can be divided into a disconnected state mode (including RRC idle state and RRC inactive state) and a connected mode (also called RRC connected state):
  • RRC disconnected state (RRC-IDLE state or RRC INACTIVE state), there is no RRC connection between the terminal and the network, so the power consumption is low;
  • RRC connection there is an RRC connection between the terminal and the network, so the power consumption is relatively high.
  • the RRC connection can be established on the dedicated physical channel, and the terminal is in the dedicated channel (DCH) state, which can transmit a large amount of user data; the RRC connection can also be established on the shared channel, and the terminal is in the forward access channel at this time.
  • FACH forward access channel
  • the terminal will continue to monitor the FACH transmission channel in the downlink direction, and can use a common or shared transmission channel (such as random access channel, RACH) in the uplink direction to transmit a small amount of user data.
  • the power consumption of the terminal can be represented by current consumption.
  • RRC-IDLE state when the terminal needs to transmit data packets, it sends an RRC connection setup request to the network device to request the establishment of an RRC connection. After the RRC connection is established, it enters the RRC-CONNECTED state.
  • RRC-CONNECTED state after the user data transmission is completed, if there is no data transmission within a set period of time (that is, there is no information exchange between the terminal and the network device within the set time), the RRC connection is released, and the terminal enters the RRC-CONNECTED state.
  • IDLE state or RRC INACTIVE state ie: RRC disconnected state).
  • the terminal if the terminal does not receive data within a fixed period of time after the screen is off, it can request to release the RRC connection.
  • the timing duration can also be other values, such as: 2 seconds, 3 seconds, etc., which is not limited in this embodiment of the application), the terminal requests the network device to release the RRC connection if no data arrives; in the terminal bright screen scenario, the base station is configured on the base station side When the inactivity timer corresponding to the terminal expires, the RRC connection with the terminal is released, and the duration of the inactivity timer is fixed, such as 10 seconds.
  • the timing for controlling the release of the RRC connection is a fixed timing, which may result in high power consumption due to the premature or late release of the RRC connection.
  • a scenario where the power consumption of the terminal is too high due to the premature release of the RRC connection is: the terminal does not transmit data within a set period of time (such as 1 second or 2 seconds) after the screen is off, and requests to release the RRC connection, but in After the RRC connection is released, there are still data packets arriving, and the terminal needs to perform random access to re-establish the RRC connection to receive the data that arrives subsequently.
  • the terminal because the RRC connection is released too early, the terminal needs to initiate random access, and the random access process consumes high power consumption.
  • a scenario in which the power consumption of the terminal is too high due to the late release of the RRC connection is: taking the inactivity timer configured on the network device as an example, if the duration of the inactivity timer is equal to 10 seconds, if the data packets sent by the service where the terminal is located is relatively high. Sparse, a new data packet will be sent 20 seconds after the arrival of a data packet. After receiving a data packet, the network device needs to wait at least 10 seconds to release the RRC connection of the terminal, and the terminal is in the RRC connection during this time. state, resulting in higher power consumption.
  • embodiments of the present application provide an RRC connection release control method and device, which are used to set a timing duration of a terminal to control RRC connection release based on the timing duration.
  • the timing duration is used to control the release of the RRC connection of the terminal.
  • a first timer (hereinafter referred to as an RRC connection release timer) may be configured in the terminal, and the time duration of the RRC connection release timer may be set or adjusted to make the time duration of the RRC connection release timer Dynamically adjustable to control the release of the RRC connection, thereby reducing the power consumption of the terminal.
  • the method and the device are based on the same inventive concept. Since the principles of the method and the device for solving the problem are similar, the implementation of the device and the method can be referred to each other, and the repetition will not be repeated.
  • FIG. 5 it is a schematic diagram of signaling interaction of the RRC connection release control method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the method can be applied to the network architecture shown in FIG. 1 , and of course can also be applied to other network architectures, which is not limited in this application.
  • the terminal determines a timing duration, and the timing duration is used to control the release of the RRC connection.
  • the terminal may set the duration of the RRC connection release timer.
  • the terminal when it is determined based on the timing duration that the RRC connection release condition is satisfied, the terminal requests the network device to release the RRC connection.
  • the terminal determines that there is information interaction in the release of the terminal and the network device within the timing period. If there is no information interaction, the RRC connection release condition is satisfied, and the terminal requests the network device to release the terminal's RRC connection.
  • the terminal if the terminal is configured with an RRC connection release timer, when the RRC connection release timer expires, it indicates that the RRC connection release condition is satisfied, so the terminal requests the network device to release the RRC connection of the terminal.
  • the information exchange includes at least one of the following situations:
  • the terminal receives the downlink data sent by the network device
  • the terminal receives the downlink signaling sent by the network device
  • the terminal sends uplink data to the network device
  • the terminal sends uplink signaling to the network device.
  • the RRC connection release timer is reset.
  • the terminal takes the time when the information interaction occurs as a starting point and re-executes the following steps: judging that within the timing duration, the terminal and the network device interact with each other again. Whether there is information exchange between the network equipment, if there is no information exchange, the terminal requests the network equipment to release the RRC connection of the terminal. If the terminal is configured with an RRC connection release timer, when the above information exchange occurs between the terminal and the network device, the RRC connection release timer is reset, and the RRC connection release timer is reset and restarts to count. When the RRC connection release timer times out , the terminal requests the network device to release the RRC connection of the terminal.
  • the terminal may send an RRC connection release request to the network device to request the network device to release the RRC connection with the terminal.
  • the network device After receiving the request of the terminal to release the RRC connection, the network device can determine whether to release the RRC connection with the terminal according to the needs of data transmission. For example, if the network device has no data to send to the terminal, it can be Request to release the RRC connection, otherwise the network device can maintain the RRC connection with the terminal to send downlink data.
  • the terminal determines the timing duration corresponding to the first application.
  • the terminal may determine the timing duration corresponding to the first application running in the foreground in response to the first operation. Further, if an RRC connection release timer is configured on the terminal, the terminal sets the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer to the determined timing duration.
  • the "first application” is not limited to a specific application or a specific type of application, and this expression is only for clarity of description.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit the way of dividing application types.
  • application types may include: Internet long video applications, Internet short video applications, web news applications, game applications, and the like.
  • the first application may be an Internet long video application, an Internet short video application, a game or a social networking application, and the like.
  • the first operation may be an operation in which the first application is started, for example, the user starts the first application through a screen touch operation (such as clicking on the application icon on the home page of the mobile phone); for another example, the first application may also be started by other applications.
  • the first operation may also be an operation of switching the first application program from the background to the foreground, for example, the user switches the first application program running in the background to the foreground operation through a screen touch operation.
  • the application processor can monitor the above-mentioned first operation, so as to respond to the first operation, so that the first application runs in the foreground. For example, when the application processor monitors the first operation that the first application is started, it can control the first application to run to the foreground, specifically, the state of the first application can be set as the running state (such as the Resume() state) ), and the user interface of the first application is displayed on the screen of the terminal.
  • the application processor monitors the first operation that the first application is started, it can control the first application to run to the foreground, specifically, the state of the first application can be set as the running state (such as the Resume() state) ), and the user interface of the first application is displayed on the screen of the terminal.
  • the terminal is configured with a timing duration for the application type to which the first application belongs, so that the terminal can obtain the timing duration corresponding to the application type after determining the application type to which the first application belongs.
  • the terminal may set the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer of the terminal to the timing duration. By setting the duration of the RRC connection release timer, the duration of the RRC connection release timer can be adapted to the application type to which the application running in the foreground belongs, so that the RRC connection can be adjusted according to the data transmission situation of the first application. It is released for control, thereby saving the power consumption of the terminal.
  • the timing duration is less than or equal to the timing duration of the inactivity timer configured on the network device, so that the adjustment range of the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer can reach the maximum inactivity timer configured by default on the network device.
  • the duration of the activity timer is such that the performance (such as power consumption and/or delay) of the terminal can be at least equal to the performance of the network side.
  • the timing durations corresponding to different application types may be the same or may be different.
  • the application type to which the first application belongs is the first application type (such as an Internet long video application type)
  • the timing duration is the timing duration corresponding to the first application type
  • the application type is a second application type (such as an Internet short video application type) that is different from the first application type
  • the timing duration is the timing duration corresponding to the second application type, wherein the second application type
  • the timing duration corresponding to the type is the same as or different from the timing duration corresponding to the first type. In this way, it can be used to control the timing duration of the RRC connection release or the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer, which is suitable for the application type to which the application running in the foreground belongs.
  • the timing duration corresponding to the first application or the application type to which the first application belongs includes at least two duration values, and the at least two duration values include the first duration value; accordingly, in the first When the application is running in the foreground, the first duration value of the at least two duration values can be determined as the value of the timing duration used for the RRC connection release control. Further, if the terminal is configured with an RRC connection release timer , the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer may be set to the first duration value. Of course, in other scenarios, when the first application is running in the foreground, the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer may also be set to another duration value among the at least two duration values, so that the RRC connection release timing can be improved. Flexibility in device settings.
  • the at least two duration values may be stored as an RRC connection release timer duration set, and certainly may also be stored in other forms or data structures, which are not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the first duration value of the at least two duration values is the maximum value of the at least two duration values, so that when the first application runs to the foreground, it will be used to control the
  • the timing duration of the RRC connection release or the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer is set to the maximum value of at least two duration values corresponding to the first application or the application type to which the first application belongs, which can reduce or avoid RRC The probability that the connection is released prematurely, so that if the data transmission and reception of the first application is intensive, the data transmission and reception of the first application can be guaranteed, so as to obtain a balance between ensuring the data transmission of the first application and reducing the power consumption of the terminal.
  • the first duration value is a maximum value among the at least two durations, and the first duration value is less than or equal to the timing duration of the inactivity timer configured on the network device.
  • the timing duration used for RRC connection release control is adjusted. If an RRC connection release timer is set in the terminal, the time duration of the RRC connection release timer can be adjusted based on the statistical result, so that the time duration of the RRC connection release timer is no longer fixed, but can be dynamically adjusted. In this way, the duration of the RRC connection release timer can be adaptively adjusted according to the data transmission situation, so that it can match the data transmission situation, thereby saving the power consumption of the terminal.
  • the terminal may adjust the above-mentioned timing duration for RRC connection release control or the RRC connection release timer in the RRC disconnected state, and may also adjust the above-mentioned timing for RRC connection release control in the RRC connected state.
  • the duration or the RRC connection release timer can be adjusted, and it can also be in the RRC connection state.
  • the terminal continues to determine whether there is information interaction with the network device within the timing duration after the value adjustment; if there is no information interaction, then Request the network device to release the RRC connection of the terminal. If the terminal is configured with an RRC connection release timer, after adjusting the value of the time duration of the RRC connection release timer, when the RRC connection release timer times out, it indicates that the time duration of the RRC connection release timer is If there is no information exchange in the terminal, the terminal requests the network device to release the RRC connection of the terminal.
  • the terminal may collect statistics on the data transmission statistics of the foreground application.
  • the background application may also transmit a small amount of data. Therefore, in some embodiments of the present application, the terminal may collect statistics on the data transmission of the foreground application and the background application with data transmission. result.
  • the number of foreground applications is one, for example, when the terminal is in full-screen mode, the number of foreground applications is one; in other scenarios, the number of foreground applications may be multiple, for example, in the terminal When in split-screen mode, the screen can be divided into multiple split-screen windows, and different split-screen windows can open and run different applications. In this case, there can be multiple foreground applications, and the terminal statistics data The data transfer statistics for these foreground applications are included in the transfer statistics.
  • the statistical result of data transmission may be used to characterize the density of data transmission.
  • the statistical result of data transmission may be a statistical result of data received by the terminal, or may be a statistical result of data sent by the terminal.
  • the terminal can dynamically adjust the duration of the RRC connection release timer according to the statistical results of the received data, and can also dynamically adjust the duration of the RRC connection release timer according to the statistical results of the sent data.
  • statistics on data transmission may be understood as statistics on data transmission volume.
  • the statistical results may include at least one of the following:
  • the amount of data that is, the amount of data received.
  • the amount of data received For example, the number of bytes or the number of bits of the received data, this application does not limit the measurement unit of the amount of data.
  • Data throughput rate that is, the throughput rate of received data.
  • Data throughput rate refers to the average rate of data transmitted within a certain period of time.
  • the data throughput rate of received data can be measured in bits per second (bps) received. Divide the number by the statistical duration (seconds) to get the data throughput rate at the current moment.
  • Bit rate that is, the bit rate of the received data. Bit rate refers to the number of bits (bits) transmitted per second.
  • Data packet interval such as the average interval time (seconds) between two received data packets.
  • the statistical result may be compared with a threshold to determine whether the condition for adjusting the above-mentioned timing duration or adjusting the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer is satisfied. If it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the value of the above-mentioned timing duration is determined Alternatively, the value of the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer may be adjusted, otherwise, the above timing duration or the value of the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer may remain unchanged.
  • the threshold for determining whether to adjust the timing duration or the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer may include a first threshold and a second threshold, where the first threshold is greater than or equal to the second threshold.
  • the first threshold and the second threshold may be stored as a threshold group, and certainly may also be stored in other forms or data structures, which are not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the value of the above timing duration can be increased; when there is no information exchange between the terminal and the network device within the above timing duration, If the statistical result of data transmission is less than or equal to the second threshold, the value of the timing duration can be reduced.
  • the value of the above-mentioned timing duration is changed from the first The duration value is reduced to the third duration value; or, if the statistical result is greater than the first threshold, the value of the above-mentioned timing duration is increased from the first duration value to the second duration value; or, when the determined value is the first duration
  • the value of the above-mentioned timing period is reduced from the first period value to the third period value.
  • the value of the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer can be increased;
  • the value of the time duration of the RRC connection release timer may be decreased.
  • the value of the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer is increased from the first duration value to the second duration value; when the timing of the RRC connection release timer exceeds the timing When the duration is, the terminal requests the network device to release the RRC connection, and if the statistical result of data transmission is less than the second threshold, the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer is reduced from the first duration value to the third duration value.
  • the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer is increased from the first duration value to the second duration value, which may include the following situations:
  • Case 1 When the RRC connection release timer times out, if the statistical result of the data transmission is greater than the first threshold, the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer is increased from the first duration value to the second duration value;
  • Case 2 When the terminal is in the RRC connected state, if the data transmission statistics result is greater than the first threshold, the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer is increased from the first duration value to the second duration value.
  • the terminal re-enters the RRC connection state after reducing the above-mentioned timing duration (the timing duration used to control the release of the RRC connection) from the first duration value to the third duration value; Within the timing duration valued as the third timing duration value, check whether there is information exchange between the terminal and the network device, and if there is no information exchange, the terminal requests the network device to release the RRC connection of the terminal.
  • the terminal re-executes the following steps with the time when the information interaction occurs as a starting point: judging Whether there is information exchange between the terminal and the network device within the timing duration valued as the third duration value; if there is no information exchange, the terminal requests the network device to release the RRC connection of the terminal.
  • the terminal is configured with an RRC connection release timer, while the first application keeps running in the foreground, after the value of the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer is reduced from the first duration value to the third duration value, the terminal restarts Entering the RRC connection state, the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer remains at the third duration value.
  • the terminal determines the first duration value corresponding to the application type to which the first application belongs, and after the terminal re-establishes the RRC connection, sets the value of the timing duration of the terminal's RRC connection release timer to the first duration value.
  • the method further includes: collecting statistics on the data transmission of the terminal in the RRC connected state, and obtaining a statistical result; if the statistical result is greater than the first threshold, then Increase the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer from the third duration value to the first duration value; when the RRC connection release timer exceeds the timing duration, request the network device to release the RRC connection, if the statistical result is less than the first duration value.
  • the second threshold is to reduce the time duration of the RRC connection release timer from the third duration value to the fourth duration value.
  • the method further includes: in response to the operation that the first application is closed or switched to the background, determining whether there is any The application running in the foreground; if there is no application running to the foreground, keep the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer as the first duration value; if there is an application running to the foreground, set the RRC connection release timing The timing duration of the timer is set to the duration value corresponding to the application running to the foreground.
  • the value of the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer is increased; if the timing of the RRC connection release timer exceeds the timing duration, if the statistics of data transmission If the result is less than the second threshold (the second threshold is less than or equal to the first threshold), the value of the time duration of the RRC connection release timer is decreased.
  • the statistical result of data transmission is greater than the first threshold, it indicates that the density of data transmission and reception is relatively large. In this case, increasing the value of the time duration of the RRC connection release timer can reduce or avoid premature release of the RRC connection.
  • the value of the time duration of the RRC connection release timer can reduce or avoid excessive The probability of releasing the RRC connection late, thereby saving the power consumption of the terminal.
  • the processes of S510 and S520 are relatively independent. Although S510 is shown before S520 in FIG. 5 , in practical applications, these two processes are executed independently, and there is no strict timing sequence.
  • the terminal can obtain the statistical results of data transmission through S510, and adjust the time duration of the RRC connection release timer when judging that the conditions are met according to the statistical results of data transmission; in S520, the terminal determines whether the release is satisfied according to the RRC connection release timer.
  • the conditions of the RRC connection and when it is determined that the conditions are met (ie, when the RRC connection release timer expires), the network device is requested to release the RRC connection.
  • the above-mentioned timing duration for the RRC connection release control or the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer may be the initial duration (for example, after the RRC connection is established, the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer is initialized as The initial duration, and has not been adjusted later), it may be adjusted once, or it may be adjusted multiple times.
  • the above-mentioned timing duration for RRC connection release control or the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer is equal to the first value
  • the above-mentioned timing duration for RRC connection release control or RRC connection release The time duration of the timer is equal to the second value, wherein the first value and the second value are different.
  • the duration of the RRC connection release timer is no longer fixed, but can be dynamically adjusted, so that the RRC connection can be adaptively adjusted according to the data transmission situation.
  • the time duration of the release timer is released so that it can match the data transmission situation, thereby saving the power consumption of the terminal.
  • the application processor in the terminal may set the duration of the RRC connection release timer by sending an instruction to the modem in the terminal. Specifically, the application processor sends an instruction to the modem, where the instruction carries indication information used to indicate the value of the timing duration (for example, the first duration value).
  • the modem may set the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer to a corresponding duration value (eg, a first duration value) according to the indication information.
  • the command may be an AT (attention) command.
  • the AT command may carry indication information for indicating the value of the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer. Further, the AT command can also carry at least one of the following indication information:
  • the indication information that is used to indicate that the terminal enters an idle state or an inactive state after the RRC connection is released such as the indication information can indicate that the terminal enters the idle state after the RRC connection is released, or indicates that the inactive state is entered after the RRC connection is released;
  • Indication information for indicating whether to enable the RRC connection quick release feature, that is, whether to dynamically adjust the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer in the manner provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the AT command may include five information fields, which are a first information field, a second information field, a third information field, a fourth information field, and a fifth information field in sequence.
  • the length of each information field may be 1 bit or multiple bits.
  • the meaning of each information field is:
  • the first information field the value of the information field is a fixed value, and the fixed value is equal to 1;
  • This information field is used to carry indication information for indicating whether to enable the RRC connection quick release feature. For example, when the value of the indication information carried in this information field is equal to 1, it means that the RRC connection quick release feature is enabled (enable OPEN_RRC_QUICKLY_RELEASE_FEATURE), that is, the timing of the RRC connection release timer is dynamically adjusted in the manner provided by the embodiment of this application.
  • the base station performs RRC connection release control according to the RRC connection release timer configured by the base station for the terminal (the timing of the timer is a fixed duration, such as 10 seconds).
  • the RRC connection release timer (the time duration of the timer is a fixed duration, such as 1 second or 2 seconds) performs RRC connection release control;
  • the third information field is a reserved information field
  • the AT command can be expressed as:
  • the above AT commands include the following information from left to right:
  • the first information field the value is 1, which is a fixed value
  • the second information field "enable OPEN_RRC_QUICKLY_RELEASE_FEATURE” the value is 1, which indicates that the time duration of the RRC connection release timer is dynamically adjusted by the method provided by the embodiment of the present application;
  • the third information field the value is 0, and the information field is a reserved information field;
  • the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer is adjusted. Specifically, when the terminal is in the RRC connection state, the data transmission statistics result is obtained, and if it is determined according to the data transmission statistics results that the condition for adjusting the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer is satisfied, the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer is adjusted.
  • the RRC connection release timer corresponds to at least two duration values, and the above-mentioned adjustment of the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer based on the statistical results may include the following situations:
  • Case 1 If the statistical result is greater than the first threshold, obtain at least two duration values corresponding to the RRC connection release timer, determine the duration greater than the first duration value among the at least two duration values as the second duration value, and set The timing duration of the RRC connection release timer is increased from the first duration value to the second duration value.
  • a minimum value of the at least two duration values that is greater than the first duration value may be used as the second duration value.
  • Case 2 When the RRC connection release timer times out, if the statistical result is less than the second threshold, obtain at least two duration values corresponding to the RRC connection release timer, and use the at least two duration values that are smaller than the first duration value.
  • the duration value is determined as the third duration value, and the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer is reduced from the first duration value to the third duration value.
  • a maximum value of the at least two durations smaller than the first duration value is used as the third duration value.
  • Case 3 Combination of the above case 1 and case 2, that is, if the statistical result is greater than the first threshold, increase the time duration of the RRC connection release timer from the first duration value to the second duration value, and when the RRC connection is released When the timer expires, if the statistical result is less than the second threshold, the time duration value of the RRC connection release timer is reduced from the first duration value to the third duration value.
  • the at least two duration values corresponding to the RRC connection release timer may include the following situations:
  • Case 1 A set of durations (including at least two duration values) is set, and the set duration is the timing duration of the general RRC connection release timer;
  • the terminal may acquire a set of durations corresponding to the application type, and set the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer according to a duration value in the set of durations.
  • Case 2 There are multiple sets of durations, and each set of durations corresponds to an application type
  • the terminal can obtain a set of durations corresponding to the application type according to the application type to which the application running in the foreground belongs, so as to set the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer according to a duration value in the set of durations.
  • Case 3 There are multiple sets of durations, and each set of durations corresponds to an application
  • Case 4 There are multiple sets of durations, one of which is the timing duration of the general RRC connection release timer, and each of the other sets of durations corresponds to an application type;
  • the terminal obtains a general set of durations if the terminal does not obtain a set of durations corresponding to the application type according to the application type to which the application running in the foreground belongs.
  • Case 5 There are multiple sets of durations, one of which is the timing duration of the general RRC connection release timer, and each of the other durations corresponds to an application.
  • start or restart of data transmission statistics may be triggered under the following conditions:
  • Case 2 The activated application is switched from the background to the foreground. For example, if the user selects the window of the background application to display on the screen, the application is switched from the background to the foreground, or when the foreground application is closed, the background is running. When the application is switched to the foreground, the data transmission statistics will be restarted;
  • Case 4 After the RRC connection is re-established, and there is currently an application running, data transmission statistics can be performed again.
  • the data transmission statistics counter may be cleared to 0, so that the data transmission statistics can be performed again after the RRC connection is re-established.
  • the counter is used to start accumulating the number of received data packets; after that, when application B is started, application A switches to running in the background , application B is the foreground application, then the counter is cleared to re-accumulate the number of received data packets; after that, during the running process of application B as the foreground application, the count value of the counter (that is, the accumulated data packets When the number of data packets) reaches the first threshold, the duration of the RRC connection release timer is increased, and the counter is cleared to re-accumulate the number of received data packets; after that, the RRC connection release timer times out, and the terminal requests the network The device releases the RRC connection, and the counter is cleared; after that, when the RRC connection is re-established, application B is the foreground application, and the counter starts to count the number of received data packets.
  • the duration of the RRC connection release timer configured on the terminal is equal to 1 second. In this case, before receiving the data packet B, the terminal has requested the network device to release the RRC connection 1 second after receiving the data packet A and closing the screen, causing the terminal to release the RRC connection and enter the non-connected state.
  • the terminal can detect that the current data packets arrive densely, so the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer can be increased. , for example, increase it to 1.2 seconds, so that the terminal will not request to release the RRC connection after 1.1 seconds after receiving the data packet A and turning off the screen, because the RRC connection release timer has not expired, so that the terminal can receive the data packet B, avoiding the need for The random access process saves the power consumption caused by the random access process.
  • the RRC connection release timer expires, if the accumulated number of data packets counted by the above counter is less than the second threshold, it indicates that the current data packets arrive sparsely and the packet interval is large. In this case, the RRC connection release timer is set to The time duration of the RRC connection is reduced, which can avoid unnecessary waiting time in the RRC connection state due to the late release of the RRC connection, thereby saving the power consumption of the terminal.
  • the number of data packets received in a period of time can indicate to a certain extent the degree of sparseness of data packets in the following period of time. For example, if the data packets arrive densely at the current stage, the probability that the data packets arrive densely in the future period of time It will also be higher. If the data packets arrive sparsely at the current stage, the probability that the data packets will arrive sparsely in the future will also be higher. Based on this prediction, using the above embodiments of the present application, the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer can be adjusted in advance to adapt to data transmission in a future period of time and achieve the purpose of saving terminal power consumption.
  • the above effect of adjusting the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer based on statistics on the number of received data packets can also be achieved in other similar situations, for example, based on the amount of data received and the data throughput rate. Or the bit rate is counted to adjust the duration of the RRC connection release timer.
  • a corresponding first threshold and a second threshold may be set for the application type.
  • the two thresholds may form a threshold group.
  • the thresholds or threshold groups corresponding to different application types may be different.
  • the first threshold in the threshold group corresponding to the first application type is different from the first threshold in the threshold group corresponding to the second application type
  • the second threshold in the threshold group corresponding to the first application type is different from the first threshold in the threshold group corresponding to the first application type.
  • the second thresholds in the threshold groups corresponding to the two application types are different.
  • a corresponding threshold group may be set for an application.
  • a threshold group A may be set for application program A
  • a threshold group B may be set for application program B.
  • the thresholds or threshold groups corresponding to different application programs may be different or may be the same.
  • the statistical result of data transmission can be compared with the threshold group corresponding to the application to determine whether the timing duration for adjusting the RRC connection release timer is satisfied. conditions of.
  • the value of the duration of the RRC connection release timer can be increased; when the RRC connection release timer At the time of timeout, if the statistical result of data transmission is less than or equal to the second threshold corresponding to the foreground application, the value of the time duration of the RRC connection release timer can be reduced.
  • a general threshold or threshold group can be set.
  • the result of the data transmission statistics can be compared with the general threshold group to determine whether the condition for adjusting the duration of the RRC connection release timer is satisfied. For example, when the terminal is in the RRC connection state and the statistical result of data transmission reaches (greater than or equal to) the first threshold in the general threshold group, the value of the duration of the RRC connection release timer can be increased; when the RRC connection release timer When the timer expires, if the result of the data transmission statistics is less than or equal to the second threshold in the general threshold group, the value of the time duration of the RRC connection release timer can be reduced.
  • a set of RRC connection release timer durations may be set, and the set includes the timing duration indicators of at least two RRC connection release timers, and the terminal is adjusting the value of the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer.
  • a duration value in the set can be selected as the adjustment target value.
  • the number of durations in different RRC connection release timer duration sets may be the same or different.
  • the duration values in the RRC connection release timer duration set are arranged in an order from small to large (increasing) or from large to small (decreasing).
  • the duration values in the RRC connection release timer duration set may form an arithmetic sequence, or a proportional sequence, or the duration values in the set conform to other laws, and of course, the difference between adjacent duration values may also be random. , that is, the duration values in the set can be randomly ordered, which is not limited in this application.
  • a corresponding RRC connection release timer duration set is set for the application type.
  • the target value can be selected from the RRC connection release timer duration set corresponding to the application type according to the application type to which the foreground application belongs, to be used as the RRC connection release timer.
  • the adjusted value of the timing duration is the same or different.
  • the RRC connection release timer duration set corresponding to the Internet long video application type includes four durations, which are: Value, second value, third value, fourth value, these four values can be arranged in order from large to small or from small to large.
  • the RRC connection release timer duration set corresponding to the Internet short video application type includes three durations, namely: the fifth value, the sixth value, and the seventh value. in order.
  • the RRC connection release timer duration set corresponding to the webpage news application type includes two durations, namely the eighth value and the ninth value, and these two values can be arranged in ascending order or descending order.
  • the durations in an RRC connection release timer duration set are all different, for example, the first value to the fourth value are different, and the fifth value to the seventh value are different; in an RRC connection release timer duration set
  • the duration may be different from the duration value in another RRC connection release timer duration set, or may be partially the same.
  • An example of the same part is: the first RRC connection release timer duration set in the RRC connection release timer duration set corresponding to the Internet long video application type.
  • the value (the first value is the maximum value in the set) is the same as the fifth value (the fifth value is the maximum value in the set) in the RRC connection release timer duration set corresponding to the Internet short video application type, for example, both are 10 seconds.
  • a corresponding RRC connection release timer duration set is set for the application.
  • a target value can be selected from the set of RRC connection release timer durations corresponding to the foreground application as the adjusted value of the duration of the RRC connection release timer.
  • the number of candidate RRC connection release timer duration values included in the RRC connection release timer duration sets corresponding to different applications may be the same or different.
  • a general RRC connection release timer duration set may be set.
  • a target value may be selected from a general set of RRC connection release timer durations as the adjusted value of the time duration of the RRC connection release timer.
  • the timing duration of the maximum RRC connection release timer in the RRC connection release timer duration set is less than or equal to the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer configured by default on the network device, such as the maximum RRC connection release timer.
  • the timing duration is equal to 10 seconds.
  • the duration of the minimum RRC connection release timer in the RRC connection release timer duration set is greater than or equal to the duration of the RRC connection release timer configured by default on the terminal, such as the minimum RRC connection release timer duration not less than 1 second.
  • the adjustment range of the duration of the RRC connection release timer can be at least not less than the duration of the RRC connection release timer configured by default on the device in the screen-off scenario, ensuring that connection release and re-establishment are not performed frequently.
  • the number of timing durations of the RRC connection release timers in the RRC connection release timer duration set is less than or equal to the preset maximum number of timing durations of the RRC connection release timers.
  • the value interval of the maximum RRC connection release timer count duration may be defined as [2, 10], for example, the maximum RRC connection release timer count duration may be set to be equal to 5.
  • the terminal stores the RRC connection release timer duration set corresponding to each application type and is used to determine whether the Threshold group for adjusting the duration of the RRC connection release timer.
  • the duration of the RRC connection release timer needs to be adjusted according to the statistical results of data transmission and the threshold group corresponding to the application type to which the foreground application belongs. select from the set of RRC connection release timer durations corresponding to the application type to which the foreground application belongs. Adjust the target value.
  • the terminal stores the RRC connection release timer duration sets corresponding to each application type respectively, but only configures a common RRC connection release timer duration set. Threshold group.
  • the adjustment target value is selected from the set of RRC connection release timer durations corresponding to the application type to which the foreground application belongs.
  • a general set of RRC connection release durations and a general set of thresholds for determining whether the adjustment of the RRC connection release timer is satisfied may be configured on the terminal. If the corresponding RRC connection release timer duration set and the threshold group used to determine whether to adjust the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer are not set for the application type to which the foreground application belongs, the transmission data statistics results can be compared with the RRC connection release timer duration set. The general threshold group is compared, and when it is determined that the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer needs to be adjusted according to the comparison result, the adjusted target value is selected from the set of the general RRC connection release timer duration.
  • only one general RRC connection release timer duration set and a general set of RRC connection release timer duration and a general set for determining whether the RRC connection release timer is satisfied can be set on the terminal Threshold group for adjusting the timer duration.
  • the general RRC connection release timer duration set and the general threshold group are used to perform the RRC connection release timer timing Adjustment.
  • a corresponding RRC connection release timer duration set and a threshold group for determining whether to adjust the RRC connection release timer duration may be set for the screen-off scenario and the bright-screen scenario respectively, so as to According to the current scenario, a corresponding RRC connection release timer duration set and a corresponding threshold group are used to adjust the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer.
  • the terminal if the terminal is in a split-screen mode and multiple foreground applications are run in multiple split-screen windows in the split-screen mode, according to the priority of the application type to which the multiple foreground applications belong, Determine whether the timing of the RRC connection release timer needs to be adjusted based on the threshold group corresponding to the application type with the highest priority and the statistical results of data transmission.
  • the RRC connection release timer duration set corresponding to the application type to which the high application program belongs determines the target value of the RRC connection release timer duration.
  • the statistical result of data transmission may be obtained by counting the number of data packets received by the terminal, including the data packets received by the multiple foreground applications.
  • the statistics The data packets also include the data packets received by the background application with data transmission, that is, the application is not distinguished when the received data packets are counted; the data transmission statistics can also be obtained by counting the data packets received by the high-priority application. Yes, that is, only the data packets received by the high-priority applications are counted when the received data packets are counted. Priority application packets.
  • the priority of different application types can be set according to factors such as whether the service data is sensitive to delay. For example, the priority of the application type to which the delay-sensitive application belongs may be set to be higher, and the priority of the application type to which the delay-insensitive application belongs may be set to be lower. For example: in social applications (such as ), game applications, Internet short video applications (such as ), because the business data of Internet short video applications and game applications have higher requirements on time delay and higher power consumption, they can be set to a higher priority.
  • the RRC corresponding to the application type to which the multiple foreground applications belong may be selected.
  • the set with the largest duration in the set of connection release timer durations determine whether the timing of the RRC connection release timer needs to be adjusted, and when it is determined that the timing of the RRC connection release timer needs to be adjusted.
  • the target value of the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer is determined according to the set with the largest duration.
  • the statistical result of data transmission may be obtained by counting the number of data packets received by the terminal, including the data packets received by the multiple foreground applications. Further, if the background application has data transmission, the statistics The data packets also include the data packets received by the background application program of data transmission, that is, the application program is not distinguished when the received data packets are counted; the data transmission statistics results can also be received by the application program corresponding to the above-mentioned set with the longest duration. The data packets are obtained by statistics, that is, only the data packets received by the application corresponding to the set with the longest duration are counted when the received data packets are counted.
  • the set with the largest duration refers to the set of RRC connection release timer durations with the largest maximum value among the RRC connection release timer duration sets corresponding to the application types to which the multiple foreground applications belong.
  • the set of RRC connection release timer durations corresponding to the application type to which the foreground application belongs can be determined, and the duration of the RRC connection release timer is set to be the same as that of the RRC connection release timer.
  • the maximum values in the set are equal.
  • the set of RRC connection release timer durations corresponding to the application type to which the foreground application belongs can be determined, and the duration of the RRC connection release timer is set to the maximum value in the set. value is equal.
  • the duration of the RRC connection release timer can be kept unchanged, or the duration of the RRC connection release timer can be set to be the same as that of the general RRC.
  • the maximum values in the set of connection release timer durations are equal.
  • the RRC connection release of the terminal is controlled by the network device, that is, the network device is based on the network device.
  • the inactivity timer configured on the above (for example, the timer duration is fixed 10 seconds) controls the RRC connection of the terminal (for example, when the inactivity timer expires, the RRC connection of the terminal is released); if the terminal enters If the screen is off, the terminal controls the release of the RRC connection according to the fixed duration (such as 1 second or 2 seconds) configured by default (for example, when the terminal does not interact with the network device within the fixed duration after the screen is off, the network device is requested to release the RRC connection).
  • the AP can send an instruction to the MODEM to instruct the MODEM to restore the default configuration.
  • the network device controls the RRC connection release duration of the terminal, and the terminal no longer controls the RRC connection release based on the timing duration of the first timer; if the terminal is in the off-screen state, the timing duration of the first timer is set to Fixed duration configured by default.
  • the AP application processor of the terminal is set with a set of RRC connection release timer durations and a threshold or threshold group used to determine whether to adjust the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer.
  • the AP may Determine whether to adjust the timing of the RRC connection release timer according to the data transmission statistics and the threshold group, and when it is determined that the timing of the RRC connection release A target value is selected from the release timer duration set, and an instruction is sent to the modem (modem) to instruct the modem to adjust the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer to the target value.
  • the command may carry the target value, and may also carry the adjustment amount of the RRC connection release timer duration.
  • an application program when an application program is started in a terminal in a disconnected state, an RRC connection is established, and at this time, the application processor (AP) obtains the maximum duration in the corresponding RRC connection release timer duration set. , and send an instruction to the modem to instruct the modem to set the duration of the RRC connection release timer to the maximum duration.
  • the application processor obtains the corresponding RRC connection release timer
  • the maximum duration in the duration set may include: the application processor obtains the RRC connection release timer duration set corresponding to the application type to which the application belongs, and if the acquisition is successful (that is, a corresponding RRC connection release timer is set for the application type) duration set), then obtain the maximum duration in the set, thereby instructing the modem to set the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer to the maximum duration; if the acquisition fails (that is, the corresponding RRC connection release timer is not set for the application type) duration set), then obtain a general RRC connection release timer duration set, and obtain the maximum duration in the set, thereby instructing the modem to set the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer to the maximum duration.
  • the application processor obtains the largest RRC connection release timer duration set in the corresponding RRC connection release timer duration set.
  • the duration may include: the application processor acquires the RRC connection release timer duration set corresponding to the application, and if the acquisition is successful (that is, a corresponding RRC connection release timer duration set is set for the application), then acquires the RRC connection release timer duration set in the set.
  • the maximum duration thereby instructing the modem to set the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer to the maximum duration; if the acquisition fails (that is, the corresponding RRC connection release timer duration set is not set for the application), then the general RRC connection is acquired Release the timer duration set, and obtain the maximum duration in the set, thereby instructing the modem to set the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer to the maximum duration.
  • the application processor obtains the maximum duration in the corresponding RRC connection release timer duration set, It may include: the application processor obtains the maximum duration in the general RRC connection release timer duration set, thereby instructing the modem to set the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer to the maximum duration.
  • the modem can keep the duration of the RRC connection release timer unchanged.
  • a set of RRC connection release timer durations and a threshold group for determining whether to adjust the duration of the RRC connection release timer are set on a modem (modem) in the terminal.
  • the transmission statistics result and the threshold group determine whether to adjust the timing of the RRC connection release timer, and when it is determined that the timing of the RRC connection release timer needs to be adjusted, according to the current timing of the RRC connection release timer from the RRC connection release timer.
  • a target value is selected from the duration set, so that the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer is adjusted to the target value.
  • the above-mentioned method for determining whether to adjust the duration of the RRC connection release timer by the modem, and the method for setting and adjusting the duration of the RRC connection release timer are the same as the corresponding methods executed by the application processor.
  • the same threshold may be set for each RRC connection release timer duration in the RRC connection release timer duration set, or a corresponding threshold may be set for each RRC connection release timer duration. threshold. If a corresponding threshold is set for each RRC connection release timer, when judging whether the timing of the RRC connection release timer needs to be adjusted according to the threshold, the threshold corresponding to the current RRC connection release timer length can be used to judge whether it needs to be adjusted. .
  • Fig. 6a exemplarily shows the process of dynamically adjusting the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer based on the general RRC connection release timer duration set and the threshold group in S510 of Fig. 5 .
  • the process is described by using a counter to count and count the number of received data packets as an example.
  • the process may include:
  • S5101 Obtain a count value of a counter, where the count value is the number of received data packets.
  • the counter can start to count in the following situations: when no foreground application is running, when an application is opened, or when switching between the front and the background of the application occurs, or when the terminal enters the connection state.
  • the number of data packets counted by the counter includes the data packets received by the foreground application program, and may further include the data packets received by the background application program with data transmission.
  • S5102 Compare the count value of the counter with the first threshold in the general threshold group, and if the count value is greater than the first threshold, go to S5103, otherwise go to S5105.
  • S5103 Increase the duration of the RRC connection release timer.
  • a duration value larger than the current RRC connection release timer duration value is selected from the general RRC connection release timer duration set as the target value, and the RRC connection release timer duration is set to be equal to the target value .
  • the current timing duration of the RRC connection release timer is equal to the first duration value
  • the general RRC connection release timer duration set includes at least the first duration value and the second duration value
  • the second duration value is the duration of the general RRC connection release timer.
  • the method for increasing the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer may be: selecting the second duration value from the general RRC connection release timer duration set, The timing duration of the RRC connection release timer is set to be equal to the second duration value; of course, the second duration value may also be other values in the general RRC connection release timer duration set, which may be greater than the first duration value.
  • the general set includes a first duration value and a second duration value adjacent to the first duration value (the second duration value is greater than first duration value), a second duration value adjacent to the first duration value can be selected from the general RRC connection release timer duration set, and the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer is set equal to the second duration value.
  • S5105 Determine that the current RRC connection release timer has expired, and if it times out, go to S5106, otherwise go to S5101.
  • S5106 Request the network device to release the RRC connection.
  • S5107 Compare the count value of the counter with the second threshold in the general threshold group, if the count value is less than the second threshold, go to S5108, otherwise go to S5109.
  • S5108 Decrease the duration of the RRC connection release timer, and proceed to S5110.
  • a duration value smaller than the timing duration of the current RRC connection release timer is selected from the general RRC connection release timer duration set as the target value, and the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer is set equal to the target value.
  • the general RRC connection release timer duration set includes at least a third duration value and a first duration value
  • the third duration value is the duration of the RRC connection release timer
  • the method for reducing the duration of the RRC connection release timer may be: selecting a third duration value from the general RRC connection release timer duration set, and using The timing duration of the RRC connection release timer is set equal to the third duration value
  • the third duration value is the largest one of all duration values smaller than the first duration value in the general RRC connection release timer duration set.
  • the third duration value may also be other values in the general RRC connection release timer duration set, which may be smaller than the first duration value.
  • the general set includes a first duration value and a third duration value adjacent to the first duration value (the third duration value is smaller than the first duration value).
  • a duration value) a third duration value adjacent to the first duration value can be selected from the general RRC connection release timer duration set, and the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer is set equal to the third duration value.
  • the current RRC connection release timer has equaled the maximum duration value in the general RRC connection release timer set, if it is determined that the RRC connection release timer needs to be increased, you can Keep the duration of the current RRC connection release timer unchanged, and clear the counter; if the current duration of the RRC connection release timer is equal to the minimum duration value in the general RRC connection release timer duration set, if it is determined If the duration of the RRC connection release timer needs to be reduced, the current duration of the RRC connection release timer can be kept unchanged.
  • a general RRC connection release timer duration set ⁇ timer1, timer2, timer3, timer4, timer5 ⁇ is set on the terminal (the duration values in this set are sorted in a descending manner), and a general RRC connection release timer duration set is set on the terminal.
  • Packet quantity threshold group ⁇ ThHigh (ie the first packet quantity threshold), ThLow (ie the second packet quantity threshold) ⁇ .
  • the duration of the current RRC connection release timer of the terminal is equal to timer3.
  • the terminal compares the count value N1 of the counter with ThHigh, and the comparison result is N1>ThHigh, so the terminal obtains the value adjacent to timer3 and greater than timer3 from the general RRC connection release timer duration set.
  • the duration is timer2, and the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer is adjusted from timer3 to timer2, and the counter is cleared to restart counting the number of received packets; at the subsequent time t2, the RRC connection release timer times out, Then the terminal compares the count value N2 of the current counter with the second threshold ThLow in the general threshold group, and the comparison result is N2 ⁇ ThLow, so the time length adjacent to timer2 and less than timer2 is obtained from the general RRC connection release timer time length set timer3, adjust the duration of the RRC connection release timer from timer2 to timer3, and clear the counter to zero.
  • the RRC connection release timer duration set By setting the RRC connection release timer duration set, various possible values of the RRC connection release timer are defined.
  • the target duration of the RRC connection release timer is selected from the set.
  • the adjustment amount of the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer can not be too large, thereby ensuring the stability of the system and achieving the effect of gradual adjustment, on the other hand, the technical implementation is simple and easy.
  • Fig. 6b exemplarily shows the flow of setting the RRC connection release timer duration set and the threshold group based on different application types in S510 of Fig. 5, so as to dynamically adjust the RRC connection release timer.
  • the process is described by using a counter to count and count the number of received data packets as an example.
  • the process may include:
  • S5111 Obtain a count value of the counter, where the count value is the number of received data packets.
  • the counter can start to count in the following situations: when no foreground application is running, when an application is opened, or when switching between the front and the background of the application occurs, or when the terminal enters the connection state.
  • the number of data packets counted by the counter includes the data packets received by the foreground application program, and may further include the data packets received by the background application program with data transmission.
  • S5112 Compare the count value of the counter with the first threshold in the threshold group corresponding to the application type according to the application type to which the foreground application belongs. If the count value is greater than the first threshold, go to S5113, otherwise go to S5115.
  • the terminal is provided with an RRC connection release lookup table, and the RRC connection release lookup table is used to store the correspondence between the application type, the RRC connection release timer duration set and the threshold group, such as storing the Internet
  • the short video application type information corresponds to the RRC connection release timer duration set and threshold group corresponding to the application type, and also stores the RRC connection release timer duration set and threshold group corresponding to the game application type information and the application type.
  • the application type to which the application belongs can be determined according to the application name of the current foreground application (for example, the application type can be queried according to the application name)
  • the application type can be queried according to the application name
  • Set the correspondence table between the application name and the application type query the above lookup table according to the type to which the application belongs, if the application type to which the foreground application belongs is found in the lookup table, then obtain the application type The corresponding threshold group and the RRC connection release timer duration set.
  • the name of the application program can be obtained in the following way: after the application program is opened, its own information can be registered with the application program framework layer, and the registered information can include the name of the application program, After detecting the event that the application program is opened, the application framework layer can determine the name of the currently running application program according to the application program name returned by the function through the function for obtaining the foreground application program name.
  • the application framework layer can detect this event. At this time, the application framework layer can determine the current foreground according to the application name returned by the function by calling the function used to obtain the foreground application name. The name of the running application.
  • the terminal can determine the application type to which the foreground application belongs, and query the RRC connection release lookup table according to the application type, and obtain the threshold group corresponding to the application type to which the foreground application belongs, so as to obtain the threshold group corresponding to the application type to which the foreground application belongs.
  • the first threshold is compared to determine whether to adjust the duration of the RRC connection release timer.
  • a duration value that is longer than the timing of the current RRC connection release timer is selected as the target value, and the RRC connection release timer is used as the target value.
  • the timing duration is set equal to this target value.
  • the RRC connection release timer duration set corresponding to the application type to which the foreground application belongs includes at least the second duration value and the first duration value, the second duration value.
  • the value is the smallest one of all the duration values greater than the first duration value in the RRC connection release timer duration set.
  • the method for increasing the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer may be: from the RRC connection release timer A second duration value is selected from the duration set, and the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer is set equal to the second duration value.
  • the set includes a first duration value and a second duration value adjacent to the first duration value (the second duration value is greater than the first duration value).
  • a duration value a second duration value adjacent to the first duration value can be selected from the RRC connection release timer duration set, and the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer is set equal to the second duration value.
  • the application processor (AP) may send an instruction to the modem (modem) to instruct the modem (modem) to set the time period of the RRC connection release timer to be equal to the target value.
  • the modem can determine whether the timing of the RRC connection release timer needs to be adjusted according to the above method, and when the adjustment is required, determine the target value of the RRC connection release timer timing, and release the RRC connection The timer's duration is set equal to the target value.
  • S5115 Determine that the current RRC connection release timer has expired, and if it times out, go to S5116, otherwise go to S5111.
  • S5117 Compare the count value of the counter with the second threshold in the general threshold group, and if the count value is less than the second threshold, go to S5118, otherwise go to S5119.
  • a duration value smaller than the timing duration of the current RRC connection release timer is selected as the target value from the RRC connection release timer duration set corresponding to the application type to which the foreground application belongs, and the value of the RRC connection release timer is used as the target value.
  • the timing duration is set equal to this target value.
  • the current timing duration of the RRC connection release timer is equal to the first duration value
  • the RRC connection release timer duration set corresponding to the application type to which the foreground application belongs includes at least a third duration value
  • the third duration value is smaller than the first duration.
  • the method for reducing the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer may be: selecting a third duration value from the RRC connection release timer duration set, and setting the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer to be equal to the third duration value.
  • a duration value, the third duration value is the largest one among all duration values smaller than the first duration value in the general RRC connection release timer duration set.
  • the set includes a first duration value and a third duration value adjacent to the first duration (the third duration value is smaller than the first duration value).
  • duration value a third duration value adjacent to the first duration value can be selected from the RRC connection release timer duration set, and the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer is set equal to the third duration value.
  • the application processor (AP) may send an instruction to the modem (modem) to instruct the modem (modem) to set the time period of the RRC connection release timer Set equal to this target value.
  • the modem can determine whether the timing of the RRC connection release timer needs to be adjusted according to the above method, and when the adjustment is required, determine the target value of the RRC connection release timer timing, and release the RRC connection The timer's duration is set equal to the target value.
  • the timing duration of the current RRC connection release timer is equal to the maximum duration value in the RRC connection release timer duration set corresponding to the application type to which the foreground application belongs, if it is determined that the RRC connection needs to be increased. If the duration of the release timer is set, the duration of the current RRC connection release timer can be kept unchanged, and the counter can be cleared; when the current duration of the RRC connection release timer is equal to the RRC corresponding to the application type to which the foreground program belongs In the case of the minimum duration value in the connection release timer duration set, if it is determined that the duration of the RRC connection release timer needs to be reduced, the current duration of the RRC connection release timer can be kept unchanged.
  • the terminal switches between the foreground and background applications, for example, based on the user's operation, the application A currently running in the foreground is switched to the application B, so that the application B becomes the foreground application and the application A becomes the application A.
  • the above counters can be cleared, so that the terminal can restart statistics on data transmission, and based on the data transmission statistics results, use the threshold group corresponding to the application type to which application B belongs to determine whether it is necessary to adjust the RRC connection release timer. and further select the target value from the set of RRC connection release timer durations corresponding to the application type to which application B belongs according to the current timing duration of the RRC connection release timer.
  • the specific implementation process can be seen in Figure 6b.
  • the threshold group corresponding to the application type to which the application belongs and the set of RRC connection release timer durations are not found when the above lookup table is queried. (that is, the corresponding threshold group and RRC connection release timer duration set are not set for the application type), then the general threshold group can be used to determine whether the duration of the RRC connection release timer needs to be adjusted, and based on the general RRC connection release timer duration The set determines the target value of the adjusted RRC connection release timer duration. For a specific implementation manner, reference may be made to the flow shown in FIG. 6a.
  • the adjusted RRC connection release timer may be determined based on the set of RRC connection release timer durations corresponding to the foreground application.
  • the target value of the duration is similar to the process shown in Figure 6b.
  • the general threshold group can be used to determine whether the duration of the RRC connection release timer needs to be adjusted, and based on the general RRC connection release timer
  • the duration set determines the target value of the adjusted RRC connection release timer duration. For a specific implementation manner, reference may be made to the flow shown in FIG. 6a.
  • a set of RRC connection release timer durations is set, and various possible values of the RRC connection release timer are defined.
  • an RRC connection is selected from the set.
  • the target value of the timing duration of the release timer can prevent the timing duration adjustment of the RRC connection release timer from being too large, thereby ensuring the stability of the system, and achieving the effect of gradual adjustment, and the technical implementation is simple and easy;
  • the RRC connection release is performed by using the threshold group corresponding to the application type to which the foreground application belongs.
  • the timer timing duration adjustment judgment and further use the RRC connection release timer duration set corresponding to the application type to which the foreground application belongs to adjust the RRC connection release timer timing duration, so that the data transmission characteristics or data of different application types can be adjusted.
  • the RRC connection release timer is adjusted in a targeted manner to meet the data transmission requirements of applications of corresponding application types and reduce the power consumption of the terminal.
  • the continuous value is divided into discrete values to form the RRC connection release timer duration set.
  • the RRC connection release timer duration set can be obtained by performing an exponential segmentation method on T max , and by using the exponential segmentation method, an equal ratio with the segmentation resolution (also called the base of the exponential segmentation method) as a common ratio can be obtained. than sequence.
  • the segmentation resolution (ie, the base) in the exponential segmentation method characterizes the granularity at which the RRC connection release duration is divided.
  • the exponential segmentation method can be used to perform index segmentation based on T max to obtain multiple RRC connection release timer durations to form a set of RRC connection release timer durations.
  • T max is preset, and can be set to be equal to the duration of the RRC connection release timer configured by default on the network device, for example, equal to 10 seconds.
  • the RRC connection release timer duration set obtained according to the above-mentioned exponential division formula can be expressed as: ⁇ 10,5,2.5,1.25 ⁇ .
  • each element corresponds to a Markov model state, that is, the RRC connection release timer duration set corresponds to multiple Markov states. Based on the idea of state transition of the Markov model, the RRC connection release timer duration set can be used to adjust the duration of the RRC connection release timer.
  • the state of the Markov model refers to the current state, past state and future state of the random variable sequence X1, X2,..., X3 of the Markov property. Given the current state, the future state and the past state are independent of each other.
  • the probability distribution of the system state at time t+1 is only related to the state at time t and has nothing to do with the state before time t; the state transition from time t to time t+1 has nothing to do with the value of t.
  • FIG. 7 exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of a Markov model state transition of RRC release time in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the Markov chain with the duration of the RRC connection release timer includes K states as shown in the figure, and each state corresponds to the duration of the RRC connection release timer, where T 1 >...>T i- 1 >T i >T i+1 ...>T K .
  • the probability of switching from Ti to Ti +1 is Pi, i +1
  • the probability of switching from Ti to Ti -1 is Pi, i -1
  • the probability of switching from Ti +1 to Ti is P i+1,i
  • the probability of transitioning from Ti to T i -1 is P i,i-1
  • the probability that T i-1 remains unchanged is P i-1,i-1
  • T i remains unchanged
  • the probability of is P i,i
  • the probability that T i+1 remains unchanged is P i+1,i+1 .
  • the terminal is currently configured with the Markov chain with the duration of the RRC connection release timer as shown in Figure 7, namely RRC A set of connection release timer durations, and a first threshold ThHigh and a second threshold ThLow.
  • the current terminal is in the RRC connection state and is in the state T i in the above-mentioned Markov chain (that is, the duration of the RRC connection timer is T i ), then when it is detected that the number of data packets arriving (that is, the number of received data packets)
  • the first threshold ThHigh is reached, jump from the state Ti to the state Ti +1 , that is , adjust the timing duration of the current RRC connection timer from Ti to T i +1 , so that the duration of the RRC connection release timer increases large and clears the number of packets to zero.
  • the terminal is currently in the RRC connection state and is in the state T i in the above Markov chain (that is, the duration of the RRC connection timer is T i ).
  • the RRC connection release timer times out, it is detected that the arrival number of data packets is less than the second threshold ThLow, then the transition from T i to T i-1 is performed, that is, the timing of the current RRC connection timer is adjusted from T i to T i -1 , which reduces the duration of the RRC connection release timer and clears the number of data packets.
  • the threshold or threshold group used to determine whether to adjust the duration of the RRC connection release timer, and the set of RRC connection release timer durations used to adjust the duration of the RRC connection release timer can be learned by the terminal itself through online learning.
  • the method can also be obtained by the terminal itself through an offline learning method, and can also be configured by the network side.
  • the above-mentioned parameters configured on the network side that is, the threshold or threshold group used to cut off whether to adjust the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer, and the RRC connection release timer duration set used to adjust the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer
  • the network side is obtained by offline learning method.
  • a combination of the above-mentioned various methods can also be used.
  • the network side can send the above parameters to the terminal, and can also send the information used to generate the above parameters to the terminal, for example, the segmentation resolution of the index segmentation method can be sent. (that is, the base) is sent to the terminal, and the terminal may generate a set of RRC connection release timer durations based on the exponential segmentation method according to the segmentation resolution (that is, the base).
  • the following describes in detail the threshold or threshold group obtained by the online learning method and the offline learning method and used for judging whether to adjust the duration of the RRC connection release timer, and the RRC connection used for adjusting the duration of the RRC connection release timer provided by the embodiments of the present application.
  • the method can be executed by the terminal.
  • the generation of the RRC connection release timer duration set by the exponential segmentation method is used as an example for description, and this idea can be applied to the online learning method using other methods to generate the RRC connection release timer duration set.
  • FIG. 8 exemplarily shows the flow of the online learning method
  • FIG. 9 exemplarily shows the principle of the online learning method.
  • the online learning method will be described below with reference to FIG. 8 and FIG. 9 .
  • the online learning method may include the following steps:
  • S801 Acquire data transmitted by the terminal within the statistical time period as sample data, and perform statistics on the sample data to obtain the data packet interval distribution characteristics.
  • the statistical duration is a preset value, and the value range of the statistical duration may be several minutes to several tens of minutes, such as 5 to 20 minutes, which is not limited in this application.
  • the data transmitted within the statistical duration may include data received within the statistical duration, or data sent within the statistical duration.
  • the data packets received by the terminal may include the data packets received by the foreground application, and may also include data transmission. packets received by the background application.
  • the data packet interval distribution characteristics can be obtained by statistics of the received or sent data packets, which can be expressed as a packet interval probability density distribution curve and a packet number probability density distribution curve. For example, the time interval between adjacent data packets can be counted, or the number of received data packets can be counted according to the set period to obtain the packet interval, for example, the statistical data of 5 consecutive cycles (that is, the data The number of packets) are respectively: ⁇ 1000, 0, 0, 3000, 2000 ⁇ , then the packet interval is 3 and 1, respectively, so that the probability density distribution curve of the packet interval is obtained according to the packet interval.
  • the cumulative distribution function can be used to calculate the probability density distribution of the packet interval, and the probability density distribution of the packet interval represents the occurrence probability of each interval size obtained by statistics.
  • the packet interval probability density distribution can be presented in the form of a packet interval CDF curve (or called a packet interval probability density distribution curve).
  • Figure 10a shows a packet interval CDF curve, the abscissa in Figure 10a represents the packet interval, and the unit may be seconds or other time units, and the ordinate represents the probability.
  • the curve (or broken line) shown by the dotted line is obtained by connecting discrete points. After fitting the curve (or broken line) shown by the broken line, the solid line shown in Figure 10a can be obtained. Line represents the packet interval CDF curve.
  • the probability density distribution of the number of packets can be calculated by using the CDF function, and the probability density distribution of the number of packets represents the probability distribution of the cumulative value of the cumulative number of packets obtained by statistics.
  • the probability density distribution of the number of packets can be presented in the form of a CDF curve of the number of packets (or called the probability density distribution curve of the number of packets).
  • Figure 10b shows a CDF curve of the number of packets.
  • the abscissa in Figure 10b represents the number of packets in a period, and the ordinate represents the probability that the number of data packets in a period is less than the number of packets on the abscissa.
  • the curve (or broken line) shown by the dotted line is obtained by connecting discrete points. After fitting the curve (or broken line) shown by the broken line, the solid line shown in Figure 10b can be obtained.
  • the CDF curve of the number of packets represented by the line For example, as shown in the figure, the probability of occurrence of less than 1000 packets is greater than 0.95.
  • S802 Determine at least one candidate RRC connection release timer duration set.
  • the number of candidate RRC connection release timer duration sets (hereinafter referred to as candidate sets, represented by rrcTimerSet) is at least one.
  • Each candidate set rrcTimerSet includes at least two elements, and each element is a candidate value of the duration of the RRC connection release timer.
  • the elements in each candidate set rrcTimerSet can be arranged in descending order (that is, in descending order of RRC connection release duration), or in ascending order (that is, in ascending order of RRC connection release duration) ).
  • the maximum value of the RRC connection release timer duration does not exceed the preset maximum RRC connection release timer duration.
  • the minimum value of the RRC connection release timer duration is not less than the preset minimum RRC connection release timer duration.
  • the total number of elements does not exceed the preset maximum RRC connection release timer duration.
  • the following parameters can be preset:
  • Exponential division base BASE arange(1.1,5.2,0.05), where arange(1.1,5.2,0.05) represents an arithmetic sequence with 1.1 as the lower limit and 5.2 as the upper limit, and the tolerance is equal to 0.05.
  • arange(1.1,5.2,0.05) represents an arithmetic sequence with 1.1 as the lower limit and 5.2 as the upper limit, and the tolerance is equal to 0.05.
  • RRC_REL_MAX The maximum RRC connection release timer duration RRC_REL_MAX.
  • RRC_REL_MIN Minimum RRC connection release timer duration
  • the possible values of the RRC connection release timer duration include ⁇ 10, 5, 2.5, 1.25 ⁇ .
  • S803 Determine at least one candidate threshold group according to the packet interval distribution characteristics.
  • a candidate threshold group includes one threshold or two thresholds. If two thresholds are included, the two thresholds are called a first threshold and a second threshold, and the first threshold is greater than or equal to the second threshold.
  • One candidate set rrcTimerSet may correspond to one candidate threshold group, or may correspond to multiple candidate threshold groups. If a candidate set rrcTimerSet corresponds to multiple candidate threshold groups, the thresholds contained in different candidate threshold groups are different. For example, if a candidate set rrcTimerSet corresponds to the first candidate threshold group and the second candidate threshold group, there are the following possible situations:
  • Case 1 The first threshold in the first candidate threshold group and the first threshold in the second candidate threshold group have different values, and the second threshold in the first candidate threshold group and the second threshold in the second candidate threshold group take the same value;
  • Case 2 The second threshold in the first candidate threshold group and the second threshold in the second candidate threshold group have different values, the first threshold in the first candidate threshold group and the first packet threshold in the second candidate threshold group The value is the same;
  • Case 3 The first threshold in the first candidate threshold group and the first threshold in the second candidate threshold group have different values, and the second threshold in the first candidate threshold group and the second threshold in the second candidate threshold group The value is different.
  • a candidate threshold group corresponding to each candidate set rrcTimerSet may be determined by using the packet interval CDF curve and the packet number CDF curve. Specifically, the following operations can be performed for each candidate set rrcTimerSet: with the duration of each RRC connection release timer in the candidate set rrcTimerSet as the time interval, obtain the corresponding RRC connection release duration in the candidate set rrcTimerSet according to the packet interval CDF curve The distribution probability of , obtains the number of packets corresponding to the corresponding distribution probability on the CDF curve of the number of packets, and obtains at least one candidate threshold group corresponding to the candidate set rrcTimerSet according to the number of packets.
  • the candidate threshold group corresponding to the candidate set rrcTimerSet19 can be obtained through permutation and combination:
  • the first threshold thHigh and the second threshold thLow in the candidate threshold group may also be equal.
  • each candidate combination includes a candidate set rrcTimerSet and a candidate threshold group.
  • S805 Based on the sample data obtained in S801, use each candidate combination to determine the RRC connection release situation respectively, and determine the evaluation parameter corresponding to each candidate combination according to the RRC connection release situation corresponding to each candidate combination.
  • each candidate combination may be applied to the RRC connection release control method provided by the embodiment of the present application, and the corresponding RRC connection release time is obtained for each candidate combination, and for each candidate combination
  • the evaluation parameter corresponding to the candidate combination is determined according to the corresponding RRC connection release time, and the evaluation parameter is used to select the optimal candidate combination.
  • this step is equivalent to using the candidate combination based on the sample data obtained in S801 to simulate and execute the RRC connection release process provided by the embodiment of the present application, thereby obtaining the RRC connection release within the statistical time period of the sample data.
  • the RRC connection release situation includes the RRC connection release time and the RRC connection release times.
  • the optimal evaluation parameter may include at least one of the total duration of the RRC connected state and the total duration of the RRC disconnected state within the statistical duration, and at least one of the release matching rate and the false release rate within the statistical duration. in:
  • the false release refers to: after the RRC connection is released, if there is data transmission (such as data transmission or data reception) within the preset time period, the release is considered to be a false release, because after the RRC connection is released, there is new data.
  • a random access request is initiated during transmission to re-establish the RRC connection.
  • the random access process requires a certain amount of power consumption. In this case, the power consumption saved by this RRC connection release is smaller than the power consumption of the random access process. Therefore, This time is considered to be a false release.
  • the threshold group in the optimal candidate combination may be configured as a threshold group for determining whether to adjust the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer, and the RRC connection release timer duration set in the optimal candidate combination may be used to determine the RRC connection release timer duration set The target value of the timer duration.
  • a general threshold group and a general RRC connection release timer duration set can be learned. If a data packet received when a certain target application is a foreground application is obtained as sample data in S801, the threshold group corresponding to the application and the RRC connection release timer duration set can be obtained by learning. If, in S801, the data packets received when a representative application of a certain type of application is used as the foreground application are obtained as sample data, the learned threshold group and the RRC connection release timer duration set can be used as the application The threshold group corresponding to the type and the RRC connection release timer duration set.
  • the conditions for evaluating the optimal candidate combination may be preset, and the principle for selecting the optimal combination is to select a candidate combination with a lower false release rate and a longer total duration of the RRC non-connected state. Based on this principle, the conditions for evaluating the optimal candidate combination may include one of the following conditions:
  • the false release rate is less than the preset false release rate threshold, and the total duration of the RRC disconnected state is the largest or the ratio of the total duration of the RRC disconnected state to the statistical duration is the largest; for example, the false release rate threshold can be set to 40% ;
  • the false release rate is less than the preset false release rate threshold, and the total duration of the RRC connected state is the smallest or the ratio of the total duration of the RRC connected state to the statistical duration is the smallest;
  • Configuration information may be preset on the terminal, and the configuration information is used to generate the RRC connection release timer duration set rrcTimerSet, and the configuration information may include:
  • the maximum number of segmentation states NUM_STATE_MAX 5, that is, the number of durations in rrcTimerSet is at most 5;
  • the maximum RRC connection release timer duration RRC_REL_MAX 10, that is, the maximum value in rrcTimerSet is not greater than 10;
  • the minimum RRC connection release timer duration RRC_REL_MIN 1, that is, the minimum value in rrcTimerSet is not less than 1;
  • the release match rate threshold is 0.6.
  • the optimal first threshold ThHigh 7;
  • the release matching rate matchRate 0.86, which is greater than the set release matching rate threshold of 0.6;
  • the optimal first threshold ThHigh 346;
  • the release matching rate matchRate 0.76, which is greater than the set release matching rate threshold of 0.6;
  • the RRC connection release control method provided by the example can take into account the power consumption caused by the terminal in the RRC connected state and the power consumption caused by random access, and reduce the power consumption of the terminal as a whole.
  • the optimal first threshold ThHigh 61;
  • the optimal second threshold thLow 61;
  • the release matching rate matchRate 0.65, which is greater than the set release matching rate threshold of 0.6;
  • the RRC connection release control method provided by the example can take into account the power consumption caused by the terminal in the RRC connected state and the power consumption caused by random access, and reduce the power consumption of the terminal as a whole.
  • the above-selected optimal combination (ThLow, ThHigh, and RRC connection release duration set) may be updated in the subsequent use process.
  • the terminal may repeat the above process regularly or irregularly to obtain and configure the optimal RRC connection release timer duration and threshold group.
  • the terminal not only performs learning based on the currently collected sample data to obtain the optimal combination, but may perform learning based on the statistical results of data transmission of the sample data obtained multiple times.
  • the data transmission statistics results of the sample data collected the previous day and the transmission statistics results of the sample data collected two days ago are combined with the data transmission statistics results of the currently collected sample data for learning, so as to obtain the current optimal combination.
  • the statistical result of data transmission of sample data collected in recent days may be used to generate the optimal combination.
  • the terminal may learn the optimal combination according to the data transmission statistics of the currently collected sample data, and then perform a weighted average of the optimal combination and the historical optimal combination to generate a new optimal combination . For example, if the threshold group in the optimal combination learned on the current date is (ThLow1, ThHigh1), and the threshold group in the optimal combination learned the day before the current date is (ThLow2, ThHigh2), the weighted average can be performed according to the following formula :
  • ThLow3 a*ThLow1+(1-a)*ThLow2
  • ThHigh 3 b*ThHigh 1+(1-b)*ThHigh 2
  • a and b are weighting coefficients respectively, and both a and b are positive numbers less than 1.
  • the values of a and b can be the same or different.
  • both a and b are greater than 0.5, so that the weight of the currently learned threshold is maximized.
  • the threshold group (ThLow3, ThHigh3) after the weighted average is used as the updated threshold group.
  • the optimal timing duration of the RRC connection release timer can be set online based on the data packet sending and receiving status of the foreground application, so that the determined The time duration of the RRC connection timer matches the service sending and receiving state of the foreground service, thereby reducing the power consumption of the terminal.
  • sequence of each step of the process shown in FIG. 8 is only an example, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the sequence of S801 and S802 may be adjusted or executed in parallel.
  • the method can be executed by a terminal or by other devices. For example, for one or more application programs, sample data when the target application program is used as a foreground application program within the statistical time period is obtained, and the sample data is sent to the computing device, and the computing device is based on the figure.
  • the method shown in 8 determines the optimal RRC connection release timer duration set and threshold group corresponding to the target application or the application type to which the target application belongs, or uses the learned threshold group and RRC connection release timer duration set as The threshold group and the RRC connection release timer duration set corresponding to the application type to which the target application belongs, or the learned threshold group and the RRC connection release timer duration set may be used as the general threshold group and the general RRC connection release timer time collection.
  • the sample data can be obtained from statistics by the terminal or by the network device.
  • the terminal obtains the sample data by collecting statistics on the data sent within the statistical time period
  • the network device obtains the sample data by collecting statistics on the data received within the statistical time period.
  • the computing device may be any device that has data computing and processing capabilities and can implement the data processing function in the flow shown in FIG. 8 .
  • an optimal RRC connection release timer duration set and threshold group corresponding to one or more application types can be obtained through offline learning, and then an RRC connection release lookup table can be formed.
  • the RRC connection release lookup table uses In order to store the corresponding relationship between the application type information and the RRC connection release timer duration set and the threshold, query the RRC connection release lookup table according to the application type information, and obtain the RRC connection release timer duration set and threshold group corresponding to the application type.
  • Table 1 exemplarily shows an RRC connection release lookup table.
  • the optimal RRC connection release timer duration set and threshold group corresponding to one or more applications can be obtained through offline learning, and then an RRC connection release lookup table as shown in Table 2 can be formed.
  • the RRC connection release lookup table is used to store the correspondence between the application program information, the RRC connection release timer duration set and the threshold, and the RRC connection release lookup table is queried according to the application program information, and the RRC connection release timer corresponding to the application program can be obtained.
  • the application program information is used to identify the application program, and the application program information may include the application program identifier and the application program name.
  • Table 2 exemplarily shows an RRC connection release lookup table.
  • the RRC connection release timer duration set and the threshold group are obtained and configured through offline learning, so that the terminal can save the computing resources used for online learning of the RRC connection release timer duration set and the threshold.
  • the method can be executed by a terminal or by other devices. For example, for one or more application programs, sample data of each application program within the statistical time period is obtained, and the sample data is sent to the computing device, and the computing device determines the one or more by mathematical calculation method. or the optimal RRC connection release timer duration set and threshold group corresponding to each of the multiple applications.
  • the exponential segmentation method is used to generate the RRC connection release timer duration set as an example for description, and this idea can be applied to the online learning method using other methods to generate the RRC connection release timer duration set.
  • FIG. 12 exemplarily shows the flow of the online learning method. As shown in FIG. 12 , the following describes a target application as an example.
  • the online learning method may include the following steps:
  • S1201 Acquire data transmitted by the terminal within the statistical time period as sample data, and perform statistics on the sample data to obtain data packet interval distribution characteristics.
  • S1202 Determine at least one candidate RRC connection release timer duration set.
  • S1203 Determine at least one candidate threshold group corresponding to each candidate RRC connection release timer duration set according to the data packet interval distribution characteristics.
  • each candidate combination includes a candidate RRC connection release timer duration set and a candidate threshold group corresponding to the candidate RRC connection release timer duration set.
  • S1205 Determine the Markov state transition probability matrix corresponding to each candidate combination according to the distribution characteristics of the data packet interval and each candidate combination.
  • An element in a candidate RRC connection release timer duration set is the RRC connection release timer duration, which corresponds to a Markov state.
  • the Markov state transition probability matrix P t is expressed as:
  • K represents the number of Markov states.
  • P 1,1 represents the probability that state 1 remains in state 1
  • P 1,2 represents the probability that state 1 jumps to state 2, and so on.
  • P 1,3 0.
  • P t the sum of the probabilities of each row is equal to 1.
  • t session represents the data packet interval
  • Prob (t session ⁇ T i ) represents the probability that the data packet interval is less than the duration of the RRC connection release timer corresponding to the state Ti
  • n is a positive integer.
  • the probability P i,i-1 of jumping from the current state T i to the state T i -1 is:
  • the probability S t (P rob (T 1 ), P rob (T 2 )...P rob (T K )) of the Markov state T i can be calculated by the Markov
  • the state transition probability matrix is obtained:
  • S 0 is the initial state probability
  • P t is the Markov state transition probability matrix
  • S1206 Calculate the value of the objective function for evaluating the optimal candidate combination according to the Markov state transition probability matrix corresponding to each candidate combination, and determine the optimal candidate combination according to the value of the objective function.
  • the threshold group in the optimal candidate combination may be configured as a threshold group for determining whether to adjust the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer, and the RRC connection release timer duration set in the optimal candidate combination may be used to determine the RRC connection release timer duration set The target value of the timer duration.
  • a general threshold group and a general RRC connection release timer duration set can be learned. If a data packet received when a certain target application is a foreground application is obtained as sample data in S801, the threshold group corresponding to the application and the RRC connection release timer duration set can be obtained by learning. If, in S801, the data packets received when a representative application of a certain type of application is used as the foreground application are obtained as sample data, the learned threshold group and the RRC connection release timer duration set can be used as the application The threshold group corresponding to the type and the RRC connection release timer duration set.
  • the objective function can be set to minimize the average connected state dwell time function, which can be expressed as:
  • the optimal RRC connection release timer duration set and threshold group corresponding to one or more application types or application programs can be obtained through the above-mentioned offline learning method, which can be formed as shown in Table 1 or Table 2. RRC connection release lookup table.
  • sequence of each step of the process shown in FIG. 12 is only an example, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the sequence of S1201 and S1202 may be adjusted or executed in parallel.
  • the following takes a specific application scenario as an example to describe the implementation process of the embodiment of the present application.
  • the RRC connection release can be controlled according to the time duration of the RRC connection release timer agreed by the system. For example, when the base station is the mobile phone When the 10-second long RRC connection release timer configured by default expires, the base station releases the RRC connection with the mobile phone.
  • the application processor can monitor the start of the application, and can obtain the name of the application.
  • the application sends a data acquisition request (such as an HTTP get request) to the application processor after obtaining the event to request to obtain the The video data of the movie; the application processor sends transmission control protocol (transmission control protocol, TCP) connection establishment information to the modem. ) command; the modem establishes an RRC connection with the base station according to the AT command.
  • the AT command does not carry indication information for indicating the RRC connection release duration.
  • the application processor can monitor the start of the game application and obtain the The name of the game app.
  • the game application sends a data acquisition request (such as a UDP request) to the application processor; the application processor sends a user datagram protocol (UDP) to the modem.
  • UDP user datagram protocol
  • the UDP data may be carried in a request for sending and receiving data and sent to the modem, and the request may specifically be an AT command; the modem establishes an RRC connection with the base station according to the AT command.
  • the AT command does not carry indication information for indicating the RRC connection release duration.
  • the application processor determines whether to set the duration of the RRC connection release timer. If it is determined to be necessary, the application processor may further send an AT command to the modem, which may carry indication information for indicating the duration of the RRC connection release timer. , so that the modem sets the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer equal to the timing duration value indicated by the indication information.
  • the mobile phone requests the base station to release the RRC connection; if it is determined that it is not necessary to set the RRC connection The duration of the release timer, the application processor will not send the AT command to the modem to set the duration of the RRC connection release timer. time, the base station releases the RRC connection with the mobile phone.
  • the application processor determines that there is no need to send an AT command for setting the RRC connection release timer duration to the modem. Specifically, taking the current application program A being started as an example, the application processor (AP) determines the application type to which the application program A belongs, and queries the lookup table according to the application type. Because the lookup table is not currently configured, the query fails, and because the general threshold group and the general RRC connection release timer duration are not currently configured, the application processor (AP) determines that there is no need to send the modem to set the RRC connection release timer duration. AT commands.
  • the RRC connection release is controlled by the base station.
  • the 10-second RRC connection release timer configured by the base station for the mobile phone expires, the base station releases the RRC connection with the mobile phone.
  • the mobile phone requests the base station to release the RRC connection after 1 second.
  • the RRC connection release is controlled by the base station when the mobile phone is on. For example, when the 10-second RRC connection release timer configured by the base station for the mobile phone expires, the base station releases the RRC connection with the mobile phone.
  • the application processor (AP) of the mobile phone uses the above self-learning method to learn to determine whether the RRC connection release timer needs to be adjusted. and the RRC connection release timer duration set (hereinafter referred to as rrcTimerSet) for determining the target value of the RRC connection release timer timing duration.
  • the configuration of the threshold group and the RRC connection release timer duration set may include:
  • Case 1 a generic RRC connection release timer duration set and a generic threshold group
  • Case 2 Multiple RRC connection release timer duration sets and multiple threshold groups, wherein each RRC connection release timer duration set corresponds to one application, and each threshold group corresponds to one application;
  • Case 3 Multiple RRC connection release timer duration sets and multiple threshold groups, wherein each RRC connection release timer duration set corresponds to one application type, and each threshold group corresponds to one application type;
  • Case 4 On the basis of case 2, it also includes a general RRC connection release timer duration set and a general threshold group;
  • Case 5 On the basis of Case 3, it also includes a general RRC connection release timer duration set and a general threshold group.
  • One RRC connection release timer duration set includes at least two duration values, and one threshold group may include one threshold or two thresholds, such as ThHigh and ThLow, where ThHigh ⁇ ThLow.
  • the following description takes the threshold group and the RRC connection release timer duration set configured in the above case 4 as an example.
  • the application processor (AP) is set with:
  • rrcTimerSetA ⁇ 10.0, 4.65, 2.16, 1.01 ⁇ , threshold set A (ThHighA, ThLowA);
  • rrcTimerSetB ⁇ 9.01, 3.0, 1.0 ⁇ , threshold set B (ThHighB, ThLowB);
  • rrcTimerSetUN ⁇ 6.51, 2.0 ⁇ , threshold set UN (ThHighUN, ThLowUN).
  • a look-up table as shown in Table 3 can be set in the application processor (AP):
  • rrcTimerSetA and threshold group A correspond to Internet long video applications
  • rrcTimerSetB and threshold group B correspond to Internet short video applications
  • rrcTimerSetUN is a set of general RRC connection release timer durations
  • threshold group UN is a general threshold group. The durations in rrcTimerSet are sorted in descending order.
  • the mobile phone For a mobile phone that has been configured with a threshold group and an RRC connection release timer duration set, after the user is powered on, the mobile phone performs network access. After the phone is turned on, if the user does not open any applications, the phone remains disconnected.
  • the long video application A After the mobile phone is powered on or unlocked, and the mobile phone is in a disconnected state, if the user clicks the icon of the Internet long video application A in the user interface displayed on the mobile phone screen to start the long video application A, and trigger the long video application After selecting a movie in the user interface of A (for example, clicking the control in the form of thumbnail of the movie to request to obtain the video data of the movie), the long video application A sends the TCP connection information to the application processor after obtaining the event, and the application The processor sends an AT command to the modem according to the TCP connection information, and the modem (modem) establishes an RRC connection with the base station according to the AT command.
  • the modem modem
  • the application processor further determines whether the duration of the RRC connection release timer needs to be set.
  • the application processor determines that the current foreground application is application A, determines that the application type to which application A belongs is an Internet long video application, and queries the look-up table shown in Table 3 according to the application type, and obtains a match with the application type.
  • the threshold group A corresponding to the application type and the RRC connection release timer duration set rrcTimerSetA ⁇ 10.0, 4.65, 2.16, 1.01 ⁇ , determine the duration of the RRC connection release timer to be set, so send an AT command to the modem to instruct the modem to
  • the duration of the RRC connection release timer is set to the maximum duration of 10 seconds in the set rrcTimerSetA. After the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer is set, the timer starts timing with the set timing duration.
  • the values of each information field in the AT command are:
  • the value of the first information field is equal to 1;
  • the value of the second information field is equal to 1, indicating "enable OPEN_RRC_QUICKLY_RELEASE_FEATURE";
  • the third information field is reserved
  • the application processor (AP) further starts a counter to count the number of received data packets in the RRC connection state.
  • the data sent by the network side reaches the modem of the mobile phone, and after being demodulated by the modem, it is sent to the application processor (AP). Play in the video playback window.
  • the counter counts the number of data packets received by the mobile phone, wherein the data packets received by the mobile phone include the data packets of the long video application A sent by the network side, and further, may also include data transmission packets received by the background app.
  • the mobile phone After receiving the movie video data sent by the network side, the mobile phone buffers it in the buffer of the player, and plays the video data buffered in the buffer in the video window of the video application A.
  • the data volume in the buffer of the player reaches a relatively high proportion (such as 100%) in a relatively short period of time, and the long video application A pauses the
  • the network side sends a video data download request, so that the network side no longer sends video data to the mobile phone.
  • the RRC connection release timer expires, and the mobile phone sends the data to the mobile phone.
  • the base station sends a request to request to release the RRC connection, the base station accepts the request and releases the RRC connection with the mobile phone.
  • the application processor reads the count value of the counter counter, and judges that the count value is greater than ThLowA in the threshold group A corresponding to the long video application program, so it is determined that there is no need to adjust the timing of the RRC connection release timer, and there is no need to send a message to the modem for The AT command that sets the duration of the RRC connection release timer. At this time, the duration of the RRC connection release timer is still 10 seconds.
  • the application processor clears the counter counter to count the received data packets after the RRC connection is re-established.
  • the data volume in the buffer of the player drops to a lower threshold (for example, 40%), and the long video application A sends a data sending and receiving request to the application processor,
  • the application processor sends an AT command to the modem to trigger the modem to re-establish the RRC connection with the base station. Since the application processor does not detect the switching between the front and the back of the application, nor does it detect that a new application is opened, the application processor does not need to send the AT command to the modem to set the duration of the RRC connection release timer. After the RRC connection is re-established, the duration of the RRC connection release timer on the mobile phone is still 10 seconds.
  • Download request because the long video application A suspends sending download requests, the network side no longer sends video data to the mobile phone, and the mobile phone does not receive data packets for a period of time.
  • the duration reaches 10 seconds, the RRC connection is made.
  • the release timer expires, the mobile phone sends a request to the base station to request to release the RRC connection, and the base station accepts the request and releases the RRC connection with the mobile phone.
  • the timer After the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer is set, the timer starts timing with the set timing duration.
  • the application processor may also send an AT command for setting the duration of the RRC connection release timer to the modem after the RRC connection is re-established. Further, the application processor clears the counter counter to count the received data packets after the RRC connection is re-established.
  • An HTTP get request is sent to request video data, and the application processor sends an AT command to the modem to re-establish the RRC connection between the modem and the base station. It is detected that a new application is opened, so there is no need to adjust the duration of the RRC connection release timer, and the duration of the RRC connection release timer remains at 4.65 seconds.
  • the mobile phone receives the network side and sends video data to the mobile phone according to the download request sent by the mobile phone.
  • the mobile phone does not receive data packets for a period of time.
  • the duration reaches 4.65 seconds
  • the RRC connection is made.
  • the release timer expires, the mobile phone sends a request to the base station to request to release the RRC connection.
  • the base station does not accept the request and maintains the RRC connection with the mobile phone.
  • the timer After the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer is set, the timer starts timing with the set timing duration.
  • the application processor may also send an AT command for setting the duration of the RRC connection release timer to the modem after the RRC connection is re-established. Further, the application processor clears the counter counter to count the received data packets after the RRC connection is re-established.
  • the network performance is restored to a better state. Since the user clicks the control key to increase the playback speed, the mobile phone requests a large amount of video data to download from the network side, so that the mobile phone receives a large number of video data packets in a short period of time.
  • the target value of the release timer duration (since the current RRC connection release timer is 2.16 seconds, the smallest one of all duration values greater than 2.16 seconds is selected from this set), and an AT command is sent to the modem to Instructs the modem to set the duration of the RRC connection release timer equal to the target value of 4.65 seconds.
  • the timer starts timing with the set timing duration. Further, the application processor clears the counter counter, so as to count the received data packets after adjusting the duration of the RRC connection release timer.
  • the user returns to the main page (that is, the mobile phone desktop) through a touch operation, thereby switching the long video application A from the foreground to Background, at this point, there is no foreground application on the phone.
  • the application processor listens to the event that the long video application A switches from the foreground to the background, since it does not listen to an application switching to the foreground, nor does it listen to an application being opened, it is determined to keep the current RRC connection release timer.
  • the timing duration is 4.65 seconds, and there is no need to send an AT command to the modem to set the duration of the RRC connection release timer. Further, the application processor may keep the counter counter to continue counting the number of data packets received by the mobile phone.
  • the user switches the application A to the foreground through a touch operation.
  • the application processor queries the lookup table shown in Table 3 according to the application type, and obtains the threshold group A corresponding to the application type and the RRC connection release timer duration.
  • the user While the long video application A is running as the foreground application, in the RRC connection state, the user opens the short video application B (such as the Douyin application), then the long video application A is switched to the background application, and the short video application Program B is a foreground application.
  • the short video application B such as the Douyin application
  • a social application C such as WeChat application
  • the application processor monitors that the social application program C is started and runs as a foreground application program, it determines the application type to which the social application program C belongs, and queries the lookup table shown in Table 3 according to the application type.
  • the user uses the application to browse the content webpage of the official account. Since the amount of data for a web page may be small and the user browses the web page for a long time, there may be no data transfer for a sustained period of time.
  • the duration reaches 6.51 seconds, the RRC connection release timer expires, the mobile phone requests the base station to release the RRC connection, and the base station accepts the request and releases the RRC connection with the mobile phone.
  • the application processor may also send an AT command for setting the duration of the RRC connection release timer to the modem after the RRC connection is re-established. Further, the application processor clears the counter counter to count the received data packets after the RRC connection is re-established.
  • the user selects the video in the social application C to watch through the touch operation on the screen.
  • the social application C sends the connection information to the application processor, and the application processor sends the AT to the modem according to the connection information. command, the modem establishes an RRC connection with the base station according to the AT command. Since the application processor currently does not detect that there is an application switching between the front and the background, nor does it detect that a new application is started, it is determined that it is not necessary to adjust the timing of the RRC connection release timer. Therefore, the timing of the RRC connection release timer Still 2.0 seconds.
  • the mobile phone receives a large amount of video data packets in a short period of time.
  • the application processor determines that the count value of the counter counter reaches ThHighUN in the threshold group UN
  • the timer starts timing with the set timing duration. Further, the application processor clears the counter counter, so as to restart counting the number of received data packets after adjusting the duration of the RRC connection release timer.
  • the application processor listens to the front-background switching event of the application, determines that the current foreground application is the short video application B, and determines the application B
  • the application type it belongs to is an Internet short video application.
  • the timer starts timing with the set timing duration.
  • the application processor clears the counter counter, so as to restart counting the number of received data packets after adjusting the duration of the RRC connection release timer.
  • the timer duration is set to the maximum duration of 10.0 seconds in the set rrcTimerSetA, so that the duration of the RRC connection release timer is adjusted from 9.01 seconds to 10.0 seconds.
  • the timer starts timing with the set timing duration. Further, the application processor clears the counter counter, so as to restart counting the number of received data packets after adjusting the duration of the RRC connection release timer.
  • the user After that (that is, the application A is switched to the foreground after the above-mentioned application C and application B are closed in turn), the user enables the mobile phone split screen mode (for example, the mobile phone split screen mode can be enabled by a set gesture), so that the screen of the mobile phone is divided into There are two split-screen windows (the first split-screen window and the second split-screen window).
  • the first split-screen window runs the long video application A
  • the second split-screen window displays the main page (that is, the mobile phone desktop)
  • the home page App icons are displayed on the screen. No application is currently activated in the second split screen window.
  • the application processor does not monitor the application front-background switching event, nor does it detect that a new application is started, it is determined that there is no need to adjust the timing of the RRC connection release timer, and the timing of the RRC connection release timer is still 10.0 Second.
  • the application processor listens to the event that an application program is started, and determines that it is currently in split-screen mode (the application processor can obtain split-screen events to know that the mobile phone is currently in split-screen mode).
  • the timer starts timing with the set timing duration. Further, the application processor clears the counter counter, so as to restart counting the number of received data packets after adjusting the duration of the RRC connection release timer.
  • the priority of different application types can be set according to factors such as whether it is sensitive to delay. For example, the priority of the application type to which the delay-sensitive application belongs may be set to be higher, and the priority of the application type to which the delay-insensitive application belongs may be set to be lower.
  • the short video application B After the short video application B is started in the second split screen window, the short video application B needs to play the short video recommended by the system or the user has paid attention to, so it sends a download request to the network side to request to download the corresponding video data.
  • the side sends a video data packet to the mobile phone according to the download request, and the mobile phone plays the video data packet in the play window of the application program after receiving the video data packet.
  • the application processor may not send a message to the modem for The AT command for setting the duration of the RRC connection release timer can also be sent to the modem to set the duration of the RRC connection release timer, so that the modem sets the duration of the RRC connection release timer to 9.01 seconds. Further, the application processor clears the count value of the counter counter to count the number of subsequently received data packets.
  • the application processor listens to the above events and determines that the foreground application is switched to only the long video application.
  • the application processor determines that there is currently no foreground application, so the duration of the current RRC connection release timer can be kept unchanged, so the application processor does not need to send a message to the modem for setting the RRC connection. Release the AT command for the timer duration.
  • the application processor can also send an AT command to the modem, so that the modem releases the RRC connection according to the AT command
  • the timer is set to an inactive state or an inactive state.
  • the base station controls the release of the RRC connection between the mobile phone and the base station (for example, when there is no communication with the base station for 10 seconds.
  • the base station releases the RRC connection with the mobile phone.
  • the application processor sends an AT command to the modem for setting the duration of the RRC connection release timer. The timing duration is set to the target duration.
  • the mobile phone obtain the data packet reception status of the long video application A running as the foreground application within the statistical period (for example, 1 hour), such as counting the packet interval of the received data packets within the statistical period to obtain the data Packet interval distribution characteristics, and based on the data packet interval distribution characteristics, in the manner shown in FIG. 8 , a set of RRC connection release timer durations and a threshold group are learned.
  • the newly learned RRC connection release timer duration set and threshold group will be configured as the RRC connection release timer duration set and threshold group corresponding to the application type to which the long video application A belongs.
  • the newly learned RRC connection release timer duration set and threshold group can be enabled, or after the long video application A and other applications of the same type are closed, or all applications running in the foreground are disabled. After closing, the newly learned RRC connection release timer duration set and threshold group are enabled.
  • the currently used threshold set is A1 (ThHighA1, ThLowA1)
  • the currently used threshold group is A2 (ThHighA2, ThLowA2), then when the foreground applications on the mobile phone are closed, the new learning
  • the long video application A sends the TCP connection information to the application processor, the application processor sends the AT command to the modem according to the TCP connection information, and the modem (modem) according to the The AT command establishes an RRC connection with the base station.
  • the application processor determines that the current foreground application is application A, determines that the application type to which application A belongs is an Internet long video application, and queries the lookup table shown in Table 3 according to the application type, and obtains the corresponding application type.
  • Threshold group A2 and RRC connection release timer duration set rrcTimerSetA2 ⁇ 10, 5, 2.5, 1.25 ⁇ , determine the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer to be set, so send an AT command to the modem to instruct the modem to release the RRC connection timing
  • the duration of the timer is set to the maximum duration of 10 seconds in the set rrcTimerSetA. After the duration of the RRC connection release timer is set, the timer starts to count with the set duration.
  • the application processor (AP) further starts a counter to count the number of received data packets in the RRC connection state.
  • the data sent by the network side reaches the modem of the mobile phone, and after being demodulated by the modem, it is sent to the application processor (AP). Play in the video playback window.
  • the counter counts the number of data packets received by the mobile phone.
  • the mobile phone After receiving the movie video data sent by the network side, the mobile phone buffers it in the buffer of the player, and plays the video data buffered in the buffer in the video window of the video application A.
  • the data volume in the buffer of the player reaches a relatively high proportion (such as 90%) in a relatively short period of time, and the long video application A pauses the
  • the network side sends a video data download request, so that the network side no longer sends video data to the mobile phone.
  • the RRC connection release timer expires, and the mobile phone sends the data to the mobile phone.
  • the base station sends a request to request to release the RRC connection, the base station accepts the request and releases the RRC connection with the mobile phone.
  • the application processor reads the count value of the counter counter, and judges that the count value is greater than ThLowA2 in the threshold group A2 corresponding to the long video application program, so it is determined that there is no need to adjust the time duration of the RRC connection release timer, and there is no need to send a message to the modem for The AT command that sets the duration of the RRC connection release timer. At this time, the duration of the RRC connection release timer is still 10 seconds.
  • the application processor clears the counter counter to count the received data packets after the RRC connection is re-established.
  • the data volume in the buffer of the player drops to a lower threshold (for example, 40%), and the long video application A sends a data sending and receiving request to the application processor,
  • the application processor sends an AT command to the modem to trigger the modem to re-establish the RRC connection with the base station. Since the application processor does not detect the switching between the front and the back of the application, nor does it detect that a new application is opened, the application processor does not need to send the AT command to the modem to set the duration of the RRC connection release timer. After the RRC connection is re-established, the duration of the RRC connection release timer on the mobile phone is still 10 seconds.
  • Download request because the long video application A suspends sending download requests, the network side no longer sends video data to the mobile phone, and the mobile phone does not receive data packets for a period of time.
  • the duration reaches 10 seconds, the RRC connection is made.
  • the release timer expires, the mobile phone sends a request to the base station to request to release the RRC connection, and the base station accepts the request and releases the RRC connection with the mobile phone.
  • the timer After the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer is set, the timer starts timing with the set timing duration.
  • the application processor may also send an AT command for setting the duration of the RRC connection release timer to the modem after the RRC connection is re-established. Further, the application processor clears the counter counter to count the received data packets after the RRC connection is re-established.
  • An HTTP get request is sent to request video data, and the application processor sends an AT command to the modem to re-establish the RRC connection between the modem and the base station. It is detected that a new application is opened, so there is no need to adjust the duration of the RRC connection release timer, and the duration of the RRC connection release timer remains at 5 seconds.
  • the mobile phone receives the network side and sends video data to the mobile phone according to the download request sent by the mobile phone.
  • the mobile phone does not receive data packets for a period of time.
  • the duration reaches 5 seconds
  • the RRC connection is made.
  • the release timer expires, the mobile phone sends a request to the base station to request to release the RRC connection.
  • the base station does not accept the request and maintains the RRC connection with the mobile phone.
  • the timer After the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer is set, the timer starts timing with the set timing duration.
  • the application processor may also send an AT command for setting the duration of the RRC connection release timer to the modem after the RRC connection is re-established. Further, the application processor clears the counter counter to count the received data packets after the RRC connection is re-established.
  • the network performance is restored to a better state. Since the user clicks the control key to increase the playback speed, the mobile phone requests a large amount of video data to download from the network side, so that the mobile phone receives a large number of video data packets in a short period of time.
  • the target value of the release timer duration (since the current RRC connection release timer is 2.5 seconds, select the smallest one of all duration values greater than 2.5 seconds from this set), and send an AT command to the modem to Instructs the modem to set the duration of the RRC connection release timer equal to the target value of 5 seconds.
  • the timer starts timing with the set timing duration. Further, the application processor clears the counter counter, so as to count the received data packets after adjusting the duration of the RRC connection release timer.
  • the user returns to the main page (that is, the mobile phone desktop) through a touch operation, thereby switching the long video application A from the foreground to Background, at this point, there is no foreground application on the phone.
  • the application processor listens to the event that the long video application A switches from the foreground to the background, since it does not listen to an application switching to the foreground, nor does it listen to an application being opened, it is determined to keep the current RRC connection release timer.
  • the timing duration is 5 seconds, and there is no need to send an AT command to the modem to set the timing duration of the RRC connection release timer. Further, the application processor may keep the counter counter to continue counting the number of data packets received by the mobile phone.
  • the user switches the application A to the foreground through a touch operation.
  • the application processor queries the lookup table shown in Table 3 according to the application type, and obtains the threshold group A2 corresponding to the application type and the RRC connection release timer duration.
  • the time duration of the RRC connection release timer may be adjusted in the above-mentioned manner provided by the embodiments of the present application in a state where the screen of the mobile phone is on and the screen is off. Further, when the screen of the mobile phone is off, the application processor does not need to send an AT command for setting the RRC connection release timer to the modem, so that the time duration of the RRC connection release timer remains unchanged. When the screen of the mobile phone is on, the application processor does not need to send an AT command for setting the duration of the RRC connection release timer to the modem, so that the duration of the RRC connection release timer remains unchanged.
  • the application processor when the screen of the mobile phone is off, sends an AT command to the modem, so that the modem sets the duration of the RRC connection release timer to a fixed value (for example, 2 seconds). ), and keep the duration of the RRC connection release timer unchanged when the screen of the mobile phone is off.
  • the mobile phone When the mobile phone is in the off-screen state and the RRC connection release timer times out, the mobile phone sends a request to the base station to request to release the RRC connection between the base station and the mobile phone.
  • the base station can determine whether to accept the request according to the data transmission requirements, for example, When the base station determines that subsequent data needs to be sent to the mobile phone, it rejects the mobile phone's request and still maintains the RRC connection with the mobile phone.
  • the application processor determines that it is necessary to adjust the duration of the RRC connection release timer by calling the topActivity.getPackageName() function or other methods.
  • the modem sets the duration of the RRC connection release timer to the set. the maximum value of .
  • the timer starts timing with the set timing duration.
  • the application processor clears the counter to restart counting the number of received data packets, so that when the mobile phone is in a bright screen state, the time duration of the RRC connection release timer is performed using the method provided by the embodiment of the present application. Dynamic Adjustment.
  • references in this specification to "one embodiment” or “some embodiments” and the like mean that a particular feature, structure, or characteristic described in connection with the embodiment is included in one or more embodiments of the present application.
  • appearances of the phrases “in one embodiment,” “in some embodiments,” “in other embodiments,” “in other embodiments,” etc. in various places in this specification are not necessarily All refer to the same embodiment, but mean “one or more but not all embodiments” unless specifically emphasized otherwise.
  • the terms “including”, “including”, “having” and their variants mean “including but not limited to” unless specifically emphasized otherwise.
  • the methods provided by the embodiments of the present application have been introduced from the perspective of an electronic device (such as a mobile phone) as an execution subject.
  • the terminal may include a hardware structure and/or software modules, and implement the above functions in the form of a hardware structure, a software module, or a hardware structure plus a software module. Whether one of the above functions is performed in the form of a hardware structure, a software module, or a hardware structure plus a software module depends on the specific application program and design constraints of the technical solution.
  • the above-mentioned embodiments it may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof.
  • software it can be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on a computer, all or part of the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present invention are generated.
  • the computer may be a general purpose computer, special purpose computer, computer network, or other programmable device.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer readable storage medium to another computer readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be downloaded from a website site, computer, server or data center Transmission to another website site, computer, server, or data center is by wire (eg, coaxial cable, fiber optic, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (eg, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.).
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, data center, etc. that includes an integration of one or more available media.
  • the usable media may be magnetic media (eg, floppy disks, hard disks, magnetic tapes), optical media (eg, DVD), or semiconductor media (eg, Solid State Disk (SSD)), and the like.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

一种RRC连接释放控制方法和装置，应用于移动通信技术领域，涉及人工智能AI领域以及机器学习算法。本申请中，当终端的第一应用程序运行在前台期间，根据所述第一应用程序对应的定时时长设置第一定时器的定时时长，所述第一定时器为所述终端处于RRC连接态时使用的定时器，当所述终端处于RRC连接态时，所述第一定时器开始计时，当所述终端与网络设备存在信息交互时，所述第一定时器复位，从而基于该第一定时器对终端的RRC连接释放进行控制。采用本申请可对终端的RRC连接释放进行控制，从而可以节省终端的功耗。

Description

RRC连接释放控制方法和装置
相关申请的交叉引用
本申请要求在2020年10月30日提交中国专利局、申请号为202011194036.X、申请名称为“RRC连接释放方法和装置”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中；本申请要求在2020年11月20日提交中国专利局、申请号为202011315017.8、申请名称为“RRC连接释放控制方法和装置”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请涉及移动通信技术领域，尤其涉及RRC连接释放控制方法和装置。
背景技术
随着互联网的快速发展，越来越多的终端需要与网络设备进行通信。在终端与网络设备进行通信之前，终端需先与网络设备之间建立无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)连接。当终端与网络设备之间不需要进行通信时，可释放RRC连接。
终端有数据需要传输时，与网络设备建立RRC连接，当数据发送完成后，网络设备可以释放与该终端的RRC连接。网络设备可以在该网络设备为终端配置的非活动定时器(inactive timer)超时时，释放与该终端间的RRC连接，该非活动定时器的定时时长为固定值，比如该固定值为10秒。
由于非活动定时器的定时时长为固定值，则可能导致终端的功耗较高。
发明内容
本申请实施例提供RRC连接释放控制方法和装置，用以降低终端的功耗。
第一方面，提供一种RRC连接释放控制方法，应用于终端，所述终端存储有第一类应用程序对应的第一定时器的定时时长，所述第一类应用程序对应的所述第一定时器的定时时长包含至少两个时长值，所述第一定时器为所述终端处于RRC连接态时使用的定时器，当所述终端处于RRC连接态时，所述第一定时器开始计时，当所述终端接收到所述网络设备发送的数据时，所述第一定时器复位，所述方法还包括：
当终端的第一应用程序运行到前台时，所述终端确定所述第一应用程序的应用类型；
判断所述第一应用程序的应用类型是否属于所述第一应用类型；
当所述第一应用程序的应用类型属于所述第一应用类型时，所述终端从所述至少两个时长值中确定出第一时长值作为所述第一定时器的定时时长；
检测到针对所述第一应用程序的预设操作，所述终端与网络设备建立RRC连接；
在所述终端与所述网络设备建立所述RRC连接时，所述第一定时器开始计时；
当所述第一定时器的计时值超过所述第一时长值时，所述终端请求所述网络设备释放所述RRC连接。
其中，针对视频类应用，所述预设操作可以是播放某个视频的操作；针对游戏类应用， 所述预设操作可以是点击开始的操作。所述预设操作用于请求获得数据，只要是请求获得数据的操作都属于所述预设操作。
上述设计方案中，在终端中设置第一定时器，所述第一定时器为所述终端处于RRC连接态时使用的定时器，当所述终端处于RRC连接态时，所述第一定时器开始计时，当所述终端接收到所述网络设备发送的数据时，所述第一定时器复位，通过该第一定时器对RRC连接释放进行控制。其中，当终端的第一应用程序(该第一应用程序属于第一应用类型)运行到前台时，从该第一应用程序所属的第一应用类型对应的至少两个时长值中确定第一时长值作为上述第一定时器的定时时长，当第一定时器超时(即第一定时器的计时值超过所述第一时长值时)，终端请求网络设备释放该终端的RRC连接，由于根据第一应用程序所属的应用类型对应的时长值来设置第一定时器的定时时长，使得用于控制RRC连接释放的第一定时器的定时时长与前台运行的应用程序相适应，从而可以根据该第一应用程序的数据传输情况，对RRC连接释放进行控制，进而可以节省终端的功耗。
第二方面，提供一种RRC连接释放控制方法，包括：
当终端的第一应用程序运行在前台期间，确定所述第一应用程序对应的第一定时器的定时时长，所述第一定时器为所述终端处于RRC连接态时使用的定时器，当所述终端处于RRC连接态时，所述第一定时器开始计时，当所述终端与网络设备存在信息交互时，所述第一定时器复位；
检测到针对所述第一应用程序的预设操作时，所述终端与网络设备建立RRC连接；
在所述终端与所述网络设备建立所述RRC连接时，所述第一定时器开始计时；
当所述第一定时器的计时值超过所述定时时长时，所述终端请求所述网络设备释放所述RRC连接。
上述设计方案中，在终端中设置第一定时器，所述第一定时器为所述终端处于RRC连接态时使用的定时器，当所述终端处于RRC连接态时，所述第一定时器开始计时，当所述终端接收到所述网络设备发送的数据时，所述第一定时器复位，通过该第一定时器对RRC连接释放进行控制。其中，当终端的第一应用程序运行在前台期间，根据第一应用程序对应的定时时长设置第一定时器的定时时长，当第一定时器超时(即第一定时器的计时值超过所述定时时长时)，终端请求网络设备释放该终端的RRC连接，由于根据第一应用程序对应的定时时长来设置第一定时器的定时时长，使得用于控制RRC连接释放的第一定时器的定时时长与前台运行的应用程序相适应，从而可以根据该第一应用程序的数据传输情况，对RRC连接释放进行控制，进而可以节省终端的功耗。
在一种可能的设计中，所述信息交互包含以下至少一种情况：
所述终端接收到所述网络设备发送的下行数据；
所述终端接收到所述网络设备发送的下行信令；
所述终端向所述网络设备发送上行数据；
所述终端向所述网络设备发送上行信令。
在上述设计方案中，当在所述第一定时器运行期间，如果终端与网络设备存在信息交互(比如接收到下行数据或信令，或者发送上行数据或信令)，则所述第一定时器复位，从而可以实现基于该第一定时器对RRC连接释放进行控制。
在一种可能的设计中，所述确定所述第一应用程序对应的第一定时器的定时时长，包括：
确定所述第一应用程序所属的应用类型对应的第一定时器的定时时长。
上述设计方案中，由于属于同一应用类型的应用程序通常具有相似的数据传输特性，因此可以针对应用类型设置第一定时器的定时时长，使得属于同一应用类型的应用程序对应的第一定时器的定时时长相同，这样可以针对属于同一应用类型的应用程序，基于相同的定时时长对RRC连接释放进行控制。
在一种可能的设计中，所述确定所述第一应用程序所属的应用类型对应第一定时器的定时时长，包括：
若所述第一应用程序所属的应用类型为第一应用类型，则所述第一定时器的定时时长为所述第一应用类型对应的定时时长；
若所述第一应用程序所属的应用类型为与所述第一应用类型不同的第二应用类型，则所述第一定时器的定时长为所述第二应用类型对应的定时时长，所述第二应用类型对应的定时时长与所述第一类型对应的定时时长相同或不同。
上述设计方案中，由于属于不同应用类型的应用程序通常具有不同的数据传输特性，因此针对不同应用类型设置不同的定时时长，可以根据属于不同应用类型的应用程序的数据传输特性，基于不同的定时时长设置第一定时器的定时时长，从而基于第一定时器进行RRC连接释放控制，使得RRC连接释放控制与前台运行的应用程序的传输特性相适应，从而可以节省终端的功耗。
在一种可能的设计中，在所述确定所述第一应用程序对应的第一定时器的定时时长之后，所述方法还包括：
对所述终端处于所述RRC连接态下的数据传输量进行统计；
基于统计结果，对所述第一定时器的定时时长进行调整。
上述设计方案中，基于数据传输量的统计结果调整第一定时器的计时时长，使得第一定时器的计时时长动态可调，这样可以根据数据的传输情况来适应性调整第一定时器的计时时长，使其能够与数据传输情况匹配，从而节省终端的功耗。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一应用程序对应至少两个时长值，所述确定所述第一应用程序的对应第一定时器的定时时长，包括：确定所述第一定时器的定时时长为所述至少两个时长值中的第一时长值；
所述基于所述统计结果，对所述第一定时器的定时时长进行调整，包括：若所述统计结果大于第一门限，将所述第一定时器的定时时长由所述第一时长值增大为第二时长值；或，当在所述第一定时器的定时时长内所述终端与网络设备不存在所述信息交互后，若所述统计结果小于第二门限，则将所述第一定时器的定时时长由所述第一时长值降低为第三时长值；或，若所述统计结果大于第一门限，将所述第一定时器的定时时长由所述第一时长值增大为第二时长值；当在所述第一定时的定时时长内所述终端与网络设备不存在所述信息交互后，若所述统计结果小于第二门限，则将所述第一定时器的定时时长由所述第一时长值降低为第三时长值，其中，所述第二门限小于或等于所述第一门限。
上述设计方案中，若数据传输的统计结果大于第一门限，则表明数据收发较密集，针对此种情况增大所述第一定时器的定时时长，可以减少过早释放RRC连接的几率，从而节省终端的功耗。若数据传输的统计结果小于第二门限，则表明数据收发较稀疏，针对此种情况降低所述第一定时器的定时时长，可以减少过晚释放RRC连接的几率，从而节省终端的功耗。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第二时长值是所述第一时长值的α倍，所述第一时长值是所述第三时长值的α倍，α为大于1的固定值。基于上述第二时长值、第一时长值和第三时长值间的倍数关系，在调整所述计时时长的取值时，可以实现逐渐增大或逐渐降低，避免调整幅度过大。
在一种可能的设计中，若所述统计结果小于所述第二门限，则将所述第一定时器的定时时长由所述第一时长值降低为第三时长值之后，所述方法还包括：
所述终端重新进入RRC连接态，所述第一定时器开始计时，所述第一定时器的定时时长为所述第三时长值；
当所述终端与所述网络设备存在信息交互时，所述第一定时器复位；
当所述第一定时器的计时值超过所述定时时长时，所述终端请求所述网络设备释放所述RRC连接。
在一种可能的设计中，所述确定所述第一应用程序对应的第一定时器的定时时长之后，所述方法还包括：所述终端的第一模块向所述终端的第二模块发送第一指令，所述第一指令中携带用于指示所述第一定时器的定时时长的指示信息；所述第二模块根据所述指示信息设置所述终端的所述第一定时器的定时时长。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一模块包括所述终端的应用处理器，所述第二模块包括所述终端的调制解调器。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一应用程序保持运行在前台。
在一种可能的设计中，所述当终端的第一应用程序运行在前台期间，确定所述第一应用程序对应的第一定时器的定时时长，包括：当所述第一应用程序运行到前台时，确定所述第一应用程序对应的第一定时器的定时时长，其中，在第一时间运行所述第一应用程序时，所述定时时长的取值为第一时长值，在第二时间运行所述第一应用程序时，所述定时时长的取值为第四时长值，所述第一时长值与所述第四时长值不同。
上述设计方案中，第一应用程序对应的第一定时器的定时时长可以更新，使得在不同时间，第一应用程序运行到前台时，所确定的第一应用程序对应的定时时长不同。在一种可能的设计中，可以根据第一应用程序在前台运行期间的数据传输统计结果，对该第一应用程序对应的第一定时器的定时时长进行更新，从而使得第一定时器的定时时长与第一应用程序的数据传输特性相适应。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一应用程序所属的应用类型对应至少两个时长值，所述确定所述第一应用程序对应第一定时器的定时时长，包括：确定所述至少两个时长值中的最大值作为所述第一定时器的定时时长；和/或，所述第一时长值小于或等于网络设备上配置的非活动定时器的定时时长。
上述设计方案中，一方面，当将所述第一应用程序运行到前台时，将所述第一定时器的定时时长设置为该第一应用程序对应的至少两个时长值中的最大值，可以减少RRC连接被过早释放的几率，这样，若第一应用程序的数据收发较密集，则可以保证第一应用程序的数据收发，从而在保证第一应用程序的数据传输以及降低终端功耗之间得到兼顾；另一方面，第一时长值小于或等于网络设备上配置的非活动定时器的定时时长，这样可以使得第一定时器的定时时长的调整范围最大达到网络设备上默认配置的非活动定时器的定时时长，使得终端的性能(如功耗和/或时延)至少能与网络侧的性能持平。
第三方面，提供一种RRC连接释放控制方法，包括：
当终端的第一应用程序运行在前台期间，确定所述第一应用程序对应的计时时长；
判断在所述计时时长内，所述终端与网络设备是否存在信息交互；
若不存在所述信息交互，所述终端请求所述网络设备释放所述终端的RRC连接。
上述设计方案中，终端判断计时时长内，与网络设备是否存在信息交互，若不存在信息交互，所述终端请求所述网络设备释放所述终端的RRC连接，可见，所述计时时长用于控制RRC连接释放。在第一应用程序运行在前台期间，通过设置第一应用程序对应的计时时长，使得用于控制RRC连接释放的计时时长与前台运行的应用程序相适应，从而可以根据该第一应用程序的数据传输情况，对RRC连接释放进行控制，进而可以节省终端的功耗。
在一种可能的设计中，所述信息交互包含以下至少一种情况：
所述终端接收到所述网络设备发送的下行数据；
所述终端接收到所述网络设备发送的下行信令；
所述终端向所述网络设备发送上行数据；
所述终端向所述网络设备发送上行信令。
上述设计方案中，在下行方向上，若在所述计时时长内，终端没有接收到网络设备发送的数据或信令，则终端可请求网络设备释放RRC连接，以降低终端功耗；在上行方向上，若在所述计时时长内，终端没有向网络设备发送的数据或信令，则终端可请求网络设备释放RRC连接，以降低终端功耗。
在一种可能的设计中，所述方法还包括：若在所述计时时长内，所述终端与所述网络设备存在信息交互，以所述终端发生所述信息交互的时间为起始点，重新执行以下步骤：
判断在所述计时时长内，所述终端与网络设备是否存在信息交互；
若不存在所述信息交互，所述终端请求所述网络设备释放所述终端的RRC连接。
上述设计方案中，若终端与网络设备间存在信息交互，则以当前发生信息交互的时间为起点重新开始计时，以判断在重新开始计时的所述计时时长内，所述终端是否与所述网络设备间存在信息交互，从而实现只有当终端与网络设备间没有信息交互且该情况持续时长达到所述计时时长时，才请求网络设备释放RRC连接，进而可以在通过请求释放RRC连接以节省终端功耗的同时，保证所述第一应用程序的数据传输。
在一种可能的设计中，所述确定所述第一应用程序对应的计时时长，包括：确定所述第一应用程序所属的应用类型对应的计时时长。
在一种可能的设计中，所述确定所述第一应用程序所属的应用类型对应的计时时长，包括：
若所述第一应用程序所属的应用类型为第一应用类型，则所述计时时长为所述第一应用类型对应的计时时长；
若所述第一应用程序所属的应用类型为与所述第一应用类型不同的第二应用类型，则所述计时时长为所述第二应用类型对应的计时时长，所述第二应用类型对应的计时时长与所述第一类型对应的计时时长相同或不同。
上述设计方案中，由于属于不同应用类型的应用程序通常具有不同的数据传输特性，因此针对不同应用类型设置不同的计时时长，可以根据属于不同应用类型的应用程序的数据传输特性，基于不同的计时时长进行RRC连接释放控制，使得RRC连接释放控制与前台运行的应用程序的传输特性相适应，从而可以节省终端的功耗。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一应用程序所属的应用类型对应至少两个时长值；所述确定所述第一应用程序所属的应用类型对应的计时时长，包括：确定所述至少两个时长值中的第一时长值为所述计时时长的取值。
上述设计方案中，由于应用类型对应的计时时长的取值数量为至少两个(即两个或两个以上)，因此可以从中选择一个计时时长值进行RRC连接释放控制，提高了RRC连接释放控制的灵活性。进一步的，该设计方案可为以下方案提供支持：根据数据传输的具体情况从所述至少两个时长值中选择与当前情况匹配的时长值，以进一步节省终端功耗。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一应用程序对应至少两个时长值；所述确定所述第一应用程序对应的计时时长，包括：确定所述至少两个时长值中的第一时长值为所述计时时长的取值。
上述设计方案中，由于不同应用程序通常具有不同的数据传输特性，因此针对不同应程序设置不同的计时时长的取值，可以根据不同应用程序的数据传输特性，基于不同的计时时长值进行RRC连接释放控制，使得RRC连接释放控制与前台运行的应用程序的传输特性相适应，从而可以节省终端的功耗。
在一种可能的设计中，确定所述第一应用程序对应的计时时长，包括：确定所述计时时长的取值为所述第一应用程序对应的第一时长值；
确定所述第一应用程序对应的计时时长为所述第一时长值之后，所述方法还包括：对所述终端处于所述RRC连接态下的数据传输进行统计，获得统计结果；基于所述统计结果，对所述计时时长的取值进行调整。
上述设计方案中，终端可以对数据传输进行统计，并根据统计结果对用于进行RRC连接释放控制的所述计时时长进行调整，从而可以根据数据传输情况，动态调整用于进行RRC连接释放控制的时长，进而节省终端功耗。其中，所述“对所述终端处于所述RRC连接态下的数据传输进行统计”是指，在终端进入RRC连接态后到RRC连接释放时的时间段内(该时间段内终端一直处于RRC连接态)，对该时间段内的数据传输进行统计。
在一种可能的设计中，所述对所述计时时长的取值进行调整之后，所述方法还包括：判断在取值调整后的所述计时时长内，所述终端与所述网络设备是否存在信息交互；若不存在所述信息交互，所述终端请求所述网络设备释放所述终端的RRC连接。
上述设计方案中，终端在调整所述计时时长的取值之后，基于调整后的计时时长，判断在调整后的计时时长内所述终端与所述网络设备是否存在信息交互，并当不存在所述信息交互的情况下，请求所述网络设备释放所述终端的RRC连接，从而可实现基于动态调整的计时时长进行RRC连接释放控制。
在一种可能的设计中，所述基于所述统计结果，对所述计时时长的取值进行调整，包括：
若所述统计结果大于第一门限，将所述计时时长由所述第一时长值增大为第二时长值；其中，若数据传输的统计结果大于第一门限，则表明数据收发较密集，针对此种情况增大所述计时时长的值，可以减少过早释放RRC连接的几率，从而节省终端的功耗。
或者，当在所述计时时长(该计时时长的取值为所述第一时长值)内所述终端与网络设备不存在所述信息交互后，若所述统计结果小于第二门限，则将所述计时时长的取值由所述第一时长值降低为第三时长值；其中，若数据传输的统计结果小于第二门限，则表明数据收发较稀疏，针对此种情况降低所述计时时长的取值，可以减少过晚释放RRC连接 的几率，从而节省终端的功耗；
或者，若所述统计结果大于第一门限，将所述计时时长的取值由所述第一时长值增大为第二时长值；当在所述计时时长内(该计时时长的取值为所述第一时长值)，所述终端与网络设备不存在所述信息交互后，若所述统计结果小于第二门限，则将所述计时时长的取值由所述第一时长值降低为第三时长值，其中，所述第二门限小于或等于所述第一门限。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第二时长值是所述第一时长值的α倍，所述第一时长值是所述第三时长值的α倍，α为大于1的固定值。基于上述第二时长值、第一时长值和第三时长值间的倍数关系，在调整所述计时时长的取值时，可以实现逐渐增大或逐渐降低，避免调整幅度过大。
在一种可能的设计中，若所述统计结果小于所述第二门限，则将所述第一时长值降低为第三时长值之后，所述方法还包括：所述终端重新进入RRC连接态；判断在所述计时时长内，所述终端与所述网络设备是否存在信息交互，所述计时时长的取值为所述第三时长值；若不存在所述信息交互，所述终端请求所述网络设备释放所述终端的RRC连接。
上述设计方案中，在将所述计时时长的取值调整为第三时长值后，若RRC连接被释放之后，再次重新建立RRC连接，且第一应用程序一直在前台运行(如第一应用程序未被关闭或被切换到后台)，则仍基于调整后的第三时长值对RRC连接释放进行控制。在另一些场景中，在将所述计时时长的取值调整为第三时长值之后，若第一应用程序从前台切换到后台运行，并再次被切换到前台运行后，终端确定该第一应用程序所属的应用类型对应的计时时长的取值为第一时长值，并在终端重新建立RRC连接后，基于该第一时长值对RRC连接释放进行控制。
上述设计方案中，若第一应用程序保持运行在前台，则在RRC连接被重新建立的前后，所述计时时长保持不变，但当第一应用程序发生前后台切换时，需要重新设置所述计时时长，从而使得用于对RRC连接释放进行控制的计时时长与当前在前台运行的应用程序相适应，从而可以节省终端功耗。
在一种可能的设计中，在将所述计时时长从所述第一时长值降低为第三时长值后，所述终端重新进入RRC连接态之后，所述方法还包括：
对所述终端处于所述RRC连接态下的数据传输进行统计，获得统计结果；
若所述统计结果大于所述第一门限，则表明数据收发较密集，针对此种情况，将所述计时时长的取值由所述第三时长值增大为所述第一时长值，可以减少过早释放RRC连接的几率，从而节省终端的功耗；
若在所述计时时长内所述终端与网络设备不存在信息交互，所述终端请求所述网络设备释放RRC连接；若所述统计结果小于所述第二门限，则表明数据收发较稀疏，针对此种情况则将所述计时时长的取值由所述第三时长值降低为第四时长值，可以减少或避免过晚释放RRC连接的几率，从而节省终端的功耗。
在一种可能的设计中，将所述第一时长值降低为第三时长值之后，所述方法还包括：若在取值为所述第三时长值的所述计时时长内，所述终端与所述网络设备存在信息交互，以所述终端发生所述信息交互的时间为起始点，重新执行以下步骤：
判断在取值为所述第三时长值的所述计时时长内，所述终端与网络设备是否存在信息交互；若不存在所述信息交互，所述终端请求所述网络设备释放所述终端的RRC连接。
上述设计方案中，将所述第一时长值降低为第三时长值之后，若终端与网络设备间存 在信息交互，则以当前发生信息交互的时间为起点重新开始计时，以判断在重新开始计时的所述计时时长内，所述终端是否与所述网络设备间存在信息交互，从而实现只有当终端与网络设备间没有信息交互且该情况持续时长达到所述计时时长时，才请求网络设备释放RRC连接，进而可以在通过请求释放RRC连接以节省终端功耗的同时，保证所述第一应用程序的数据传输。
在一种可能的设计中，所述确定所述第一应用程序对应的计时时长之后，所述方法还包括：所述终端的第一模块向所述终端的第二模块发送第一指令，所述第一指令中携带用于指示所述计时时长的指示信息；所述第二模块根据所述指示信息将所述终端的第一定时器的计时时长设置为所述计时时长的取值。
进一步的，所述判断在所述计时时长内所述终端与网络设备是否存在所述信息交互，包括：判断所述第一定时器的运行期间，所述终端与所述网络设备是否存在信息交互，其中，在如果所述第一定时器运行期间，所述终端与网络设备存在信息交互，所述第一定时器复位。
在上述设计方案中，使用第一定时器对RRC连接释放进行控制，以降低技术实现难度。通过第一模块向第二模块发送指令以使得第二模块对第一定时器的计时时长设置为所述计时时长的取值，使得第一定时器按照该计时时长进行计时，并当在所述定时器运行期间如果与网络设备存在信息交互，则所述第一定时器复位，从而可以实现基于该第一定时器对RRC连接释放进行控制。
在一种可能的设计中，所述确定所述第一应用程序对应的计时时长之后，所述方法还包括：若在所述计时时长内所述终端与网络设备不存在所述信息交互，所述终端的第一模块向所述终端的第二模块发送第二指令，所述第二指令用于指示所述第二模块向所述网络设备请求释放所述RRC连接。
在上述设计方案中，通过第一模块判断所述计时时长内所述终端与网络设备是否存在所述信息交互，并在判断为不存在所述信息交互时，向第二模块发送指令以指示第二模块向网络设备请求释放RRC连接，从而实现对RRC连接释放进行控制。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一模块包括所述终端的应用处理器，所述第二模块包括所述终端的调制解调器。通过应用处理器向调制解调器发送指令以对RRC连接释放进行控制，在技术实现上简单易行，与终端的硬件架构相适应，对终端结构几乎没有影响。
在一种可能的设计中，在确定所述第一应用程序对应的计时时长之后，所述方法还包括：
响应于所述第一应用程序被关闭或者切换到后台的操作；
判断是否有运行在前台的应用程序；
若没有运行到前台的应用程序，保持所述计时时长的时长值不变；
若有运行到前台的应用程序，则将所述计时时长更新为所述运行到前台的应用程序对应的计时时长。
上述设计方案中，在确定第一应用程序对应的计时时长后，若第一应用程序被关闭或切换到后台运行，则判断当前前台是否有应用程序运行，若没有，则保持所述计时时长的时长值不变，简化技术实现；否则将所述计时时长更新为当前运行到前台的应用程序对应的计时时长，从而使得计时时长与前台运行的应用程序相适应，以降低终端功耗。
在一种可能的设计中，所述当终端的第一应用程序运行在前台期间，确定所述第一应 用程序对应的计时时长，包括：当所述第一应用程序运行到前台时，确定所述第一应用程序对应的所述计时时长，在第一时间运行所述第一应用程序时，所述计时时长的取值为第一计时值；在第二时间运行所述第一应用程序时，所述计时时长的取值为第五时长值，所述第一计时值与所述第五时长值不同。
上述设计方案中，所述第一应用程序运行期间，在不同的时间，所述计时时长的取值可能不同，从而使得用于对RRC连接释放进行控制的计时时长动态可调。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一应用程序所属的应用类型对应至少两个时长值，所述确定所述第一应用程序对应的计时时长，包括：确定所述至少两个时长值中的第一时长值作为所述计时时长的取值，其中所述第一时长值为所述至少两个时长值中的最大值；和/或，所述第一时长值小于或等于网络设备上配置的非活动定时器的计时时长。
上述设计方案中，一方面，当将所述第一应用程序运行到前台时，将所述计时时长设置为该第一应用程序对应的至少两个时长值中的最大值，可以减少RRC连接被过早释放的几率，这样，若第一应用程序的数据收发较密集，则可以保证第一应用程序的数据收发，从而在保证第一应用程序的数据传输以及降低终端功耗之间得到兼顾；另一方面，第一时长值小于或等于网络设备上配置的非活动定时器的计时时长，这样可以使得用于对RRC连接释放进行控制的计时时长的调整范围最大达到网络设备上默认配置的非活动定时器的计时时长，使得终端的性能(如功耗和/或时延)至少能与网络侧的性能持平。
第四方面，提供一种RRC连接释放控制方法，包括：
在终端处于RRC连接态下，对所述终端的数据传输量进行统计；
基于统计结果，对所述终端的第一定时器的定时时长进行调整，所述第一定时器为所述终端处于RRC连接态下使用的定时器，在所述第一定时器的计时值超过调整后的定时时长时，所述终端请求网络设备释放所述终端的RRC连接。
上述设计方案中，基于数据传输量的统计结果调整第一定时器的定时时长，使得第一定时器的定时时长动态可调，这样可以根据数据的传输情况来适应性调整第一定时器的定时时长，使其能够与数据传输情况匹配，从而节省终端的功耗。
在一种可能的设计中，所述方法还包括：在满足以下至少一个条件时，所述第一定时器复位：
所述终端接收到下行数据；
所述终端接收到下行信令；
所述终端发送上行数据；
所述终端发送上行信令。
其中，所述第一定时器复位是指，所述第一定时器重新开始计时。
在一种可能的设计中，所述终端的数据传输量包括：前台运行的应用程序的数据传输量，和/或后台运行的应用程序的数据传输量。
上述设计方案中，如果有应用程序在前台运行，可以针对前台运行的应用程序的数据传输另进行统计，从而基于前台运行的应用程序的数据传输量的统计结果对第一定时器进行调整，使得第一定时器的定时时长与前台运行的应用程序相适应；进一步的，当有后台应用程序运行时，还可以进一步对后台运行的应用程序的数据传输量进行统计，从而基于前台和后台运行的应用程序的数据传输量的统计结果对第一定时器的定时时长进行调整，使得第一定时器的定时时长与前台和后台运行的应用程序相适应。
在一种可能的设计中，所述基于所述统计结果，对第一定时器的定时时长进行调整，包括：
若所述统计结果大于第一门限，将所述第一定时器的定时时长的取值由第一时长值增大为第二时长值；其中，若数据传输量的统计结果大于第一门限，则表明数据收发较密集，针对此种情况增大第一定时器的定时时长，可以减少过早释放RRC连接的几率，从而节省终端的功耗；
当所述第一定时器的计时值超过所述定时时长时，若所述统计结果小于第二门限，则将所述第一定时器的定时时长的取值由所述第一时长值降低为第三时长值，所述第二门限小于或等于所述第一门限；其中，若数据传输量的统计结果小于第二门限，则表明数据收发较稀疏，针对此种情况，降低第一定时器的定时时长，可以减少过晚释放RRC连接的几率，从而节省终端的功耗。
在一种可能的设计中，所述若所述统计结果大于第一门限，将所述第一定时器的定时时长的取值由第一时长值增大为第二时长值，包括：当所述第一定时器的计时值超过所述定时时长时，若所述统计结果大于第一门限，将所述第一定时器的定时时长的取值由所述第一时长值增大为所述第二时长值。这种情况下，当第一定时器的计时值超过定时时长时(即第一定时器超时时)，终端可向网络设备请求释放RRC连接，若统计结果大于第一门限，则表明此前一段时间内，数据收发较密集，针对此种情况增大第一定时器的定时时长，无论终端向网络设备提出的释放RRC连接的请求是否被接受，第一定时器都可以基于调整后的第二时长值进行计时，从而减少过早释放RRC连接的几率，进而节省终端的功耗；
在一种可能的设计中，所述若所述统计结果大于第一门限，将所述第一定时器的定时时长的取值由第一时长值增大为第二时长值，包括：在所述终端处于所述RRC连接态时，若所述统计结果大于第一门限，将所述第一定时器的定时时长的取值由所述第一时长值增大为所述第二时长值。这种情况下，若在RRC连接态下，数据传输量的统计结果大于第一门限，则表明数据收发较密集，针对此种情况增大第一定时器的定时时长，可以减少过早释放RRC连接的几率，从而节省终端的功耗。
在一种可能的设计中，所述方法还包括：获取所述第一定时器对应的至少两个时长值；将所述至少两个时长值中大于所述第一时长值的时长值确定为所述第二时长值；和/或，获取所述第一定时器对应的至少两个时长值；将所述至少两个时长值中小于所述第一时长值的时长值确定为所述第三时长值。
在一种可能的设计中，所述将所述至少两个时长值中大于所述第一时长值的时长值确定为所述第二时长值，包括：将所述至少两个时长值中大于所述第一时长值的最小值作为所述第二时长值。所述将所述至少两个时长值中小于所述第一时长值的时长值确定为所述第三时长值，包括：将所述至少两个时长值中小于所述第一时长值的最大值作为所述第三时长。
上述设计方案，可以使得第一定时器的定时时长逐渐增大或逐渐减小，避免调整幅度过大。
在一种可能的设计中，所述获取所述第一定时器对应的至少两个时长值，包括：获取前台运行的应用程序对应的所述至少两个时长值；或，根据前台运行的应用程序所属的应用类型，获取与所述应用类型对应的所述至少两个时长值。
上述设计方案中，可使得获取到的时长值与应用程序或应用程序所属的应用类型相适 应，从而使得第一定时器的定时时长与前台运行的应用程序或该应用程序所属的应用类型相适应，进而可以根据前台运行的应用程序或该应用程序所属的应用类型的数据传输特性，对RRC连接释放进行控制。
在一种可能的设计中，所述方法还包括：若根据前台运行的应用程序所属的应用类型，未获取到所述至少两个时长值；获取通用的第一定时器所对应的所述至少两个时长值，从而可以在上述情况下，依然可以实现第一定时器的定时时长动态可调。
在一种可能的设计中，若所述前台运行的应用程序包括至少两个应用程序，则所述根据前台运行的应用程序所属的应用类型，获取与所述应用类型对应的所述至少两个时长值，包括：根据第一应用程序所属的应用类型，获取与所述应用类型对应的所述至少两个时长值。其中，所述第一应用程序为所述至少两个应用程序中优先级高的应用程序；或，在所述至少两个应用程序中，所述第一应用程序所属的应用类型对应的至少两个时长值中的最大值，不小于其他应用程序所属的应用类型对应的至少两个时长值中的最大值。
上述设计方案中，当前台运行的应用程序不止一个时，可以根据前台运行的多个应用程序中优先级最高的应用程序所对应的至少两个时长值，设置第一定时器的定时时长，这样在节省终端功耗的同时，可以优先保证优先级高的应用程序的数据传输。
在一种可能的设计中，所述至少两个时长值按照从大到小或者从小到大的顺序排列，且相邻的两个时长值中，取值大的时长值是取值小的时长值的α倍，α为大于1的固定值。于上述不同时长值间的倍数关系，在调整所述第一定时器的计时时长的取值时，可以实现逐渐增大或逐渐降低，避免调整幅度过大。
在一种可能的设计中，所述至少两个时长值中的最大值小于或等于所述网络设备上配置的非活动定时器的定时时长，这样可以使得第一定时器的定时时长的调整范围最大达到网络设备上默认配置的非活动定时器的定时时长，使得终端的行为不会与网络设备的行为存在冲突。
在一种可能的设计中，所述方法还包括：根据前台运行的应用程序所属的应用类型，获取与所述应用类型对应的所述第一门限和所述第二门限；或者，获取通用的所述第一门限和所述第二门限。
上述设计方案中，根据前台运行的应用程序所属的应用类型，获取与所述应用类型对应的所述第一门限和所述第二门限，从而将获取到的第一门限和第二门限用于对是否调整所述第一定时器的定时时长进行判断，使得RRC连接释放控制操作与前台运行的应用程序所属的应用类型相适应，从而降低终端的功耗。
在一种可能的设计中，所述方法还包括：若根据前台运行的应用程序所属的应用类型，未获取与所述应用类型对应的所述第一门限和所述第二门限，则获取所述通用的第一门限和第二门限，以用于对是否需要调整第一定时器的定时时长进行判断，从而可以在上述情况下，依然可以实现第一定时器的计时时长动态可调。
在一种可能的设计中，若前台运行的应用程序包括至少两个应用程序，则所述根据前台运行的应用程序所属的应用类型，获取与所述应用类型对应的所述第一门限和所述第二门限，包括：
根据第一应用程序所属的应用类型，获取与所述应用类型对应的所述第一门限和所述第二门限；
其中，所述第一应用程序为所述至少两个应用程序中优先级高的应用程序；或，在所 述至少两个应用程序中，所述第一应用程序所属的应用类型对应的至少两个时长值中的最大值，不小于其他应用程序所属的应用类型对应的至少两个时长值中的最大值。
上述设计方案中，当前台运行的应用程序不止一个时，可以根据前台运行的多个应用程序中优先级最高的应用程序所对应的第一门限和第二门限，对第一定时器的定时时长进行调整，这样在节省终端功耗的同时，可以优先保证优先级高的应用程序的数据传输。
在一种可能的设计中，所述方法还包括：
对统计时长内第一应用程序在前台运行时的数据传输进行统计，得到数据包间隔分布特性，所述数据包间隔分布特性用于表征数据包疏密程度；
生成N组候选时长，每组所述候选时长包括至少两个时长值，N为大于或等于1的整数；
根据所述数据包间隔分布特性，确定M组候选门限，所述M组候选门限中的每组候选门限中包括第一门限和第二门限，M为大于或等于1的整数；
分别将所述N组候选时长与所述M组候选门限进行组合，得到K个候选组合，每个所述候选组合包括一组候选时长以及一组候选门限，K为大于或等于2的整数；
基于所述数据包间隔分布特性，分别采用所述K个候选组合中的每个候选组合，模拟对所述第一定时器的计时时长进行调整，得到每个候选组合对应的RRC连接释放统计结果；
根据每个候选组合对应的RRC连接释放统计结果，选取最优候选组合，得到所述第一应用程序所属的应用类型对应的至少两个时长值以及所述第一应用程序所属的应用类型对应的所述第一门限和所述第二门限。
上述设计方案中，基于统计长内第一应用程序作为前台应用程序运行时的传输数据作为样本数据，获得数据包间隔分布特性，将N组候选时长与M组候选门限进行组合，针对组合得到的每个候选组合，根据所述数据包间隔分布特性，模拟对所述第一定时器的计时时长进行调整，得到每个候选组合对应的RRC连接释放统计结果，从而得到最优组合，进而得到所述第一应用程序所属的应用类型对应的一组时长和一组门限，使得所述第一应用程序或第一应用程序所属的应用类型对应的至少两个时长值以及第一门限和第二门限，与所述第一应用程序的数据包间隔分布特性相适应。
在一种可能的设计中，所述根据每个候选组合对应的RRC连接释放统计结果，选取最优候选组合，包括：
根据每个候选组合对应的RRC连接释放时长和处于RRC非连接态下的时长，确定每个候选组合对应的误释放率以及RRC非连接态时长占所述统计时长的占比，所述误释放率用于表示误释放次数占随机接入次数的占比；
从所述K个候选组合中选取第一候选组合，所述第一候选组合对应的误释放率小于设定阈值，且RRC非连接态时长占所述统计时长的占比最大。
上述设计方案中，由于最优候选组合对应的误释放率小于设定阈值，以及RRC非连接态时长占所述统计时长的占比最大，因此使得在同等条件下，采用所述最优候选组合对RRC连接释放进行控制，其节省功耗的效果不低于其他候选组合。
在一种可能的设计中，所述方法还包括：
对统计时长内第一应用程序在前台运行时的数据传输进行统计，得到数据包间隔分布特性，所述数据包间隔分布特性用于表征数据包疏密程度；
生成N组候选时长，每组所述候选时长包括至少两个时长值，N为大于或等于1的整数；
根据所述数据包间隔分布特性，确定M组候选门限，所述M组候选门限中的每组候选门限中包括第一门限和第二门限，M为大于或等于1的整数；
分别将所述N组候选时长与所述M组候选门限进行组合，得到K个候选组合，每个所述候选组合包括一组候选时长以及一组候选门限，K为大于或等于2的整数；
根据所述数据包间隔分布特性以及每个候选组合，分别确定每个候选组合对应的马尔科夫状态转移概率矩阵；
根据每个候选组合对应的马尔科夫状态转移概率矩阵，确定用于评价最优候选组合的目标函数的值，所述目标函数的值用于指示在所述统计时长内所述终端处于RRC连接态或RRC非连接态下的时长；
根据每个候选组合对应的目标函数的值确定最优的候选组合，得到所述第一应用程序所属的应用类型对应的至少两个时长值以及所述第一应用程序所述的应用类型对应的所述第一门限和所述第二门限。
上述设计方案中，基于统计长内第一应用程序作为前台应用程序运行时的传输数据作为样本数据，获得数据包间隔分布特性，将N组候选时长与M组候选门限进行组合，针对组合得到的每个候选组合，根据所述数据包间隔分布特性，分别确定每个候选组合对应的马尔科夫状态转移概率矩阵，并根据每个候选组合对应的马尔科夫状态转移概率矩阵，确定用于评价最优候选组合的目标函数的值，从而得到最优组合，进而得到所述第一应用程序所属的应用类型对应的一组时长和一组门限，使得所述第一应用程序或第一应用程序所属的应用类型对应的至少两个时长值以及第一门限和第二门限，与所述第一应用程序的数据包间隔分布特性相适应。
在一种可能的设计中，所述生成N组候选时长，包括：根据预设规则，生成所述N组候选时长。
在一种可能的设计中，所述对所述终端的第一定时器的定时时长进行调整，包括：
所述终端的第一模块向所述终端的第二模块发送指令，所述指令中携带用于指示所述第一定时器的定时时长的指示信息；
所述第二模块根据所述指示信息设置所述第一定时器的定时时长。
可选地，所述第一模块为应用处理器，所述第二模块为调制解调器。
上述设计方案中，通过应用处理器向调制解调器发送指令以实现第一定时器的计时时长的设置，在技术实现上简单易行，与终端的硬件架构相适应。
在一种可能的设计中，所述指示信息中还携带用于指示RRC连接释放后终端进入空闲态或非激活态的指示信息。由于应用处理器发送给调制解调器的指令中还可以携带用于指示RRC连接释放后终端进入空闲态或非激活态的指示信息，因此可以根据情况使得终端在释放RRC连接后进入空闲态或非激活态，提高了系统灵活性。
在一种可能的设计中，所述统计结果，包括以下至少一项：
接收到的数据包的个数；
接收到的数据的数据量；
接收到的数据的吞吐率；
接收到的数据的比特率。
上述设计方案中，上述对数据传输进行统计得到的统计结果均能够反映数据传输的疏密程度，基于上述统计结果进行第一定时器计时时长和设置或调整，可以使得第一定时器的定时时长与数据传输的疏密程度相适应，从而可以减少或避免过于频繁的RRC连接释放而导致过多的随机接入过程，或者可以减少或避免长时间没有数据传输但未及时释放RRC连接，进而可以节省终端功耗。
第五方面，提供一种RRC连接释放控制方法，包括：
当第一应用程序运行到前台时，确定所述第一应用程序对应的第一时长值；
将终端的第一定时器的计时时长设置为所述第一时长值，所述第一定时器为所述终端处于RRC连接态下使用的定时器，在所述第一定时器的计时超过所述计时时长时，所述终端进入RRC非连接态。
其中，所述第一定时器只要接收到一个数据包，则该第一定时器复位，即重新开始计时。
上述设计方案中，当第一应用程序运行到前台时，将终端的第一定时器的计时时长设置为第一应用程序对应的第一定时时长值，在所述第一定时器的计时超过所述计时时长时，所述终端请求网络设备释放所述终端的RRC连接，从而基于该第一定时器对RRC连接释放进行控制。由于第一定时器的计时时长值为前台应用程序对应的时长值，使得第一定时器的计时时长与前台运行的应用程序相适应，从而可以根据该第一应用程序的数据传输情况，对RRC连接释放进行控制，进而可以节省终端的功耗。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一应用程序运行到前台时，确定所述第一应用程序对应的第一时长值，包括：确定所述第一应用程序所属的应用类型对应的第一时长值。
在一种可能的设计中，所述确定所述第一应用程序所属的应用类型对应的第一时长值，包括：
若所述第一应用程序所属的应用类型为第一应用类型，则所述第一时长值为所述第一应用类型对应的时长值；
若所述第一应用程序所属的应用类型为与所述第一应用类型不同的第二应用类型，则所述第一时长值为所述第二应用类型对应的时长值，所述第二应用类型对应的时长值与所述第一类型对应的时长值相同或不同。
在一种可能的设计中，所述将终端的第一定时器的计时时长设置为所述第一时长值，包括：所述终端的第一模块向所述终端的第二模块发送第一指令，所述第一指令中携带用于指示所述第一时长值的指示信息；所述第二模块根据所述指示信息将所述终端的第一定时器的计时时长设置为所述第一时长值。其中，所述第一模块为应用处理器，所述第二模块为调制解调器。
在一种可能的设计中，在所述将终端的第一定时器的计时时长设置为所述第一时长值之后，所述方法还包括：当所述终端的第一定时器的计时时长超过所述第一时长值时，所述终端的第一模块向所述终端的第二模块发送第二指令，所述第二指令用于指示所述第二模块向所述网络设备请求释放所述RRC连接。其中，所述第一模块为应用处理器，所述第二模块为调制解调器。
在一种可能的设计中，所述方法还包括：在满足以下至少一个条件时，所述第一定时器复位：
所述终端接收到下行数据；
所述终端接收到下行信令；
所述终端发送上行数据；
所述终端发送上行信令。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一应用程序所属的应用类型对应至少两个时长值；所述将终端的第一定时器的定时时长设置为所述第一时长值，包括：将所述第一定时器的计时时长设置为所述至少两个时长值中的所述第一时长值。
在一种可能的设计中，所述方法还包括：所述终端进入RRC连接态；
在所述将终端的第一定时器的计时时长设置为所述第一时长值之后，所述方法还包括：
对所述终端处于所述RRC连接态下的数据传输进行统计，获得统计结果；
基于所述统计结果，对所述第一定时器的计时时长进行调整。
在一种可能的设计中，所述基于所述统计结果，对所述第一定时器的计时时长进行调整，包括：如果所述统计结果大于第一门限，将所述第一定时器的计时时长由所述第一时长值增大为第二时长值；当所述第一定时器的计时超过所述定时时长时，向网络设备请求释放RRC连接；若所述统计结果小于第二门限，则将所述第一定时器的定时时长由所述第一时长值降低为第三时长值，其中，所述第二门限小于或等于所述第一门限。
在一种可能的设计中，若所述统计结果小于第二门限，则将所述第一定时器的计时时长由所述第一时长值降低为第三时长值之后，所述方法还包括：所述终端重新进入RRC连接态，所述第一定时器的计时时长为所述第三时长值。
在一种可能的设计中，在所述终端重新进入RRC连接态之后，所述方法还包括：
对所述终端处于RRC连接态下的数据传输进行统计，获得统计结果；
若所述统计结果大于所述第一门限，将所述第一定时器的计时时长由所述第三时长值增大为所述第一时长值；
当所述第一定时器的计时时长超过所述第三时长值时，向网络设备请求释放RRC连接；若所述统计结果小于所述第二门限，则将所述第一定时器的定时时长由所述第三时长值降低为第四时长值。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一应用程序保持运行在前台。
在一种可能的设计中，在所述将终端的第一定时器的定时时长设置为所述第一时长值之后，所述方法还包括：
检测到所述第一应用程序被关闭或者切换到后台的操作；
判断是否有运行在前台的应用程序；
如果没有运行到前台的应用程序，保持所述第一定时器的计时时长为所述第一时长值；
如果有运行到前台的应用程序，将所述第一定时器的计时时长设置为所述运行到前台的应用程序所对应的时长值。
在一种可能的设计中，在第一时间，所述第一时长值的取值为第一值；在第二时间，所述第一时长值的取值为第二值，所述第一值与所述第二值不同。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一应用程序所属的应用类型对应至少两个时长值，所述第一时长值为所述至少两个时长值中的最大值；和/或，所述第一时长值小于或等于网络设备上配置的非活动定时器的计时时长。
第六方面，提供一种通信装置，所述通信装置包括至少一个处理器，所述至少一个处理器与存储器相连，所述至少一个处理器用于读取并执行所述存储器中存储的程序，以使 得所述装置执行如上述第一方面、第二方面、第三方面、第四方面以及第五方面中任一项、或本发明任一实施例所述的方法。
第七方面，提供一种芯片，所述芯片与存储器耦合，用于读取并执行所述存储器中存储的程序指令，以实现如上述第一方面、第二方面、第三方面、第四方面以及第五方面中任一项、或本发明任一实施例所述的方法。
第八方面，提供一种计算机可读存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机指令，当所述指令在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行如上述第一方面、第二方面、第三方面、第四方面以及第五方面中任一项、或者本发明任一实施例所述的方法。
第九方面，提供一种计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品在被计算机调用时，使得计算机执行如上述第一方面、第二方面、第三方面、第四方面以及第五方面中任一项或者本发明任一实施例所述的方法。
附图说明
图1为本申请实施例提供的一种网络架构示意图；
图2为本申请实施例中的终端的结构示意图；
图3为本申请实施例中应用处理器(AP)与调制解调器(modem)配合的示意图；
图4为本申请实施例中的终端的软件架构示意图；
图5为本申请实施例提供的RRC连接释放控制方法的信令交互示意图；
图6a为本申请实施例中设置一个候选RRC连接释放定时器时长集合情况下的RRC连接释放定时器调整流程；
图6b为本申请实施例中针对不同应用程序分别设置候选RRC连接释放定时器时长集合情况下的RRC连接释放定时器调整流程；
图7为本申请实施例中的RRC释放时间的马尔科夫模型状态转移的示意图；
图8为本申请实施例中在线学习方法的流程示意图；
图9为本申请实施例中在线学习方法的原理示意图；
图10a为本申请实施例中的一种包间隔CDF曲线示意图；
图10b为本申请实施例中的一种包个数CDF曲线示意图；
图11a为本申请实施例中的一种包间隔CDF曲线示意图；
图11b为本申请实施例中的一种包个数CDF曲线示意图；
图12为本申请实施例中的一种离线学习方法的流程示意图。
具体实施方式
为了使本申请实施例的目的、技术方案和优点更加清楚，下面将结合附图对本申请实施例作进一步的详细描述。应理解，本申请的说明书实施例和权利要求书及上述附图中的术语“第一”、“第二”等是用于区别类似的对象，而不必用于描述特定的顺序或先后次序。此外，术语“包括”和“具有”以及他们的任何变形，意图在于覆盖不排他的包含，例如，包含了一系列步骤或单元。方法、系统、产品或设备不必限于清楚地列出的那些步骤或单元，而是可包括没有清楚地列出的或对于这些过程、方法、产品或设备固有的其它步骤或单元。
以下，对本申请实施例中的部分用语进行解释说明，以便于本领域技术人员理解。
(1)数据包。
数据包可以是终端中安装的任意一个应用程序(application，APP，也称应用)在被启动后，访问对应的应用服务器时，生成并发送到对应的应用服务器的数据包。这里的APP可以是相机应用程序、即时消息收发应用程序(如
Figure PCTCN2021121401-appb-000001
)、互联网短视频应用程序(如
Figure PCTCN2021121401-appb-000002
Figure PCTCN2021121401-appb-000003
)、互联网长视频应用程序(如
Figure PCTCN2021121401-appb-000004
)、网页浏览应用程序、游戏等。这些应用程序可以是终端出厂前预装的应用程序，也可以是终端从网络侧下载并安装的应用程序，或者是终端接收其它终端发送的应用程序，本申请实施例不作限定。
(2)前台应用程序和后台应用程序。
前台应用程序一般指：与用户正在交互的屏幕上运行一个Activity活动窗口或者是某个服务绑定到用户正在交互的Activity上，如通知侦听器或语音文本服务，除此以外的都是后台应用程序。后台应用程序可能在运行并且接收数据，比如若将
Figure PCTCN2021121401-appb-000005
切换到后台，该应用程序还可以收消息，再比如还有一些后台运行的新闻广告类应用程序，也可能会有推送消息。
一般情况下，终端上仅存在一个前台应用程序。在一些情况下，终端上也可能存在多个前台应用程序，比如对于支持分屏功能的终端，在开启分屏模式的情况下，终端的屏幕上可同时显示两个或两个以上的分屏窗口，每个分屏窗口可以运行一个应用程序，比如第一分屏窗口中运行视频类应用程序，第二分屏窗口中运行社交类应用程序，使得用户可以在观看视频类应用程序的视频窗口播放的视频的同时，在社交类应用程序的用户界面进行聊天，这种情况下，第一分屏窗口运行的视频类应用程序和第二分屏窗口运行的社交类应用均为前台应用程序。
(3)对应用程序行为或状态的监听机制。
终端中的应用处理器可以监听应用程序的启动。当应用程序启动时，应用程序会向应用处理器的应用程序框架层发送注册信息，应用处理器监听到应用程序启动事件后，可调用函数topActivity.getPackageName()，根据该函数的返回值获得前台应用程序的应用程序名称。另一种监听应用程序启动的方法是，应用处理器调用UsageStatsManager中的queryUsageStats方法，该方法可将某个时间段内用过的应用程序的信息以一个列表的方式返回，该列表中包括每个应用程序的mLastTimeUsed(最后使用的时间)和mPackageName(应用程序名称)，其中最后使用时间最晚的一个应用程序名称即为最新启动的应用程序。当然，应用处理器也可以通过其他方式获得被启动的应用程序的名称，本申请实施例对此不做限制。
应用处理器还可以监听应用程序的切换行为。应用处理器可以通过监听应用程序中的Activity的生命周期，实现对该应用程序生命周期的监听，进而实现对应用程序切换行为的监听。举例来说，以Activity A和Activity B为例，当Activity A进入前台时其生命周期变化为：A.onStart()，A.onResume()；当从Activity A切换到Activity B时，Activity A和Activity B的生命周期变化为：A.onPause()，B.onStart()，B.onResume()，A.onStop()。可以看出，onResume和onPause是一组，两个Activity之间是顺序调用，onStart和onStop是一组，两个Activity之间是交叉调用。利用该特性，应用处理器可使用一个全局计数器来对一个应用程序进行统计，在该应用程序的所有Activity.onStart()中计数器+1，在所有Activity.onStop()中计数器-1。当一个应用程序对应的计数器计数值大于0，说明该应用在前台；当一个应用程序对应的计数器的计数值等于0，说明该应用在后台。计数器从1 变成0，说明相应应用程序从前台进入后台；计数器从0变成1，说明相应应用程序从后台进入前台。当然，应用处理器也可以通过其他方式判断应用程序是否发生了前后台切换，本申请实施例对此不做限制。
应用处理器还可以监听分屏操作，当用户通过手势等方式进行分屏时，应用处理器可接收到该分屏事件，并可以进一步的，通过调用函数topActivity.getPackageName()获得分屏窗口中的应用程序的名称。
(4)第一定时器。
本申请实施例中，终端上可配置定时器，这里称为第一定时器，应理解，本申请实施例对该定时器的命名不做限制，比如可将第一定时器命名为RRC连接释放定时器。本申请的一些实施例中，将第一定时器称为RRC连接释放定时器，应理解，第一定时器和RRC连接释放定时器具有相同含义。
该第一定时器是该终端处于RRC连接态下使用的定时器。在该第一定时器超时时，终端请求网络设备释放该终端的RRC连接。
其中，第一定时器超时，可被理解为第一定时器的计时值超过定时时长，即，本申请实施例中，第一定时器的计时值超过定时时长，以及第一定时器超时，具有相同含义。
该第一定时器可按照定时时长进行倒计时，在满足以下至少一个条件时，该第一定时器复位：
终端接收到下行数据；
终端接收到下行信令；
终端发送上行数据；
终端发送上行信令。
其中，终端与网络设备交互的数据包含终端的应用程序关联的数据，例如：终端针对应用程序产生的操作数据、通过应用程序向网络设备发送的数据、网络设备向终端发送的应用程序关联的数据等等。该应用程序可以为前台应用或者后台应用。
终端与网络设备交互的信令例如包括：小区的重选、切换、重定向等信令。
比如，第一定时器的计时时长为8秒，第一定时器从8秒开始倒计时，当倒计时到5秒时，终端接收到下行数据，则该第一定时器被复位，即重新从8秒开始倒计时，即每次接收到下行数据或下行信令，都会触发第一定时器重新开始倒计时。当第一定时器倒计时到0时，该第一RRC定时器超时。
本申请实施例中，在不特别声明的情况下，RRC连接释放定时器是指终端中配置的RRC连接释放定时器，即第一定时器。另外需要说明的是，本申请实施例中，设置第一定时器的定时时长、设置第一定时器的计时时长、设置第一定时器的定时时长/计时时长的取值，或者类似表达，具有相同含义。
基于上述的术语解释，图1示例性示出了本申请可以应用到的一种通信系统架构示意图，该通信系统可以包括网络设备和终端。图1中以包括一个网络设备101和一个终端100为例说明。其中，网络设备101可通过无线的方式与终端100进行通信，主要是利用Uu空口传输。
网络设备101，例如包括接入网(access network，AN)设备，又可称为无线接入网设备，用于将终端接入到无线网络中的设备。例如基站(例如，接入点)，可以是指接入网中在空口通过一个或多个小区与无线终端通信的设备。示例性地，接入网设备可以包括LTE 系统或高级长期演进(long term evolution-advanced，LTE-A)中的演进型基站(NodeB或eNB或e-NodeB，evolutional Node B)，或者也可以包括第五代移动通信技术(the 5th generation，5G)NR系统中的下一代节点B(next generation node B，gNB)、传输接收节点(transmission reception point，TRP)(也称为收发节点)、基带处理单元(building base band unit，BBU)和射频单元(Radio Remote Unit，RRU)、BBU与有源天线单元(active antenna unit，AAU)，或者也可以包括云接入网(cloud radio access network，Cloud RAN)系统中的集中式单元(centralized unit，CU)和分布式单元(distributed unit，DU)，或者也可以包括无线保真(wireless fidelity，Wi-Fi)系统中的接入点、或者还可以包括无线网络控制器(radio network controller，RNC)、网络设备控制器(base station controller，BSC)、网络设备收发台(base transceiver station，BTS)、家庭网络设备(例如，home evolved NodeB，或Home Node B，HNB)，或者也可以包括未来通信网络中的基站、小站、微站等。本申请实施例并不限定。
终端100可以是手机、平板电脑、笔记本计算机或具备无线通讯功能的可穿戴设备(如智能手表或智能眼镜等)等。该终端的示例性实施例包括但不限于搭载
Figure PCTCN2021121401-appb-000006
Figure PCTCN2021121401-appb-000007
或者其它操作系统的设备。上述终端也可以是其它便携式设备，只要该便携式设备可以动态调整RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长即可。还应当理解的是，在本申请其他一些实施例中，上述终端也可以不是便携式设备，而是可以实现上述功能的台式计算机。
本申请实施例中，通信系统可以是长期演进(long term evolution，LTE)系统，5G通信系统，例如新空口(new radio，NR)系统、多种通信技术融合的通信系统(例如LTE技术和NR技术融合的通信系统)，还可以是其他通信系统，例如公共陆地移动网络(public land mobile network，PLMN)系统，或未来可能出现的其他通信系统等，本申请不做限定。
示例性地，如图2所示，为终端100的一种可能结构示意图。终端100可以包括处理器110，外部存储器接口120，内部存储器121，通用串行总线(universal serial bus，USB)接口130，充电管理模块140，电源管理模块141，电池142，天线1，天线2，移动通信模块151，无线通信模块152，音频模块170，扬声器170A，受话器170B，麦克风170C，耳机接口170D，传感器模块180，按键190，马达191，指示器192，摄像头193，显示屏194，以及用户标识模块(subscriber identification module，SIM)卡接口195等。其中传感器模块180可以包括陀螺仪传感器180A，加速度传感器180B，指纹传感器180H，温度传感器180J，触摸传感器180K(当然，终端100还可以包括其它传感器，比如压力传感器、加速度传感器、陀螺仪传感器、环境光传感器、骨传导传感器等，图中未示出)。
可以理解的是，本申请实施例示意的结构并不构成对终端100的具体限定。在本申请另一些实施例中，终端100可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件，或者组合某些部件，或者拆分某些部件，或者不同的部件布置。图示的部件可以以硬件，软件或软件和硬件的组合实现。
其中，处理器110可以包括一个或多个处理单元，例如：处理器110可以包括应用处理器(application processor，AP)，调制解调器，图形处理器(graphics processing unit，GPU)，图像信号处理器(image signal processor，ISP)，控制器，存储器，视频编解码器，数字信号处理器(digital signal processor，DSP)，基带处理器，和/或神经网络处理器(neural-network processing unit，NPU)等。其中，不同的处理单元可以是独立的器件，也可以集成在一个或多个处理器中。其中，控制器可以是终端100的神经中枢和指挥中心。控制器可以根据指 令操作码和时序信号，产生操作控制信号，完成取指令和执行指令的控制。
在一些实施例中，处理器110中还可以设置存储器，用于存储指令和数据。示例性地，处理器110中的存储器可以为高速缓冲存储器。该存储器可以保存处理器110刚用过或循环使用的指令或数据。如果处理器110需要再次使用该指令或数据，可从存储器中直接调用。避免了重复存取，减少了处理器110的等待时间，因而提高了系统的效率。
内部存储器121可以用于存储一个或多个计算机程序，该一个或多个计算机程序包括指令。处理器110通过运行存储在内部存储器121的指令，从而执行终端100的各种功能应用以及数据处理。内部存储器121可以包括存储程序区和存储数据区。其中，存储程序区可存储操作系统，应用程序的代码等。存储数据区可存储终端100使用过程中记录的数据传输的统计结果、门限(用于判断是否满足调整RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长的条件)等。
此外，内部存储器121可以包括高速随机存取存储器，还可以包括非易失性存储器，例如一个或多个磁盘存储器件，闪存器件，通用闪存存储器(universal flash storage，UFS)等。在一些实施例中，处理器110可以通过运行存储在内部存储器121的指令，和/或存储在设置于处理器110中的存储器的指令，来使得终端100执行本申请实施例提供的RRC连接释放控制方法。
当然，本申请实施例提供的RRC连接释放控制方法的代码、以及数据传输的统计结果等信息还可以存储在外部存储器中。这种情况下，处理器110可以通过外部存储器接口120运行存储在外部存储器中的释放无线资源控制连接的代码。
外部存储器接口120可以用于连接外部存储卡(例如，Micro SD卡)，实现扩展终端100的存储能力。外部存储卡通过外部存储器接口120与处理器110通信，实现数据存储功能。例如将终端进行数据传输统计所得到的统计结果等信息保存在外部存储卡中。
终端100的无线通信功能可以通过天线1，天线2，移动通信模块151，无线通信模块152，调制解调处理器以及基带处理器等实现。
天线1和天线2用于发射和接收电磁波信号。终端100中的每个天线可用于覆盖单个或多个通信频带。不同的天线还可以复用，以提高天线的利用率。例如：可以将天线1复用为无线局域网的分集天线。在另外一些实施例中，天线可以和调谐开关结合使用。
移动通信模块151可以提供应用在终端100上的包括2G/3G/4G/5G等无线通信的解决方案。移动通信模块151可以包括至少一个滤波器，开关，功率放大器，低噪声放大器(low noise amplifier，LNA)等。移动通信模块151可以由天线1接收电磁波，并对接收的电磁波进行滤波，放大等处理，传送至调制解调处理器进行解调。移动通信模块151还可以对经调制解调处理器调制后的信号放大，经天线1转为电磁波辐射出去。在一些实施例中，移动通信模块151的至少部分功能模块可以被设置于处理器110中。在一些实施例中，移动通信模块151的至少部分功能模块可以与处理器110的至少部分模块被设置在同一个器件中。
调制解调处理器可以包括调制器和解调器。其中，调制器用于将待发送的低频基带信号调制成中高频信号。解调器用于将接收的电磁波信号解调为低频基带信号。随后解调器将解调得到的低频基带信号传送至基带处理器处理。低频基带信号经基带处理器处理后，被传递给应用处理器。应用处理器通过音频设备(不限于扬声器170A，受话器170B等)输出声音信号，或通过显示屏194显示图像或视频。在一些实施例中，调制解调处理器可以是独立的器件。在另一些实施例中，调制解调处理器可以独立于处理器110，与移动通信模块151或其他功能模块设置在同一个器件中。
无线通信模块152可以提供应用在终端100上的包括无线局域网(wireless local area networks，WLAN)(如无线保真(wireless fidelity，Wi-Fi)网络)，全球导航卫星系统(global navigation satellite system，GNSS)，等无线通信的解决方案。无线通信模块152可以是集成至少一个通信处理模块的一个或多个器件。无线通信模块152经由天线2接收电磁波，将电磁波信号调频以及滤波处理，将处理后的信号发送到处理器110。无线通信模块152还可以从处理器110接收待发送的信号(例如，用于指示网络设备释放RRC连接的指示信息)，对其进行调频，放大，经天线2转为电磁波辐射出去。
在一些实施例中，终端100的天线1和移动通信模块151耦合，天线2和无线通信模块152耦合，使得终端100可以与其他设备通信。
充电管理模块140用于从充电器接收充电输入。其中，充电器可以是无线充电器，也可以是有线充电器。在一些有线充电的实施例中，充电管理模块140可以通过USB接口130接收有线充电器的充电输入。在一些无线充电的实施例中，充电管理模块140可以通过终端100的无线充电线圈接收无线充电输入。充电管理模块140为电池142充电的同时，还可以通过电源管理模块141为终端100供电。
电源管理模块141用于连接电池142、充电管理模块140与处理器110。电源管理模块141接收电池142和/或充电管理模块141的输入，为处理器110、内部存储器121、外部存储器接口120、显示屏194、摄像头193等供电。电源管理模块141还可以用于监测电池容量、电池循环次数、电池健康状态(漏电、阻抗)等参数。在其他一些实施例中，电源管理模块141也可以设置于处理器110中。在另一些实施例中，电源管理模块141和充电管理模块140也可以设置于同一个器件中。
基于上述图2所示的终端，本申请实施例中，终端中的第一模块和终端中的第二模块可以相互配合，实现本申请实施例提供的RRC连接释放控制方法。
在一些实施例中，终端的第一模块可向终端的第二模块发送第一指令，该第一指令中携带用于指示RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长的指示信息；第二模块根据该指示信息将该终端的RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长设置为该计时时长的取值。
在另一些实施例中，若在RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长内，终端与网络设备不存在信息交互(比如不存在下行数据或信令的接收，或者不存在上行数据或信令的发送)，该终端的第一模块向该终端的第二模块发送第二指令，该第二指令用于指示第二模块向网络设备请求释放该终端的RRC连接。
其中，第一模块可以是应用处理器(AP)或其内部逻辑单元，还可以是其他的CPU、数字信号处理器(digital signal processor，DSP)或单片机等；第二模块可以是调制解调器(modem)或其内部逻辑单元。
以第一模块为应用处理器、第二模块为调制解调器为例，图3示例性示出了应用处理器(AP)和调制解调器(modem)相互配合以实现本申请实施例的示意图。
如图3所示，应用处理器(AP)对调制解调器(modem)解调后的数据进行统计，得到统计结果，并根据该统计结果判断是否需要对RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长进行调整，若判断需要调整，则向调制解调器发送指令，以指示调制解调器调整RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长。更具体的，应用处理器可将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长的目标值通过该指令发送给调制解调器，以使得调制解调器将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长调整为等于该目标值。调制解调器在RRC连接释放定时器超时的时候，请求网络侧释放 RRC连接。或者，应用处理器可以将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长的调整值发送给调制解调器，以使得调制解调器通过该调整值对RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长进行调整。
在另外一些实施例中，调制解调器对解调后的数据进行统计，得到统计结果，并根据统计结果判断是否需要对RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长进行调整，若判断需要调整，则调整RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长。调制解调器在RRC连接释放定时器超时的时候，请求网络侧释放RRC连接。可选的，应用处理器可将用于进行RRC连接释放定时器控制的计时时长的取值(该取值可能是一个也可能是多个)以及门限(该门限可能包括一个，也可能包括多个，比如包括第一门限和第二门限)配置给调制解调器，以使调制解调器可以根据该计时时长的取值以及门限进行RRC连接释放控制。
参见图4，为本申请实施例提供的终端的软件架构示意图。如图4所示，该软件架构从下层到上层可包括：硬件层、内核层、应用程序框架层和应用程序层。
硬件层，包括各种硬件电路结构。
内核层，为终端的各种硬件提供了底层的驱动(如显示，定位，音频，照相机，蓝牙，Wi-Fi，电源管理等)，其中与本申请实施例相关的驱动包括调制解调器驱动。
应用程序框架层，用于提供各种系统组件和应用程序组件，其中与本申请实施例相关的组件包括RRC控制组件，以实现RRC连接管理，比如包括RRC连接释放，RRC连接释放定时器的设置等。RRC控制组件可包含在调制解调器中。
应用程序层，包括各种应用程序，比如，视频应用程序、游戏等。
根据终端与网络设备间是否存在RRC连接，终端可被划分为非连接态模式(包括RRC空闲态和RRC非激活态)和连接模式(也称RRC连接态)：
(1)RRC非连接态(RRC-IDLE态或RRC INACTIVE态)，终端与网络之间无RRC连接，因此功耗较低；
(2)RRC连接(RRC-CONNECTED)态，终端与网络之间存在RRC连接，因此功耗较高。RRC连接可建立在专有物理信道上，此时终端处于专用信道(dedicated channel，DCH)状态，可以传输大量用户数据；RRC连接也可建立在共享信道上，此时终端处于前向接入信道(forward access channel，FACH)状态，终端在下行方向将继续监视FACH传输信道，在上行方向可以使用公共或共享传输信道(如随机接入信道(random access channel，RACH))进行少量用户数据的传输。
应该可以理解，可以用电流消耗来表示终端的功耗。
上述RRC-IDLE态和RRC-CONNECTED态之间可以发生切换。RRC-IDLE态下，终端需要进行数据包传输时，则通过发送RRC连接建立请求(RRC connection setup request)给网络设备请求建立RRC连接，RRC连接建立完成后进入RRC-CONNECTED态。RRC-CONNECTED态下，当用户数据传输完毕后，若在设定长时间内没有数据传输(即在设定时间内终端与网络设备间没有信息交互)时，则释放RRC连接，终端进入RRC-IDLE态或RRC INACTIVE态(也即：RRC非连接态)。
目前，在终端息屏场景下，若终端在息屏后的固定时长内没有接收到数据，则可请求释放RRC连接，例如在息屏后若1秒(当然息屏状态下RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长还可以为其他值，例如：2秒、3秒等，本申请实施例不作限制)内没有数据到达则终端请求网络设备释放RRC连接；在终端亮屏场景下，基站在基站侧配置的该终端对应的非活动定时器超时的时候，释放与该终端间的RRC连接，该非活动定时器的时长固定，比 如为10秒。
无论是息屏场景还是亮屏场景，用于控制RRC连接释放的计时时长都是固定的计时时长，这就可能因RRC连接释放时间过早或过晚而导致功耗较高。
比如，因RRC连接释放过早而导致终端功耗过高的一个场景是：终端在息屏后的设定时长(比如1秒或2秒)内没有数据传输，则请求释放RRC连接，但在RRC连接释放后仍有数据包到达，则终端需要进行随机接入以重新建立RRC连接，以接收后续到达的数据。该场景中，由于RRC连接释放过早，导致终端需要发起随机接入，而随机接入过程会消耗较高功耗。
再比如，因RRC连接释放过晚而导致终端功耗过高的一个场景是：以网络设备上配置的非活动定时器的计时时长等于10秒为例，如果终端所处业务发送的数据包较稀疏，一个数据包达到后20秒后才有新的数据包发送，网络设备在收到一个数据包后，需要等至少10秒才释放该终端的RRC连接，而这段时间内终端处于RRC连接态，产生较高功耗。
基于上述存在的问题，本申请实施例提供一种RRC连接释放控制方法及装置，用以对终端的计时时长进行设置，以基于该计时时长对RRC连接释放进行控制。其中，所述计时时长用于对终端的RRC连接释放进行控制。
在一些实施例中，终端中可配置第一计时器(以下称为RRC连接释放定时器)，可通过设置或调整该RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长，使得该RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长动态可调，实现对RRC连接释放进行控制，从而降低终端的功耗。
其中，方法和装置是基于同一发明构思的，由于方法及装置解决问题的原理相似，因此装置与方法的实施可以相互参见，重复之处不再赘述。
参阅图5，为本申请实施例提供的RRC连接释放控制方法的信令交互示意图。该方法可应用于图1所示的网络架构，当然也可应用于除此之外的网络架构，本申请对此不做限定。
如图5所示，在S510，终端确定计时时长，该计时时长用于对RRC连接释放进行控制。
在一些实施例中，该步骤中，终端可设置RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长。
在S520，当基于所述计时时长判定满足RRC连接释放条件时，终端请求网络设备释放RRC连接。
具体地，终端判断在所述计时时长内，该终端与网络设备释放存在信息交互，若不存在信息交互，则满足RRC连接释放条件，终端请求网络设备释放该终端的RRC连接。
在一些实施例中，若终端配置有RRC连接释放定时器，则当该RRC连接释放定时器超时时，表明满足RRC连接释放条件，因此终端请求网络设备释放该终端的RRC连接。
其中，所述信息交互包含以下至少一种情况：
终端接收到网络设备发送的下行数据；
终端接收到网络设备发送的下行信令；
终端向网络设备发送上行数据；
终端向网络设备发送上行信令。
其中，在RRC连接释放定时器运行期间，如果终端与网络设备存在上述信息交互，则RRC连接释放定时器复位。
进一步的，若在所述计时时长内，终端与网络设备存在信息交互，则终端以发生所述信息交互的时间为起始点，重新执行以下步骤：判断在所述计时时长内，所述终端与网络设备是否存在信息交互，若不存在所述信息交互，所述终端请求所述网络设备释放该终端的RRC连接。如果终端中配置有RRC连接释放定时器，则当终端与网络设备发生上述信息交互时，RRC连接释放定时器被复位，RRC连接释放定时器复位后重新开始计时，当RRC连接释放定时器超时时，终端请求网络设备释放该终端的RRC连接。
可选的，在S520中，终端可向网络设备发送RRC连接释放请求，以请求网络设备释放与该终端的RRC连接。其中，所述RRC连接释放请求是指携带有RRC连接释放指示信息的信令，如新空口(new radio，NR)中终端向基站发送的辅助信息(UEAssistanceInformation)消息中携带的ReleasePreference-r16::＝SEQUENCE{preferredRRC-State-r16 ENUMERATED{idle,inactive,connected,outOfConnected}}，表示终端请求的状态，当preferredRRC-State-r16为idle或inactive态时，表示终端请求释放RRC连接。本申请对该信令的命名不做限制。
网络设备在接收到终端释放RRC连接的请求后，可以根据数据传输的需要，确定是否释放与该终端间的RRC连接，比如，如果网络设备没有数据需要发送给该终端，则可以根据该终端的请求释放RRC连接，否则网络设备可以保持与该终端间的RRC连接以进行下行数据的发送。
本申请的一些实施例中，在S510中，当终端的第一应用程序运行在前台期间，该终端确定该第一应用程序对应的计时时长。
其中，终端可响应于第一操作，确定前台运行的第一应用程序对应的计时时长。进一步的，如果终端上配置有RRC连接释放定时器，则终端设置该RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长为确定出的计时时长。
其中，“第一应用程序”并不限定于特定的应用程序或者特定类型的应用程序，该表述方式仅为了描述清楚。本申请实施例对应用类型划分方式不做限制，比如，应用类型可包括：互联网长视频应用程序、互联网短视频应用程序、网页新闻类应用程序、游戏应用程序等。比如，所述第一应用程序可以是互联网长视频应用程序、互联网短视频应用程序、游戏或社交类应用程序等。
所述第一操作可以是第一应用程序被启动的操作，比如用户通过屏幕触控操作(如点击手机主页面中的应用程序图标)开启第一应用程序；再比如第一应用程序也可以是被其他应用程序启动。所述第一操作还可以是第一应用程序从后台切换到前台的操作，比如用户通过屏幕触控操作将后台运行的第一应用程序切换到前台运行。
应用处理器可以监听到上述第一操作，从而对该第一操作进行响应，以使得该第一应用在前台运行。比如，当应用处理器监听到第一应用程序被启动的第一操作后，可控制第一应用程序运行到前台，具体地，可设置第一应用程序的状态为运行状态(如Resume()状态)，并在终端的屏幕上显示第一应用程序的用户界面。
本申请的一些实施例中，终端中针对第一应用程序所属的应用程序类型配置有计时时长，使得终端可以在确定第一应用程序所属的应用类型后，获取该应用类型对应的计时时长。进一步的，如果终端中配置有RRC连接释放定时器，则终端可将终端的RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长设置为该计时时长。通过设置RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长，使得RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长可与前台运行的应用程序所属的应用类型相适应，从 而可以根据该第一应用程序的数据传输情况，对RRC连接释放进行控制，进而可以节省终端的功耗。
本申请的一些实施例中，所述计时时长小于或等于网络设备上配置的非活动定时器的计时时长，这样可以使得RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长调整范围最大达到网络设备上默认配置的非活动定时器的计时时长，使得终端的性能(如功耗和/或时延)至少能与网络侧的性能持平。
本申请的一些实施例中，不同的应用类型所对应的计时时长可能相同也可能不同。举例来说，若第一应用程序所属的应用类型为第一应用类型(比如互联网长视频应用类型)，则所述计时时长为所述第一应用类型对应的计时时长；若第一应用程序所属的应用类型为与所述第一应用类型不同的第二应用类型(比如互联网短视频应用类型)，则所述计时时长为所述第二应用类型对应的计时时长，其中，所述第二应用类型对应的计时时长与所述第一类型对应的计时时长相同或不同。这样，可以用于控制RRC连接释放的定时时长或者RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长，与前台运行的应用程序所属的应用类型相适应。
在一些实施例中，第一应用程序或第一应用程序所属的应用类型对应的计时时长至少包括两个时长值，所述至少两个时长值中包括第一时长值；相应地，在第一应用程序在前台运行期间，可确定所述至少两个时长值中的第一时长值，作为用于RRC连接释放控制的计时时长的取值，进一步的，如果终端中配置有RRC连接释放定时器，则可将该RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长设置为该第一时长值。当然，在其他场景下，在第一应用程序在前台运行时，RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长也可能被设置为所述至少两个时长值中的其他时长值，从而可以提高RRC连接释放定时器设置的灵活性。
其中，所述至少两个时长值可存储为RRC连接释放定时器时长集合，当然也可被存储为其他形式或数据结构，本申请实施例对此不作限制。
其中，在一些实施例中，所述至少两个时长值中的第一时长值为所述至少两个时长值中的最大值，这样，当第一应用程序运行到前台后，将用于控制RRC连接释放的计时时长或RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长，设置为该第一应用程序或第一应用程序所属的应用类型所对应的至少两个时长值中的最大值，可以减少或避免RRC连接被过早释放的几率，这样，如果第一应用程序的数据收发较密集，则可以保证第一应用程序的数据收发，从而在保证第一应用程序的数据传输以及降低终端功耗之间得到兼顾。在另一些实施例中，所述第一时长值为所述至少两个时长中的最大值，且所述第一时长值小于或等于网络设备上配置的非活动定时器的计时时长。
在本申请的一些实施例中，在第一应用程序在前台运行期间，终端进入RRC连接态后，对终端处于RRC连接态下的数据传输进行统计，获得统计结果；并基于该统计结果，对用于RRC连接释放控制的计时时长进行调整。如果终端中设置有RRC连接释放定时器，则可基于该统计结果对RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长进行调整，从而使得RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长不再固定不变，而是可以动态可调，这样可以根据数据的传输情况来适应性调整RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长，使其能够与数据传输情况匹配，从而节省终端的功耗。
可选的，终端可在处于RRC非连接态下对上述用于RRC连接释放控制的计时时长或者RRC连接释放定时器进行调整，也可在RRC连接态下对上述用于RRC连接释放控制的计时时长或者RRC连接释放定时器进行调整，也可在RRC连接态下。
进一步的，在对所述计时时长的取值进行调整之后，终端继续判断在取值调整后的所述计时时长内，与所述网络设备是否存在信息交互；若不存在所述信息交互，则请求网络设备释放所述终端的RRC连接。如果终端中配置有RRC连接释放定时器，则在对所述RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长的取值进行调整之后，当RRC连接释放定时器超时时，表明在RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长内没有所述信息交互，则终端请求网络设备释放该终端的RRC连接。
终端处于RRC连接态且运行前台应用程序时，接收的数据主要为前台应用程序的数据，因此在本申请的一些实施例中，终端可以统计前台应用程序的数据传输统计结果。在一些场景下，终端处于RRC连接态时，后台应用程序也可能有少量数据传输，因此在本申请的一些实施例中，终端可以统计前台应用程序以及有数据传输的后台应用程序的数据传输统计结果。
其中，在一些场景中，前台应用程序的数量为一个，比如在终端处于全屏模式时，前台应用程序的数量为一个；在另一些场景中，前台应用程序的数量可能为多个，比如在终端处于分屏模式时，屏幕可被划分为多个分屏窗口，不同的分屏窗口中可以开启并运行不同的应用程序，在这种情况下，可以存在多个前台应用程序，终端统计的数据传输统计结果中包括这些前台应用程序的数据传输统计结果。
本申请实施例中，数据传输的统计结果可以用于表征数据传输的疏密程度。所述数据传输统计结果可以是针对终端接收的数据的统计结果，也可以是针对终端发送的数据的统计结果。终端可以根据接收数据的统计结果，对RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长进行动态调整，也可以根据发送数据的统计结果，对RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长进行动态调整。
本申请实施例中，对数据传输进行统计，可以理解为对数据传输量进行统计。可选的，在对下行数据进行数据传输统计的情况下，统计结果可包括以下中的至少一项：
(1)数据量，即接收到的数据的数据量。比如接收到的数据的字节数或比特数，本申请对数据量的度量单位不做限制。
(2)数据包个数，即接收到的数据包的个数。
(3)数据吞吐率，即接收到的数据的吞吐率。数据吞吐率是指一定时长内传输的数据的平均速率，比如接收数据的数据吞吐率可以用每秒接收的比特数(bits per second，bps)度量，举例来说，可将接收的数据的比特数除以统计时长(秒数)，得到当前时刻的数据吞吐率。
(4)比特率，即接收到的数据的比特率。比特率是指每秒传送的比特(bit)数。
(5)数据包间隔，比如平均两个接收数据包之间的间隔时间(秒)。
本申请实施例中，可将统计结果与门限相比，以确定是否满足调整上述计时时长或者调整RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长的条件，若确定满足该条件，则对上述计时时长的取值或者对RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长的取值进行调整，否则可保持上述计时时长或RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长的取值不变。
可选的，用于确定是否调整上述计时时长或调整RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长的门限，可包括第一门限和第二门限，其中，第一门限大于或等于第二门限。其中，第一门限和第二门限可存储为门限组，当然也可被存储为其他形式或数据结构，本申请实施例对此不作限制。
当终端处于RRC连接态，数据传输的统计结果达到(大于或等于)第一门限时，可增大上述计时时长的取值；当在上述计时时长内，终端与网络设备间不存在信息交互，若数据传输的统计结果小于或等于第二门限，则可降低该计时时长的取值。具体地，当判断在取值为第一时长值的上述计时时长内，终端与网络设备不存在所述信息交互后，若统计结果小于第二门限，则将上述计时时长的取值由第一时长值降低为第三时长值；或者，若统计结果大于第一门限，则将上述计时时长的取值由第一时长值增大为第二时长值；或者，当判断取值为第一时长值的上述计时时长内，终端与网络设备不存在所述信息交互后，若统计结果小于第二门限，则将上述计时时长的取值由第一时长值降低为第三时长值。
如果终端中配置有RRC连接释放定时器，则当终端处于RRC连接态，数据传输的统计结果达到(大于或等于)第一门限时，可增大RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长的取值；当RRC连接释放定时器超时时，若数据传输的统计结果小于或等于第二门限，则可降低RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长的取值。具体地，如果数据传输的统计结果大于第一门限，则将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长的取值由第一时长值增大为第二时长值；当RRC连接释放定时器的计时超过计时时长时，终端向网络设备请求释放RRC连接，若数据传输的统计结果小于第二门限，则将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长由第一时长值降低为第三时长值。
可选的，上述如果数据传输的统计结果大于第一门限，则将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长由第一时长值增大为第二时长值，可包括以下情况：
情况1：当RRC连接释放定时器超时时，若数据传输的统计结果大于第一门限，则将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长由第一时长值增大为第二时长值；
情况2：在终端处于所述RRC连接态时，如果数据传输统计结果大于第一门限，将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长由第一时长值增大为第二时长值。
进一步的，若所述统计结果小于第二门限，将上述计时时长(用于控制RRC连接释放的计时时长)从第一时长值降低为第三时长值之后，终端重新进入RRC连接态；终端判断在取值为第三计时时长值的计时时长内，该终端与网络设备是否存在信息交互，若不存在信息交互，则终端请求网络设备释放该终端的RRC连接。若在取值为所述第三时长值的所述计时时长内，所述终端与所述网络设备存在信息交互，则终端以发生所述信息交互的时间为起始点，重新执行以下步骤：判断在取值为第三时长值的所述计时时长内，所述终端与网络设备是否存在信息交互；若不存在所述信息交互，则终端请求网络设备释放该终端的RRC连接。
如果终端中配置有RRC连接释放定时器，在第一应用程序保持运行在前台期间，当将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长的取值由第一时长值降低为第三时长值之后，终端重新进入RRC连接态，则RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长保持为该第三时长值。在另一些场景中，在将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长由第一时长值降低为第三时长值之后，若第一应用程序从前台切换到后台运行，并再次被切换到前台运行后，终端确定该第一应用程序所属的应用类型对应的第一时长值，并在终端重新建立RRC连接后，将终端的RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长的取值设置为该第一时长值。
进一步的，在一些实施例中，在所述终端重新进入RRC连接态之后，还包括：对终端处于RRC连接态下的数据传输进行统计，获得统计结果；若该统计结果大于第一门限，则将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长由第三时长值增大为第一时长值；当RRC连接释放 定时器超过所述计时时长时，向网络设备请求释放RRC连接，若所述统计结果小于第二门限，则将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长由第三时长值降低为第四时长值。
进一步的，在一些实施例中，在将终端的RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长设置为第一时长值之后，还包括：响应于第一应用程序被关闭或者切换到后台的操作，判断是否有运行在前台的应用程序；如果没有运行到前台的应用程序，则保持RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长为所述第一时长值；如果有运行到前台的应用程序，将所述RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长设置为所述运行到前台的应用程序所对应的时长值。
上述实施例中，如果数据传输的统计结果大于第一门限，则将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长的取值增大；如果RRC连接释放定时器的计时超过计时时长时，若数据传输的统计结果小于第二门限(第二门限小于或等于第一门限)，则将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长的取值降低。其中，若数据传输的统计结果大于第一门限，则表明数据收发的密度较大，针对此种情况增大RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长的取值，可以减少或避免过早释放RRC连接的几率，从而节省终端的功耗；若数据传输的统计结果小于第二门限，则表明数据收发的较稀疏，针对此种情况降低RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长的取值，可以减少或避免过晚释放RRC连接的几率，从而节省终端的功耗。
需要说明的是，S510和S520的过程相对独立，虽然图5中S510显示在S520之前，但在实际应用中，这两个过程各自独立执行，没有严格的时序。例如，终端可通过S510获取数据传输的统计结果，并根据数据传输的统计结果在判断满足条件时调整RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长；在S520，终端根据RRC连接释放定时器来判断是否满足释放RRC连接的条件，并当判断满足条件时(即RRC连接释放定时器超时时)请求网络设备释放RRC连接。
其中，根据S510的执行情况，上述用于RRC连接释放控制的计时时长或者RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长，可能是初始时长(如在RRC连接建立后RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长被初始化为初始时长，且在之后没有被调整过)，也可能被调整过一次，也可能被调整过多次。比如，在第一时间，上述用于RRC连接释放控制的计时时长或者RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长等于第一值；在第二时间，上述用于RRC连接释放控制的计时时长或者RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长等于第二值，其中，第一值和第二值不相同。
上述流程中，通过设置RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长，使得RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长不再固定不变，而是可以动态可调，这样可以根据数据的传输情况来适应性调整RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长，使其能够与数据传输情况匹配，从而节省终端的功耗。
本申请的一些实施例中，终端中的应用处理器可通过向该终端中的调制解调器发送指令的方式，设置RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长。具体地，应用处理器向调制解调器发送指令，该指令中携带用于指示计时时长的取值(比如第一时长值)的指示信息。调制解调器可根据该指示信息将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长设置为相应的时长值(比如第一时长值)。
可选的，该指令可以是AT(attention)命令。
其中，AT命令中可携带用于指示RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长取值的指示信息。进一步的，AT命令中还可携带以下指示信息中的至少一个：
用于指示RRC连接释放后终端进入空闲态或非激活态的指示信息，比如该指示信息 可以指示在RRC连接释放后进入空闲态，或者指示在RRC连接释放后进入非激活态；
用于指示是否使能RRC连接快速释放特性的指示信息，也即是否采用本申请实施例提供的方式对RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长进行动态调整的方案。
示例性地，AT命令可包括五个信息域，依次为第一信息域、第二信息域、第三信息域、第四信息域和第五信息域。每个信息域的长度可以是1比特或者多个比特。各信息域的含义为：
第一信息域：该信息域的值为固定值，该固定值等于1；
第二信息域：该信息域用于承载用于指示是否使能RRC连接快速释放特性的指示信息，比如，当该信息域承载的指示信息的值等于1时，表示使能RRC连接快速释放特性(enable OPEN_RRC_QUICKLY_RELEASE_FEATURE)，也即采用本申请实施例提供的方式对RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长进行动态调整，当该信息域承载的指示信息的值等于0时，表示不使能RRC连接快速释放特性(RRC_QUICKLY_RELEASE_PERIODIC_DETECTIO)，即不采用本申请实施例提供的对RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长进行动态调整的方案，可以采用RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长固定不变的方案，比如，在终端亮屏状态下，由基站根据基站为该终端配置的RRC连接释放定时器(该定时器的计时时长为固定时长，比如10秒)进行RRC连接释放控制，在终端息屏状态下，由终端上配置的RRC连接释放定时器(该定时器的计时时长为固定时长，比如为1秒或2秒)进行RRC连接释放控制；
第三信息域：该信息域为预留的信息域；
第四信息域：该信息域承载用于指示RRC连接释放后终端进入空闲态或非激活态的指示信息，可表示为para1，用于指示RRC连接释放后进入的状态，若para1＝0，表示终端在释放RRC连接后进入空闲态(IDLE_STATE)，若para1＝1，表示终端在释放RRC连接后进入非激活态(INACTIVE_STATE)；
第五信息域：该信息域用于承载RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长(即计时时长的目标值)，可表示为para2，比如para2＝10，表示需要将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长设置为10秒。
以AT命令包含上述五个信息域为例，若应用处理器确定需要将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长设置为10秒，且终端在RRC连接释放后进入空闲态，则应用处理器发送给调制解调器的AT命令可表示为：
AT^NRPOWERSAVINGCFG＝1,1,0,0,10
其中，上述AT命令中从左到右依次包括以下信息：
第一信息域：值为1，该值为固定值；
第二信息域“enable OPEN_RRC_QUICKLY_RELEASE_FEATURE”：值为1，表示采用本申请实施例提供的方式对RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长进行动态调整；
第三信息域：值为0，该信息域为预留信息域；
第四信息域：para1＝0，表示“IDLE_STATE”，即RRC连接释放后进入空闲态；
第五信息域：para2＝10，表示RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长为10秒。
上述AT命令中的信息域的排列顺序和排列方式仅为示例，本申请实施例对此不作限制。
本申请的一些实施例中，在终端处于RRC连接态下，对数据传输进行统计，获得统 计结果；基于所述统计结果，对RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长进行调整。具体地，在终端处于RRC连接态下，获取数据传输统计结果，若根据该数据传输统计结果确定满足调整RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长的条件，则调整RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长。
具体地，RRC连接释放定时器对应有至少两个时长值，则上述基于所述统计结果对RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长进行调整，可包括以下几种情况：
情况1：如果统计结果大于第一门限，则获取RRC连接释放定时器对应的至少两个时长值，将所述至少两个时长值中大于第一时长值的时长确定为第二时长值，将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长由第一时长值增大为第二时长值。
可选的，可将所述至少两个时长值中大于所述第一时长值的最小值作为所述第二时长值。
情况2：当RRC连接释放定时器超时时，若统计结果小于第二门限，则获取RRC连接释放定时器对应的至少两个时长值，将所述至少两个时长值中小于第一时长值的时长值确定为第三时长值，将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长由第一时长值降低为第三时长值。
可选的，将所述至少两个时长中小于所述第一时长值的最大值作为所述第三时长值。
情况3：上述情况1和情况2的结合，即，如果统计结果大于第一门限，则将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长由第一时长值增大为第二时长值，并当RRC连接释放定时器超时时，若统计结果小于第二门限，则将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长值由第一时长降低为第三时长值。
其中，RRC连接释放定时器对应的至少两个时长值，可包括以下几种情况：
情况1：设置有一组时长(其中包括至少两个时长值)，该组时长为通用的RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长；
相应的，终端可获取与该应用类型对应的一组时长，从而根据该组时长中的一个时长值设置RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长。
情况2：设置有多组时长，每组时长对应一个应用类型；
相应的，终端可根据前台运行的应用程序所属的应用类型，获取与该应用类型对应的一组时长，从而根据该组时长中的一个时长值设置RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长。
情况3：设置有多组时长，每组时长对应一个应用程序；
情况4：设置有多组时长，其中一组时长为通用的RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长，其他组时长中的每组时长对应一个应用类型；
相应的，终端若根据前台运行的应用程序所属的应用类型，未获取到该应用类型对应的一组时长，则获取通用的一组时长。
情况5：设置有多组时长，其中一组时长为通用的RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长，其他组时长中的每组时长对应一个应用程序。
本申请的一些实施例中，可在以下情况下触发开始或重新开始进行数据传输统计：
情况1：在前台没有应用程序运行的情况下，当有应用程序被启动，该应用程序在前台运行，则开始进行数据传输统计；
情况2：已被启动的应用程序从后台切换到前台，比如，用户选取后台应用程序的窗口显示在屏幕上，则该应用程序从后台被切换到前台，或者当关闭前台应用程序使得后台运行的应用程序被切换到前台，则重新开始进行数据传输统计；
情况3：由于数据传输的统计结果达到第一门限而增大RRC连接释放定时器的时长后， 重新进行数据传输统计；
情况4：RRC连接重新建立后，且当前有应用程序运行时，可重新进行数据传输统计。可选的，可在RRC连接释放定时器超时的时候，将数据传输统计计数器清零，以便在RRC连接重新建立后，重新进行数据传输统计。
以统计数据包个数为例，当应用程序A被启动，并在前台运行后，使用计数器开始对接收的数据包个数进行累计；此后当应用程序B被启动，应用程序A切换为后台运行，应用程序B为前台应用，则对该计数器清零，从而重新对接收的数据包个数进行累计；此后在应用程序B作为前台应用运行过程中，该计数器的计数值(即累计的数据包个数)达到第一门限时，增大RRC连接释放定时器的时长，并将该计数器清零，以便从新对接收的数据包个数进行累计；此后，RRC连接释放定时器超时，终端请求网络设备释放RRC连接，该计数器被清零；此后，当RRC连接重新建立后，此时应用程序B为前台应用，该计数器开始对接收的数据包个数进行计数。
仍以对接收到的数据包个数进行统计为例，当上述计数器统计的数据包的累计个数大于第一门限时，表明当前数据包到达较密集，包间隔较小，此种情况下将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长加大，可以避免因RRC连接释放过早而导致不必要的随机接入过程，从而节省终端的功耗。比如，若采用常规的RRC连接释放控制方法，终端上配置的RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长等于1秒，终端接收数据包A后息屏，在1.1秒后有新的数据包B到达，在该情况下，还未等到接收数据包B，终端已在接收数据包A并息屏后的1秒后向网络设备请求释放RRC连接，导致终端释放RRC连接进入非连接态，在接收数据包B之前需要重新进行随机接入以重新与网络设备建立RRC连接；而采用本申请实施例提供的方法，终端可检测到当前数据包到达较密集，因此可将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长加大，比如加大到1.2秒，这样终端在接收数据包A并息屏后的1.1秒后由于RRC连接释放定时器还未超时，因此不会请求释放RRC连接，从而可以接收数据包B，避免了随机接入过程，从而节省了随机接入过程所带来的功耗。
在RRC连接释放定时器超时的时候，若上述计数器统计的数据包的累计个数小于第二门限，则表明当前数据包到达较稀疏，包间隔较大，此种情况下将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长降低，可以避免因RRC连接释放过晚而导致不必要的RRC连接态下的等待时间，从而节省终端的功耗。
一段时间内接收的数据包的数量，可以一定程度上预示着随后一段时间内数据包达到的稀疏程度，比如，如果当前阶段数据包到达较密集，则未来一段时间内数据包到达较密集的概率也会较高，如果当前阶段数据包到达较稀疏，则未来一段时间内数据包到达较稀疏的概率也会较高。基于这种预测，采用上述本申请实施例，可以提前对RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长进行调整，以适应未来一段时间内的数据传输，达到节省终端功耗的目的。
上述基于对接收数据包个数进行统计来调整RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长所带来的效果，在其他类似情况下同样可以实现，比如，基于对接收到的数据的数据量、数据吞吐率或比特率进行统计来调整RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长的情况。
本申请的一些实施例中，可针对应用类型设置有对应的第一门限和第二门限。其中，该两个门限可以形成一个门限组。其中，不同的应用类型对应的门限或门限组可能不同。比如，第一应用类型对应的门限组中的第一门限与第二应用类型对应的门限组中的第一门 限不同，和/或，第一应用类型对应的门限组中的第二门限与第二应用类型对应的门限组中的第二门限不同。
本申请的一些实施例中，可针对应用程序设置有对应的门限组。比如，可针对应用程序A设置门限组A，针对应用程序B设置门限组B，不同的应用程序对应的门限或门限组可能不同也可能相同。相应地，确定是否满足调整RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长的条件时，可将数据传输的统计结果与该应用程序所对应的门限组进行比较来确定是否满足调整RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长的条件。比如，当终端处于RRC连接态，数据传输的统计结果达到(大于或等于)前台应用对应的第一门限时，可增大RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长的取值；当RRC连接释放定时器超时时，若数据传输的统计结果小于或等于前台应用对应的第二门限，则可降低RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长的取值。
可选的，可设置通用的门限或门限组。相应地，确定是否满足调整RRC连接释放定时器时长的条件时，可将数据传输统计的结果与该通用门限组进行比较来确定是否满足调整RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长的条件。比如，当终端处于RRC连接态，数据传输的统计结果达到(大于或等于)通用门限组中的第一门限时，可增大RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长的取值；当RRC连接释放定时器超时时，若数据传输统计的结果小于或等于通用门限组中的第二门限，则可降低RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长的取值。
在本申请的一些实施例中，可设置RRC连接释放定时器时长集合，该集合中包括至少两个RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长指，终端在调整RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长的取值时，可选择该集合中的一个时长值作为调整的目标值。不同RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中时长的数量可以相同或不同。
其中，可选的，RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中的时长值按照从小到大(递增)或从大到小(递减)的顺序排列。比如，RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中的时长值可以为形成等差数列，或形成等比数列，或者集合中的时长值符合其他规律，当然相邻时长值间的差值也可以是随机的，即集合中的时长值的可以随机排序，本申请对此不作限制。
可选的，针对应用类型设置有对应的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合。相应地，调整RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长时，可根据前台应用程序所属的应用类型，从该应用类型对应的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中选择目标值，以作为RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长调整后的值。不同的应用类型设置的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中包含的候选RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长值的数量可以相同或不同。
举例来说，以互联网长视频应用类型、互联网短视频应用类型以及网页新闻类应用类型为例，互联网长视频应用类型对应的RRC连接释定时器时长集合中包含四个时长，分别为：第一值、第二值、第三值、第四值，这四个值可以按照从大到小或者从小到大的顺序排列。互联网短视频应用类型对应的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中包含三个时长，分别为：第五值、第六值、第七值，这三个值可以按照从大到小或者从小到大的顺序排列。网页新闻类应用类型对应的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中包含两个时长，分别为第八值、第九值，这两个值可以按照从大到小或者从小到大的顺序排列。其中，一个RRC连接释放定时器时长集合内的各时长均不相同，比如第一值到第四值各不相同，第五值到第七值各不相同；一个RRC连接释放定时器时长集合内的时长与另一个RRC连接释放定时器时长集合内的时长值可能不相同，也可能部分相同，部分相同的一个例子为：互联网长视频应用类型对应的RRC连接释定时器时长集合中的第一值(第一值为该集合中的最大 值)与互联网短视频应用类型对应的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中的第五值(第五值为该集合中的最大值)相同，比如均为10秒。
可选的，针对应用程序设置有对应的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合。相应地，调整RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长时，可从前台应用程序对应的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中选择目标值，以作为RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长调整后的值。不同的应用程序对应的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中包含的候选RRC连接释放定时器时长值的数量可以相同或不同。
可选的，可设置有通用的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合。相应地，调整RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长时，可从通用的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中选择目标值，以作为RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长调整后的值。
在一些实施例中，RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中的最大RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长小于或等于网络设备上默认配置的RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长，比如该最大RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长等于10秒。这样可以使得RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长调整范围最大达到网络设备上默认配置的RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长，使得终端的性能(如功耗和/或时延)至少能与网络侧的性能持平。
在一些实施例中，RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中的最小RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长大于或等于终端上默认配置的RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长，比如该最小RRC连接释放定时器时长不小于1秒。这样可以使得RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长调整范围最小不小于终端在息屏场景下设备上默认配置的RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长，确保不会频繁的进行连接释放和重建。
在一些实施例中，RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中的RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长的个数小于或等于预设的最大RRC连接释放定时器计时时长个数。举例来说，最大RRC连接释放定时器计时时长个数的取值区间可定义为[2,10]，比如该最大RRC连接释放定时器计时时长个数可设置为等于5。通过对RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中的定时器时长个数进行限制，可以避免因定时器时长个数较多而导致RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长调整过于频繁，以降低信令开销和对系统稳定性的影响。
根据以上门限组和RRC连接释放定时器时长集合的设置情况，在一些实施例中，终端上针对不同的应用类型，分别存储各应用类型对应的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合以及用于确定是否满足对RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长进行调整的门限组。当根据数据传输统计结果以及前台应用所属的应用类型所对应的门限组，确定需要调整RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长时，从前台应用所属的应用类型对应的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中选择调整目标值。
根据以上门限组和RRC连接释放定时器时长集合的设置情况，在一些实施例中，终端上针对不同的应用类型，分别存储各应用类型对应的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合，但仅配置一个通用门限组。当根据数据传输统计结果以及该通用门限组，确定需要调整RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长时，从前台应用所属的应用类型对应的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中选择调整目标值。
进一步的，终端上还可配置一个通用的RRC连接释放时长集合以及一个通用的用于确定是否满足对RRC连接释放定时器进行调整的门限组。如果针对前台应用程序所属的应用类型未设置对应的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合以及用于确定是否满足对RRC连接 释放定时器的计时时长进行调整的门限组，则可将传输数据统计结果与该通用的门限组进行比较，并根据比较结果确定需要调整RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长时，从该通用的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中选择调整的目标值。
根据以上门限组和RRC连接释放定时器时长集合的设置情况，在一些实施例中，终端上可仅设置一个通用的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合以及通用的用于确定是否满足对RRC连接释放定时器计时时长进行调整的门限组。该实施例中，无论终端上的前台应用程序是哪个应用程序或者哪类应用程序，均采用该通用的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合以及通用的门限组，对RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长进行调整。
在另外一些实施例中，还可以分别针对息屏场景和亮屏场景设置对应的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合以及用于确定是否满足对RRC连接释放定时器计时时长进行调整的门限组，用以根据当前的场景采用对应的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合以及对应的门限组，对RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长进行调整。
在一些实施例中，如果终端处于分屏模式，并在分屏模式下在多个分屏窗口运行多个前台应用程序，则可以根据所述多个前台应用程序所属的应用类型的优先级，基于其中优先级高的应用类型对应的门限组以及数据传输统计结果，确定是否需要调整RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长，并在确定需要调整RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长时，根据该优先级高的应用程序所属的应用类型对应的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合确定RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的目标值。其中，数据传输统计结果可以是通过对终端接收的数据包个数进行统计得到的，其中包括所述多个前台应用程序接收的数据包，进一步的，如果后台应用程序有数据传输，则统计的数据包中还包括有数据传输的后台应用程序接收的数据包，即统计接收的数据包时不区分应用程序；数据传输统计结果也可以是通过对高优先级应用程序接收的数据包进行统计得到的，即在统计接收的数据包时仅统计高优先级的应用程序接收的数据包，比如可通过对接收到的业务流数据进行识别以确定是否属于高优先级应用程序，从而仅统计属于高优先级应用程序的数据包。
可选的，可根据业务数据是否对时延敏感等因素设置不同应用类型的优先级。比如，可以将对时延敏感的应用程序所属的应用类型的优先级设置为较高，将对时延不敏感的应用程序所属的应用类型的优先级设置为较低。例如：在社交类应用程序(比如
Figure PCTCN2021121401-appb-000008
)、游戏类应用程序、互联网短视频类应用程序(比如
Figure PCTCN2021121401-appb-000009
)中，由于互联网短视频类应用程序以及游戏类应用程序的业务数据对时延要求较高，功耗也较大，因此可以被设置为较高优先级。
在另一些实施例中，如果终端处于分屏模式，并在分屏模式下在多个分屏窗口运行多个前台应用程序，则可以选取所述多个前台应用程序所属的应用类型对应的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中时长最大的集合，基于该集合对应的门限组以及数据传输统计结果，确定是否需要调整RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长，并在确定需要调整RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长时，根据该时长最大的集合确定RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的目标值。其中，数据传输统计结果可以是通过对终端接收的数据包个数进行统计得到的，其中包括所述多个前台应用程序接收的数据包，进一步的，如果后台应用程序有数据传输，则统计的数据包中还包括有数据传输的后台应用程序接收的数据包，即统计接收的数据包时不区分应用程序；数据传输统计结果也可以是通过对上述时长最大的集合所对应的应用程序接收的数据包进行统计得到的，即在统计接收的数据包时仅统计上述时长最大的集合所对应 的应用程序接收的数据包。
其中，时长最大的集合，是指所述多个前台应用程序所属的应用类型对应的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中时，最大值最大的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合。
可选的，当开启一个应用程序使得该应用程序在前台运行时，可确定该前台应用程序所属的应用类型所对应的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合，将RRC连接释放定时器的时长设置为与该集合中的最大值相等。当将一个后台应用程序切换为前台应用程序时，可确定该前台应用程序所属的应用类型所对应的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合，将RRC连接释放定时器的时长设置为与该集合中的最大值相等。
可选的，当关闭前台应用程序，使得终端上当前没有前台应用程序运行时，可保持RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长不变，也可以将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长设置为与通用RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中的最大值相等。在另一些实施例中，当关闭前台应用程序，使得终端上当前没有前台应用程序运行时，如果终端为亮屏状态，则该终端的RRC连接释放由网络设备控制，即网络设备根据该网络设备上配置的非活动定时器(比如该定时器的定时时长为固定10秒)对该终端的RRC连接进行控制(比如当该非活动定时器超时时，释放该终端的RRC连接)；如果终端进入灭屏状态，则终端根据默认配置的固定时长(比如1秒或2秒)对RRC连接释放进行控制(比如当终端灭屏后在该固定时长内与网络设备没有信息交互，则请求网络设备释放RRC连接)。在一种实施例中，在关闭前台应用程序，使得终端上当前没有前台应用程序运行时，AP可以向MODEM发送指令用于指示恢复默认配置，在这种情况下，终端如果处于亮屏状态，则由网络设备控制终端的RRC连接释放时长，而终端不再基于第一定时器的定时时长对RRC连接释放进行控制；如果终端处于灭屏状态，则将第一定时器其的定时时长设置为默认配置的固定时长。
本申请的一些实施例中，终端的AP(应用处理器)上设置有RRC连接释放定时器时长集合以及用于确定是否满足对RRC连接释放定时器计时时长进行调整的门限或门限组，AP可根据数据传输统计结果以及门限组确定是否调整RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长，并在确定需要调整RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长时，根据RRC连接释放定时器的当前的计时时长从该RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中选择目标值，并向调制解调器(modem)发送指令，以指示调制解调器将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长调整为该目标值。该指令中可携带该目标值，也可携带RRC连接释放定时器时长的调整量。
可选的，在一些实施例中，处于非连接态的终端中当有应用程序被启动，则建立RRC连接，此时应用处理器(AP)获取相应RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中的最大时长，向调制解调器发送指令，以指示调制解调器将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长设置为该最大时长。
其中，可选的，如果优先根据应用程序所属的应用类型所对应的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合进行RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的调整，则应用处理器(AP)获取相应RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中的最大时长，可包括：应用处理器获取该应用程序所属的应用类型所对应的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合，若获取成功(即针对该应用类型设置有对应的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合)，则获取该集合中的最大时长，从而指示调制解调器将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长设置为该最大时长；若获取失败(即针对该应用类型未设置有对应的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合)，则获取通用的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合，并获取该集合中的最大时长，从而指示调制解调器将RRC连接释放定时器的计 时时长设置为该最大时长。
其中，可选的，如果优先根据应用程序对应的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合进行RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的调整，则应用处理器(AP)获取相应RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中的最大时长，可包括：应用处理器获取该应用程序对应的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合，若获取成功(即针对该应用程序设置有对应的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合)，则获取该集合中的最大时长，从而指示调制解调器将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长设置为该最大时长；若获取失败(即针对该应用程序未设置有对应的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合)，则获取通用的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合，并获取该集合中的最大时长，从而指示调制解调器将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长设置为该最大时长。
其中，可选的，如果仅根据通用的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合进行RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的调整，则应用处理器(AP)获取相应RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中的最大时长，可包括：应用处理器获取该通用的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中的最大时长，从而指示调制解调器将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长设置为该最大时长。
可选的，当释放RRC连接时且当前前台应用程序保持不变，则调制解调器可保持RRC连接释放定时器的时长不变。
在另外一些实施例中，终端中的调制解调器(modem)上设置RRC连接释放定时器时长集合以及用于确定是否满足对RRC连接释放定时器计时时长进行调整的门限组，调制解调器(modem)可根据数据传输统计结果以及门限组确定是否调整RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长，并在确定需要调整RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长时，根据RRC连接释放定时器的当前计时时长从该RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中选择目标值，从而将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长调整为该目标值。
上述由调制解调器确定是否需要调整RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的方法，以及设置和调整RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的方法，与前述由应用处理器所执行的相应方法原理相同。
需要说明的是，本申请实施例中，可以针对RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中的每个RRC连接释放定时器时长设置相同的门限，也可以针对每个RRC连接释放定时器时长设置各自对应的门限。如果针对每个RRC连接释放定时器设置各自对应的门限，则在根据门限判断是否需要调整RRC连接释放定时器计时时长时，可使用当前RRC连接释放定时器时长所对应的门限判断是否需要进行调整。
图6a示例性示出了图5的S510中，基于通用RRC连接释放定时器时长集合和门限组进行RRC连接释放定时器计时时长动态调整的流程。该流程以使用计数器对接收到的数据包的个数进行计数统计为例描述。
如图6a所示，该流程可包括：
S5101：获取计数器的计数值，该计数值为接收到的数据包的个数。
其中，该计数器可在以下情况下开始计数：在没有任何前台应用程序运行的情况下，当有应用程序被开启时，或者当发生应用程序前后台切换时，或者当终端进入连接态时。
其中，该计数器所统计的数据包的个数，包括前台应用程序接收的数据包，还可进一步包括有数据传输的后台应用程序接收的数据包。
S5102：将计数器的计数值与通用门限组内的第一门限进行比较，若计数值大于第一门限，则转入S5103，否则转入S5105。
S5103：增大RRC连接释放定时器的时长。
S5104：将计数器清零，并返回S5101。
该步骤中，从通用RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中选取比当前RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长值大的时长值作为目标值，并将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长设置为等于该目标值。
以RRC连接释放定时器当前的计时时长等于第一时长值，通用RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中至少包括第一时长值和第二时长值，该第二时长值是通用RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中比第一时长值大的所有时长值中最小的一个为例，增大RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长的方法可以是：从通用RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中选取第二时长值，并将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长设置为等于该第二时长值；当然，该第二时长值也可以为通用RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中的其他值，大于第一时长值即可。
更具体地，以RRC连接释放定时集合中的时长值从大到小排序为例，该通用集合中包括第一时长值以及与第一时长值相邻的第二时长值(第二时长值大于第一时长值)，则可从通用RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中选取与第一时长值相邻的第二时长值，设置RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长等于该第二时长值。
S5105：确定当前RRC连接释放定时器释放超时，若超时，则转入S5106，否则转入S5101。
S5106：请求网络设备释放RRC连接。
S5107:将计数器的计数值与通用门限组内的第二门限进行比较，若计数值小于第二门限，则转入S5108，否则转入S5109。
S5108：降低RRC连接释放定时器的时长，并转入S5110。
该步骤中，从通用RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中选取比当前RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长小的时长值作为目标值，并将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长设置为等于该目标值。
以RRC连接释放定时器当前的计时时长等于第一时长值，通用RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中至少包括第三时长值和第一时长值，该第三时长值是该RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中比第一时长值小的所有时长值中最大的一个为例，降低RRC连接释放定时器的时长的方法可以是：从通用RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中选取第三时长值，并将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长设置为等于该第三时长值，该第三时长值是通用RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中比第一时长值小的所有时长值中最大的一个。当然，第三时长值也可以为通用RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中的其他值，小于第一时长值即可。
更具体地，以RRC连接释放定时集合中的时长值从大到小排序为例，该通用集合中包括第一时长以及与第一时长值相邻的第三时长值(第三时长值小于第一时长值)，则可从通用RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中选取与第一时长值相邻的第三时长值，设置RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长等于该第三时长值。
S5109：若计数器的计数值在第一门限和第二门限之间(包括第一门限和第二门限)，则保持RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长不变，并转入S5110。
S5110：将计数器的计数值清零。
需要说明的是，在当前RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长已经等于通用RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中的最大时长值的情况下，若确定需要增大RRC连接释放定时器的计时 时长，则可保持当前RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长不变，并将计数器清零；在当前RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长已经等于通用RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中的最小时长值的情况下，若确定需要降低RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长，则可保持当前RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长不变。
例如，在一种场景中，终端上设置有通用的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合{timer1,timer2,timer3,timer4,timer5}(该集合中的时长值按照递减方式排序)，并设置有通用的包数量门限组{ThHigh(即第一包数量门限),ThLow(即第二包数量门限)}。终端当前的RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长等于timer3。根据图6a所示的流程，在t1时刻，终端将计数器的计数值N1与ThHigh比较，比较结果为N1>ThHigh，因此从通用RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中获取与timer3相邻且大于timer3的时长timer2，并将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长从timer3调整到timer2，并将计数器清零以便重新开始对接收到的数据包数量进行计数；在随后的t2时刻，RRC连接释放定时器超时，则终端将当前计数器的计数值N2与通用门限组内的第二门限ThLow进行比较，比较结果为N2<ThLow，因此从通用RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中获取与timer2相邻且小于timer2的时长timer3，将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长从timer2调整到timer3，并将计数器清零。
通过设置RRC连接释放定时器时长集合，定义了RRC连接释放定时器的各种可能取值，当需要调整RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长时，从该集合中选取RRC连接释放定时器的目标时长值，一方面可以使得RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长调整量不至于过大，从而保证系统稳定性，并可以达到渐变调整的效果，另一方面技术实现简单易行。
图6b示例性示出了图5的S510中，基于不同应用类型分别设置RRC连接释放定时器时长集合和门限组，以进行RRC连接释放定时器动态调整的流程。该流程以使用计数器对接收到的数据包的个数进行计数统计为例描述。
如图6b所示，该流程可包括：
S5111：获取计数器的计数值，该计数值为接收到的数据包的个数。
其中，该计数器可在以下情况下开始计数：在没有任何前台应用程序运行的情况下，当有应用程序被开启时，或者当发生应用程序前后台切换时，或者当终端进入连接态时。
其中，该计数器所统计的数据包的个数，包括前台应用程序接收的数据包，还可进一步包括有数据传输的后台应用程序接收的数据包。
S5112：根据前台应用程序所属的应用类型，将计数器的计数值与该应用类型对应的门限组内的第一门限进行比较，若计数值大于第一门限，则转入S5113，否则转入S5115。
可选的，在一些实施例中，终端上设置有RRC连接释放查找表，所述RRC连接释放查找表用于存储应用类型与RRC连接释放定时器时长集合以及门限组的对应关系，比如存储互联网短视频应用类型信息与该应用类型对应的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合以及门限组，还存储有游戏应用类型信息与该应用类型对应的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合以及门限组。
在一些场景下，当应用程序被开启为前台应用程序或者被切换为前台应用程序时，可根据当前前台应用程序的应用程序名确定该应用程序所属的应用类型(比如可根据应用程序名查询预先设置的应用程序名与应用类型之间的对应关系表)，在根据该应用程序所属的类型查询上述查找表，如果在查找表中查找到该前台应用程序所属的应用类型，则获取该应用类型对应的门限组以及RRC连接释放定时器时长集合。
其中，当应用程序被开启时，可通过如下方式获取该应用程序的名称：应用程序被开启后可将自身的信息向应用程序框架层进行注册，注册的信息中可包括该应用程序的名称，应用程序框架层在检测到应用程序被开启的事件后，可通过用于获取前台应用程序名称的函数，根据该函数返回的应用程序名称确定当前前台运行的应用程序的名称。
当应用程序从后台切换到前台时，应用程序框架层可检测到该事件，此时应用程序框架层可通过调用用于获取前台应用程序名称的函数，根据该函数返回的应用程序名称确定当前前台运行的应用程序的名称。
终端可确定前台应用程序所属的应用类型，并根据该应用类型查询该RRC连接释放查找表，获得与该前台应用程序所属的应用类型对应的门限组，从而基于数据传输统计结果与该门限组内的第一门限进行比较以确定是否调整RRC连接释放定时器的时长。
S5113：增大RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长。
S5114：将计数器清零，并返回S5111。
该步骤中，从该前台应用程序所属的应用类型对应的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中选取比当前RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长大的时长值作为目标值，并将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长设置为等于该目标值。
以RRC连接释放定时器当前的计时时长等于第一时长值，前台应用程序所属的应用类型所对应的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中至少包括第二时长值和第一时长值，该第二时长值是该RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中比第一时长值大的所有时长值中最小的一个为例，增大RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长的方法可以是：从该RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中选取第二时长值，并将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长设置为等于该第二时长值。
更具体地，以RRC连接释放定时集合中的时长值从大到小排序为例，该集合中包括第一时长值以及与第一时长值相邻的第二时长值(第二时长值大于第一时长值)，则可从该RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中选取与第一时长值相邻的第二时长值，设置RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长等于该第二时长值。
在一些实施例中，应用处理器(AP)在确定RRC连接释放定时器时长的目标值后，可向调制解调器(modem)发送指令，以指示调制解调器(modem)将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长设置为与该目标值相等。在另一些实施例中，可由调制解调器(modem)按照上述方法确定是否需要调整RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长，并在需要调整时确定RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的目标值，并将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长设置为与该目标值相等。
S5115：确定当前RRC连接释放定时器释放超时，若超时，则转入S5116，否则转入S5111。
S5116：请求网络设备释放RRC连接。
S5117:将计数器的计数值与通用门限组内的第二门限进行比较，若计数值小于第二门限，则转入S5118，否则转入S5119。
S5118中，降低RRC连接释放定时器的时长，并转入S5120。
该步骤中，从该前台应用程序所属的应用类型对应的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中选取比当前RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长小的时长值作为目标值，并将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长设置为等于该目标值。
以RRC连接释放定时器当前的计时时长等于第一时长值，该前台应用程序所属的应用类型对应的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中至少包括第三时长值，且第三时长值小于第一时长值为例，降低RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长的方法可以是：从该RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中选取第三时长值，并将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长设置为等于该第三时长值，该第三时长值是通用RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中比第一时长值小的所有时长值中最大的一个。
更具体地，以RRC连接释放定时集合中的时长值从大到小排序为例，该集合中包括第一时长值以及与第一时长相邻的第三时长值(第三时长值小于第一时长值)，则可从该RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中选取与第一时长值相邻的第三时长值，设置RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长等于该第三时长值。
在一些实施例中，应用处理器(AP)在确定RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的目标值后，可向调制解调器(modem)发送指令，以指示调制解调器(modem)将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长设置为与该目标值相等。在另一些实施例中，可由调制解调器(modem)按照上述方法确定是否需要调整RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长，并在需要调整时确定RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的目标值，并将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长设置为与该目标值相等。
S5119：若计数器的计数值在第一门限和第二门限之间(包括第一门限和第二门限)，则保持RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长不变，并转入S5120。
S5120：将计数器的计数值清零。
需要说明的是，在当前RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长已经等于该前台应用程序所属的应用类型对应的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中的最大时长值的情况下，若确定需要增大RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长，则可保持当前RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长不变，并将计数器清零；在当前RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长已经等于该前台程序所属的应用类型对应的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中的最小时长值的情况下，若确定需要降低RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长，则可保持当前RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长不变。
还需要说明的是，若终端发生了前后台应用程序切换，比如基于用户的操作，将当前在前台运行的应用程序A切换为应用程序B，使得应用程序B成为前台应用程序，应用程序A成为后台应用程序，则可将上述计数器清零，以便终端重新开始对数据传输进行统计，并基于数据传输统计结果，利用应用程序B所属的应用类型对应的门限组确定是否需要调整RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长，并进一步根据当前的RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长，从应用程序B所属的应用类型对应的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中选择目标值，具体实现过程可参见图6b。
在一些实施例中，当应用程序启动为前台应用程序或者被切换为前台应用程序，但查询上述查找表时未查找到该应用程序所属的应用类型对应的门限组以及RRC连接释放定时器时长集合(即未针对该应用类型设置对应的门限组以及RRC连接释放定时器时长集合)，则可以使用通用门限组确定是否需要调整RRC连接释放定时器的时长，以及基于通用的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合确定调整后的RRC连接释放定时器时长的目标值。具体实现方式可参考图6a所示的流程。
在一些实施例中，可以基于前台应用程序对应的门限组确定是否需要调整RRC连接 释放定时器时长，并基于该前台应用程序对应的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合确定调整后的RRC连接释放定时器时长的目标值，类似于图6b所示的流程。进一步的，如果针对前台应用程序未设置对应的门限组以及RRC连接释放定时器时长集合，则可以使用通用门限组确定是否需要调整RRC连接释放定时器的时长，以及基于通用的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合确定调整后的RRC连接释放定时器时长的目标值。具体实现方式可参考图6a所示的流程。
上述流程中，一方面，设置RRC连接释放定时器时长集合，定义了RRC连接释放定时器的各种可能取值，当需要调整RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长时，从该集合中选取RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的目标值，一方面可以使得RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长调整量不至于过大，从而保证系统稳定性，并可以达到渐变调整的效果，技术实现简单易行；另一方面，通过针对不同应用类型设置对应的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合和门限组，从而根据对前台应用程序的数据传输统计结果，利用该前台应用程序所属的应用类型对应的门限组进行RRC连接释放定时器计时时长调整判断，并进一步利用该前台应用程序所属的应用类型对应的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合进行RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的调整，从而可以根据不同应用类型的数据传输特点或数据传输需求，有针对性地进行RRC连接释放定时器的调整，以满足相应应用类型的应用程序的数据传输需求，并降低终端的功耗。
本申请的一些实施例中，利用数学建模的离散化思想，将连续值切分成离散值从而形成RRC连接释放定时器时长集合。具体地，RRC连接释放定时器时长集合可以通过对T max进行指数切分方法得到，采用指数切分方法可以得到一个以切分分辨率(也称指数切分方法的底数)为公比的等比数列。指数切分方法中的切分分辨率(即底数)表征划分RRC连接释放时长的粒度。采用指数切分方法可以基于T max进行指数切分，得到多个RRC连接释放定时器时长，形成RRC连接释放定时器时长集合。
其中，T max是预先设置的，可以设置为与网络设备默认配置的RRC连接释放定时器的时长相等，比如等于10秒。
指数切分公式为：
Figure PCTCN2021121401-appb-000010
其中，i＝1,2,3…K；α为切分分辨率，切分分辨率也称为指数切分的底数，α为大于1的整数。
比如，以T max＝10秒,α＝2且RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中的最小值不小于1秒为例，根据上述指数切分公式得到的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合可表示为：{10,5,2.5,1.25}。
采用指数切分方法生成的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中，每个元素对应一个马尔科夫模型状态，即，RRC连接释放定时器时长集合对应多个马尔科夫状态。可以基于马尔科夫模型状态转移的思想，利用该RRC连接释放定时器时长集合，进行RRC连接释放定时器时长的调整。
马尔可夫模型状态是指马尔可夫性质的随机变量序列X1,X2,…,X3的当前状态、过去状态和未来状态。给定当前状态，未来状态和过去状态是相互独立的。t+1时刻系统状态的概率分布只与t时刻的状态有关与t时刻以前的状态无关；从t时刻到t+1时刻的状态转移与t的值无关。
图7示例性示出了本申请实施例中的RRC释放时间的马尔科夫模型状态转移的示意 图。如图所示，RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的马尔科夫链中包括如图所示的K个状态，每个状态对应一个RRC连接释放定时器计时时长，其中T 1>…>T i-1>T i>T i+1…>T K。从T i转换到T i+1的概率为P i,i+1，从T i转换到T i-1的概率为P i,i-1，从T i+1转换到T i的概率为P i+1,i，从T i转换到T i-1的概率为P i,i-1，T i-1保持不变的概率为P i-1,i-1，T i保持不变的概率为P i,i，T i+1保持不变的概率为P i+1,i+1。
基于上述RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的马尔科夫链，以统计接收到的数据包数量为例，终端当前配置有如图7所示的RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的马尔科夫链，即RRC连接释放定时器时长集合，以及第一门限ThHigh和第二门限ThLow。
当前终端处于RRC连接态，并处于上述马尔科夫链中的状态T i(即RRC连接定时器的时长为T i)，则当检测到数据包到达数目(即接收到的数据包的数目)达到第一门限ThHigh，则从状态T i跳转到状态T i+1，即，将当前RRC连接定时器的计时时长从T i调整到T i+1，使得RRC连接释放定时器的时长增大，并将数据包数目清零。
当前终端处于RRC连接态，并处于上述马尔科夫链中的状态T i(即RRC连接定时器的时长为T i)。当RRC连接释放定时器超时时，检测到数据包到达数目小于第二门限ThLow，则从T i转换到T i-1，即，将当前RRC连接定时器的计时时长从T i调整到T i-1，使得RRC连接释放定时器的时长降低，并将数据包数目清零。
本申请实施例中，用于确定是否调整RRC连接释放定时器时长的门限或门限组，以及用于进行RRC连接释放定时器时长调整的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合，可以由终端自身通过在线学习方法得到，也可以由终端自身通过离线学习方法得到，还可以由网络侧进行配置。网络侧配置的上述参数(即用于切断是否调整RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的门限或门限组，以及用于进行RRC连接释放定时器计时时长调整的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合)，可以是网络侧通过离线学习方法得到的。当然，也可以采用将上述各种方式相结合的方法。
需要说明的是，在采用网络侧配置的方式中，网络侧可以将上述参数发送给终端，也可以将用于生成上述参数的信息发送给终端，比如可以将指数切分方法的切分分辨率(即底数)发送给终端，终端根据该切分分辨率(即底数)基于指数切分方法可以生成RRC连接释放定时器时长集合。
下面详细描述本申请实施例提供的通过在线学习方法和离线学习方法获得用于判断是否调整RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的门限或门限组，以及用于进行RRC连接释放定时器时长调整的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合的过程。
(一)通过在线学习方法获得RRC连接释放定时器时长集合以及门限组。
该方法可由终端执行。
以下描述的在线学习方法中，以采用指数切分方法生成RRC连接释放定时器时长集合为例描述，该思想可应用到采用其他方法生成RRC连接释放定时器时长集合的在线学习方法中。
图8示例性示出了在线学习方法的流程，图9示例性示出了在线学习方法的原理。下面结合图8和图9对在线学习方法进行说明。
如图8所示，在线学习方法可包括以下步骤：
S801：获取终端在统计时长内传输的数据作为样本数据，对样本数据进行统计得到数据包间隔分布特性。
其中，该统计时长为预设值，该统计时长的取值范围可以是几分钟到几十分钟，比如5～20分钟，本申请对此不作限制。
统计时长内传输的数据，可包括该统计时长内接收到的数据，或者该统计时长内发送的数据。比如获取在统计时长内，某个应用程序作为前台应用程序时，该终端接收到的数据包，其中，终端接收到的数据包可包括该前台应用程序接收的数据包，还可包括有数据传输的后台应用程序接收到的数据包。
数据包间隔分布特性可通过对接收或发送的数据包进行统计得到，可表现为包间隔概率密度分布曲线以及包个数概率密度分布曲线。举例来说，可以统计相邻数据包之间的时间间隔，也可按照设定周期对接收到的数据包的个数进行统计以得到包间隔，比如，连续5个周期的统计数据(即数据包个数)分别为：{1000,0,0,3000,2000}，则包间隔分别为3和1，从而根据包间隔得到包间隔概率密度分布曲线。
在统计得到数据包的间隔后，可利用累积分布函数(cumulative distribution function，CDF)计算得到包间隔概率密度分布，包间隔概率密度分布表示统计得到的每种间隔大小的出现概率。包间隔概率密度分布可以采用包间隔CDF曲线(或称包间隔概率密度分布曲线)形式呈现。图10a示出了一种包间隔CDF曲线，图10a中的横坐标表示包间隔大小，单位可以是秒或其他时间单位，纵坐标表示概率大小。如图10a所示，虚线所示的曲线(或称折线)是通过对离散的各点进行连接得到的，对虚线所示的曲线(或称折线)进行拟合后可以得到如图10a中实线表示的包间隔CDF曲线。
在统计得到数据包的累计个数后，可利用CDF函数计算得到包个数概率密度分布，包个数概率密度分布表示统计得到的包个数累计值的概率分布。包个数概率密度分布可以采用包个数CDF曲线(或称包个数概率密度分布曲线)形式呈现。图10b示出了一种包个数CDF曲线，图10b中的横坐标表示周期内的包个数，纵坐标表示周期内的数据包的个数小于横坐标的包个数的概率大小。如图10b所示，虚线所示的曲线(或称折线)是通过对离散的各点进行连接得到的，对虚线所示的曲线(或称折线)进行拟合后可以得到如图10b中实线表示的包个数CDF曲线。比如，如图中所示，包个数小于1000的出现概率大于0.95。
S802：确定至少一个候选RRC连接释放定时器时长集合。
所述候选RRC连接释放定时器时长集合(以下简称候选集合，用rrcTimerSet表示)的数量至少为一个。每个候选集合rrcTimerSet中至少包括两个元素，每个元素为一个RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的候选值。每个候选集合rrcTimerSet中的元素可按照从大到小的顺序排列(即按照RRC连接释放时长递减的顺序排列)，也可以按照从小到大的顺序排列(即按照RRC连接释放时长递增的顺序排列)。可选的，每个候选集合rrcTimerSet中，RRC连接释放定时器时长最大值不超过预设的最大RRC连接释放定时器时长。可选的，RRC连接释放定时器时长最小值不小于预设的最小RRC连接释放定时器时长。可选的，每个候选集合中，元素的总数不超过预设的最大RRC连接释放定时器时长数量。
以采用指数切分方法生成候选集合rrcTimerSet为例，可预先设置以下参数：
1)指数切分底数BASE＝arange(1.1,5.2,0.05)，其中，arange(1.1,5.2,0.05)表示以1.1为下限、5.2为上限，公差等于0.05的一个等差数列，该等差数列可表示为[1.1,1.15,1.2,…,5.15,5.2]。
2)最大切分状态数NUM_STATE_MAX，NUM_STATE_MAX的取值为正整数，本例子中，NUM_STATE_MAX＝5。
3)最大RRC连接释放定时器时长RRC_REL_MAX，本例子中，RRC_REL_MAX取值为基站上默认配置的RRC连接释放定时器时长，比如，RRC_REL_MAX＝10秒。
4)最小RRC连接释放定时器时长RRC_REL_MIN，本例子中，RRC_REL_MIN取值为终端上默认配置的RRC连接释放定时器时长，比如，RRC_REL_MIN＝1秒。
根据以上预设的参数以及上述指数切分公式，以BASE＝2为例，可以得到以下候选集合rrcTimerSet：
BASE＝2时，RRC连接释放定时器时长可能的取值包括{10,5,2.5,1.25}，经过排列组合，可以得到如下满足上述条件的候选集合rrcTimerSet：
{10,5,2.5,1.25}
{10,5,2.5}
{10,5,1.25}
{10,2.5,1.25}
{5,2.5,1.25}
{10,5}
{10,2.5}
{10,1.25}
{5,2.5}
{5,1.25}
{2.5,1.25}
需要说明的是，上述例子中，在根据指示切分公式计算候选集合rrcTimerSet中的元素时，可采用四舍五入的方法仅取小数点后的两位数字。
以上仅示例性示出了部分候选集合rrcTimerSet，根据相同的思想，本领域技术人员可以根据指数切分底数BASE＝arange(1.1,5.2,0.05)确定出各底数对应的候选集合rrcTimerSet。其中，每个候选集合rrcTimerSet中的RRC连接释放定时器时长最大值不超过10(RRC_REL_MAX＝10)，且RRC连接释放定时器时长最小值不小于1(RRC_REL_MIN＝1)。每个候选集合rrcTimerSet中，元素的总数不超过5(NUM_STATE_MAX＝5)。
在一些实施例中，候选集合rrcTimerSet可以预先配置在终端中，在另一些实施例中，终端可根据预先配置的参数(比如上述BASE＝arange(1.1,5.2,0.05)，NUM_STATE_MAX＝5，RRC_REL_MAX＝10秒等)，生成候选集合rrcTimerSet。
S803：根据数据包间隔分布特性，确定至少一个候选门限组。
其中，一个候选门限组包括一个门限或者两个门限，如果包含两个门限，则该两个门限称为第一门限和第二门限，第一门限大于或等于第二门限。
其中，一个候选集合rrcTimerSet可能对应一个候选门限组，也可能对应多个候选门限组。如果一个候选集合rrcTimerSet对应多个候选门限组，则不同候选门限组中包含的门限不同，比如，一个候选集合rrcTimerSet对应第一候选门限组和第二候选门限组，则存在以下几种可能情况：
情况1：第一候选门限组中的第一门限与第二候选门限组中的第一门限取值不同，第一候选门限组中的第二门限与第二候选门限组中的第二门限取值相同；
情况2：第一候选门限组中的第二门限与第二候选门限组中的第二门限取值不同，第一候选门限组中的第一门限与第二候选门限组中的第一包限取值相同；
情况3：第一候选门限组中的第一门限与第二候选门限组中的第一门限取值不同，且第一候选门限组中的第二门限与第二候选门限组中的第二门限取值不同。
在步骤403中，可以利用包间隔CDF曲线以及包个数CDF曲线，确定每个候选集合rrcTimerSet对应的候选门限组。具体地，可针对每个候选集合rrcTimerSet执行以下操作：以候选集合rrcTimerSet中的各RRC连接释放定时器时长作为时间间隔，根据包间隔CDF曲线得到该候选集合rrcTimerSet中的每个RRC连接释放时长对应的分布概率，在包个数分布CDF曲线上得到相应分布概率对应的包个数，根据这些包个数得到该候选集合rrcTimerSet对应的至少一个候选门限组。
下面以针对上述例子中，BASE＝2时的候选集合rrcTimerSet19{10,5,2.5,1.25}为例，描述利用如图10a所示的包间隔CDF曲线以及图10b所示的包个数CDF曲线来确定该候选集合rrcTimerSet19对应的候选门限组。
参见图11a，基于图10a所示的包间隔CDF曲线，根据候选集合rrcTimerSet19{10,5,2.5,1.25}中的RRC连接释放定时器时长，在该包间隔CDF曲线的横坐标上选取相应的4个间隔值(10,5,2.5,1.25)，得到这4个间隔值各自对应的分布概率P 1～P 4，如图11a所示。比如，T 1＝10对应的分布概率为P 1，T 2＝5对应的分布概率为P 2，T 3＝2.5对应的分布概率为P 3，T 4＝1.25对应的分布概率为P 4。
参见图11b，基于图10b所示的包个数CDF曲线，根据分布概率P 1、P 2、P 3、P 4，在包个数CDF曲线上确定对应的包个数N 1、N 2、N 3和N 4，如图11b所示。
根据包个数N 1、N 2、N 3和N 4，经过排列组合可得到该候选集合rrcTimerSet19对应的候选门限组：
候选门限组1：第一门限thHigh＝N 1，第二门限thLow＝N 2；
候选门限组2：第一门限thHigh＝N 1，第二门限thLow＝N 3；
候选门限组3：第一门限thHigh＝N 1，第二门限thLow＝N 4；
候选门限组4：第一门限thHigh＝N 2，第二门限thLow＝N 3；
候选门限组5：第一门限thHigh＝N 2，第二门限thLow＝N 4；
候选门限组6：第一门限thHigh＝N 3，第二门限thLow＝N 4。
当然，候选门限组中的第一门限thHigh和第二门限thLow也可相等，比如，一个候选门限组中，thHigh＝N 1，thLow＝N 1；另一个候选门限组中，thHigh＝N 2，thLow＝N 2。以此类推。
S804：分别将每个候选集合rrcTimerSet与相应候选集合rrcTimerSet对应的每个候选门限组进行组合，得到至少一个候选组合。
其中，每个候选组合包括一个候选集合rrcTimerSet以及一个候选门限组。
仍以上述候选集合rrcTimerSet19{10,5,2.5,1.25}为例，根据S803中确定出的该候选集合对应的6个候选门限组，将这6个候选门限组与该候选集合rrcTimerSet19进行组合，可以得到6个候选组合。
S805：基于S801中获取到的样本数据，分别采用每个候选组合确定RRC连接释放情况，根据每个候选组合对应的RRC连接释放情况，确定每个候选组合对应的评价参数。
该步骤中，可基于S801中得到的样本数据，分别将每个候选组合应用于本申请实施例提供的RRC连接释放控制方法，针对每个候选组合得到对应的RRC连接释放时刻，并针对每个候选组合，根据对应的RRC连接释放时刻确定该候选组合对应的评价参数，所 述评价参数用于选取最优候选组合。
以一个候选组合为例，该步骤相当于基于S801中得到的样本数据，采用该候选组合，模拟执行本申请实施例提供的RRC连接释放流程，从而得到该样本数据在统计时长内的RRC连接释放情况，所述RRC连接释放情况包括RRC连接释放时刻以及RRC连接释放次数。
其中，最优评价参数可包括在统计时长内RRC连接态的总时长和RRC非连接态的总时长中的至少一个，以及在统计时长内的释放匹配率和误释放率中的至少一个。其中：
释放匹配率＝1-误释放率；
误释放率＝误释放次数/随机接入次数。
其中，误释放是指：RRC连接释放后，若在预设时长内有数据传输(比如有数据发送或有数据接收)，则认为该次释放为误释放，因为RRC连接释放后，有新数据传输时发起随机接入请求以重新建立RRC连接，随机接入过程需要一定功耗，在这种情况下，本次RRC连接释放所节省的功耗要比随机接入过程的功耗小，因此认为本次为误释放。
其中，上述预设时长是预先设定的，该预设时长的取值可以是几秒，比如，该预设时长REL_ERR_TH＝2秒。
S806，根据每个候选组合对应的评价参数选取最优候选组合。
该最优候选组合中的门限组，可被配置为用于确定是否调整RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的门限组，该最优候选组合中的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合可用于确定RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的目标值。
根据图8所示的流程，可以学习得到通用的门限组以及通用的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合。如果在S801中获取当某个目标应用程序为前台应用程序时接收到的数据包作为样本数据，可以学习得到该应用程序对应的门限组以及RRC连接释放定时器时长集合。如果在S801中获取某一类型的应用程序中具有代表性的应用程序作为前台应用程序时接收到的数据包作为样本数据，可以将学习到的门限组以及RRC连接释放定时器时长集合作为该应用类型对应的门限组以及RRC连接释放定时器时长集合。
本申请实施例中，可预先设置用于评价最优候选组合的条件，选取最优组合的原则是：选取误释放率较低，且RRC非连接态的总时长较长的候选组合。基于该原则，用于评价最优候选组合的条件可包括以下条件中的一个：
条件1：误释放率小于预设的误释放率门限，且RRC非连接态的总时长最大或RRC非连接态的总时长与统计时长的占比最大；比如误释放率门限可设置为40％；
条件2：误释放率小于预设的误释放率门限，且RRC连接态的总时长最小或RRC连接态的总时长与统计时长的占比最小；
条件3：释放匹配率大于预设的释放匹配率门限，且RRC非连接态的总时长最大或RRC非连接态的总时长与统计时长的占比最大；其中，释放匹配率＝1-误释放率；比如释放匹配率门限可设置为60％；
条件4：释放匹配率大于预设的释放匹配率门限，且RRC连接态的总时长最小或RRC连接态的总时长与统计时长的占比最小；其中，释放匹配率＝1-误释放率。
以上述条件1为例，可根据各候选组合对应的误释放率，选取误释放率小于误释放率门限的候选组合，然后根据这个范围内的各候选组合所对应的RRC非连接态总时长与统计时长的占比，选取其中最大占比所对应的候选组合，作为最优候选组合。
下面以3个示例对上述图8所示的流程举例说明。
终端上可预先设置有配置信息，该配置信息用于生成RRC连接释放定时器时长集合rrcTimerSet，该配置信息可包括：
指数切分底数的范围为BASE＝arange(1.1,5.2,0.05)，arange(1.1,5.2,0.05)表示以1.1为下限、5.2为上限，公差等于0.05的一个等差数列；
最大切分状态数NUM_STATE_MAX＝5，即rrcTimerSet中的时长数量最多为5个；
最大RRC连接释放定时器时长RRC_REL_MAX＝10，即rrcTimerSet中的最大值不大于10；
最小RRC连接释放定时器时长RRC_REL_MIN＝1，即rrcTimerSet中的最小值不小于1；
释放匹配率阈值为0.6。
示例1：
根据以上配置信息，基于互联网长视频应用(如
Figure PCTCN2021121401-appb-000011
视频)在前台运行时采集得到的样本数据，采用图8所示的流程，可得到以下最优RRC连接释放定时器时长集合rrcTimerSet以及最优第一门限ThHigh和第二门限thLow：
最优rrcTimerSet是指数切分底数base＝2.15对应的集合rrcTimerSet＝[10.0,4.65,2.16,1.01]，该最优rrcTimerSet中包含的时长数量numState＝4；
最优第一门限ThHigh＝7；
最优第二门限thLow＝7；
基于以互联网长视频应用(如
Figure PCTCN2021121401-appb-000012
视频)在前台运行时采集得到的样本数据，采用上述最优rrcTimerSet、最优ThHigh和最优thLow进行RRC连接释放控制时：
释放匹配率matchRate＝0.86，大于设定的释放匹配率阈值0.6；
经过测试可以得出：采用传统方法进行RRC连接释放控制所发生的随机接入次数为28次，采用本申请实施例进行RRC连接释放控制所发生的随机接入次数为20次，采用本申请实施例提供的RRC连接释放控制方法可以兼顾终端在RRC连接态下所带来的功耗以及进行随机接入所带来的功耗，从整体上降低终端功耗；经过测试可以得出：采用本申请实施例，终端的功耗可以节省powerSaving＝41.70％。
示例2：
根据以上配置信息，基于互联网短视频应用(如
Figure PCTCN2021121401-appb-000013
)在前台运行时采集得到的样本数据，采用图8所示的流程，可得到以下最优RRC连接释放定时器时长集合rrcTimerSet以及最优第一门限ThHigh和第二门限thLow：
最优rrcTimerSet是指数切分底数base＝3.00对应的集合rrcTimerSet＝[9.01,3.0,1.0]，该最优rrcTimerSet中包含的时长数量numState＝3；
最优第一门限ThHigh＝346；
最优第二门限thLow＝346；
基于以互联网短视频应用(如
Figure PCTCN2021121401-appb-000014
)在前台运行时采集得到的样本数据，采用上述最优rrcTimerSet、最优ThHigh和最优thLow进行RRC连接释放控制时：
释放匹配率matchRate＝0.76，大于设定的释放匹配率阈值0.6；
经过测试可以得出：采用本申请实施例进行RRC连接释放控制所发生的随机接入次数为45次，采用传统方法进行RRC连接释放控制所发生的随机接入次数为4次，采用本 申请实施例提供的RRC连接释放控制方法可以兼顾终端在RRC连接态下所带来的功耗以及进行随机接入所带来的功耗，从整体上降低终端功耗，比如本示例中，RRC连接释放次数较多，因而终端处于RRC连接态的时长相对较短，从而可以降低终端功耗；经过测试可以得出：采用本申请实施例，终端的功耗可以节省powerSaving＝41.06％。
示例3：
根据以上配置信息，基于网页新闻类应用(如
Figure PCTCN2021121401-appb-000015
)在前台运行时采集得到的样本数据，采用图8所示的流程，可得到以下最优RRC连接释放定时器时长集合rrcTimerSet以及最优第一门限ThHigh和第二门限thLow：
最优rrcTimerSet是指数切分底数base＝3.25对应的集合rrcTimerSet＝[6.51,2.0]，该最优rrcTimerSet中包含的时长数量numState＝2；
最优第一门限ThHigh＝61；
最优第二门限thLow＝61；
基于以网页新闻类应用(如
Figure PCTCN2021121401-appb-000016
)在前台运行时采集得到的样本数据，采用上述最优rrcTimerSet、最优ThHigh和最优thLow进行RRC连接释放控制时：
释放匹配率matchRate＝0.65，大于设定的释放匹配率阈值0.6；
经过测试可以得出：采用本申请实施例进行RRC连接释放控制所发生的随机接入次数为17次，采用传统方法进行RRC连接释放控制所发生的随机接入次数为2次，采用本申请实施例提供的RRC连接释放控制方法可以兼顾终端在RRC连接态下所带来的功耗以及进行随机接入所带来的功耗，从整体上降低终端功耗，比如本示例中，RRC连接释放次数较多，因而终端处于RRC连接态的时长相对较短，从而可以降低终端功耗；经过测试可以得出：采用本申请实施例，终端的功耗可以节省powerSaving＝14.76％。
上述选取到的最优组合(ThLow、ThHigh、RRC连接释放时长集合)在后续使用过程中可能会更新。
在一些实施例中，终端可定时或不定时地重复上述流程以获取最优的RRC连接释放定时器时长以及门限组，并进行配置。
在另一些实施例中，终端不仅仅是根据当前采集的样本数据进行学习以得到最优组合，而是可基于多次获得的样本数据的数据传输统计结果进行学习，比如，可获取当前日期的前一天采集的样本数据的数据传输统计结果以及前两天采集的样本数据的传输统计结果，再加上当前采集的样本数据的数据传输统计结果进行学习，从而得到当前最优组合。可选的，可采用最近几天(比如5天)采集的样本数据的数据传输统计结果，生成最优组合。
在其他一些实施例中，终端可以根据当前采集的样本数据的数据传输统计结果学习到的最优组合，然后将该最优组合与历史的最优组合进行加权平均，从而生成新的最优组合。比如，当前日期学习到的最优组合中的门限组为(ThLow1、ThHigh1)，当前日期前一天学习到的最优组合中的门限组为(ThLow2、ThHigh2)，则可按照以下公式进行加权平均：
ThLow3＝a*ThLow1+(1-a)*ThLow2
ThHigh 3＝b*ThHigh 1+(1-b)*ThHigh 2
其中，a和b分别为加权系数，a和b均为小于1的正数。a和b的取值可以相同也可以不同。可选的，a和b均大于0.5，从而使得的当前学习到的门限的权重最大。
将加权平均后的门限组(ThLow3、ThHigh3)作为更新后的门限组。
根据图8所示的获得RRC连接释放定时器时长集合以及门限组的方法，可以在线基 于前台应用程序的数据包收发状态，设定最优的RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长，使得确定出的RRC连接定时器的计时时长与该前台业务的业务收发状态相匹配，从而降低终端的功耗。
需要说明的是，图8所示流程的各步骤的时序仅为示例，本申请实施例对此不作限制，比如S801和S802的顺序可以调整先后顺序，也可以并行执行。
(二)通过离线学习方式获得RRC连接释放定时器时长集合以及门限。
该方法可由终端执行，也可由其他设备执行，比如针对一个或多个应用程序，获取统计时长内目标应用程序作为前台应用程序时的样本数据，将样本数据发送给计算设备，由计算设备按照图8所示的方法确定该目标应用程序或目标应用程序所属的应用类型对应的最优的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合以及门限组，或者将学习到的门限组以及RRC连接释放定时器时长集合作为该目标应用程序所属的应用类型对应的门限组以及RRC连接释放定时器时长集合，也可以将学习到的门限组以及RRC连接释放定时器时长集合作为通用的门限组以及通用的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合。
其中，样本数据可由终端统计得到，也可由网络设备统计得到，比如，终端对统计时长内发送的数据进行统计得到样本数据，或者网络设备对统计时长内接收的数据进行统计得到样本数据。
其中，所述计算设备可以是任意具有数据计算处理能力，并能够实现图8所示流程中的数据处理功能的设备。
在一些实施例中，通过离线学习方式可以获得一个或多个应用类型各自对应的最优的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合以及门限组，进而可以形成RRC连接释放查找表，RRC连接释放查找表用于存储应用类型信息与RRC连接释放定时器时长集合以及门限的对应关系，根据应用类型信息查询该RRC连接释放查找表，可以获得该应用类型对应的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合以及门限组。
表1示例性示出了一种RRC连接释放查找表。
表1
Figure PCTCN2021121401-appb-000017
在另一些实施例中，通过离线学习方式可以获得一个或多个应用程序各自对应的最优的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合以及门限组，进而可以形成如表2所示的RRC连接释放查找表，RRC连接释放查找表用于存储应用程序信息与RRC连接释放定时器时长集合以及门限的对应关系，根据应用程序信息查询该RRC连接释放查找表，可以获得该应用程序对应的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合以及门限组。其中，应用程序信息用于识别应用程序，应用程序信息可以包括应用程序标识、应用程序名称。
表2示例性示出了一种RRC连接释放查找表。
表2
Figure PCTCN2021121401-appb-000018
通过离线学习方式获得RRC连接释放定时器时长集合以及门限组并进行配置，使得终端可以节省在线学习RRC连接释放定时器时长集合以及门限所使用的计算资源。
(三)通过离线学习方式获得RRC连接释放定时器时长集合以及门限。
该方法可由终端执行，也可由其他设备执行，比如针对一个或多个应用程序，获取统计时长内各应用程序的样本数据，将样本数据发送给计算设备，由计算设备通过数学计算方法确定该一个或多个应用程序各自对应的最优的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合以及门限组。
以下离线学习方法中，以采用指数切分方法生成RRC连接释放定时器时长集合为例描述，该思想可应用到采用其他方法生成RRC连接释放定时器时长集合的在线学习方法中。
图12示例性示出了在线学习方法的流程，如图12所示，下面以一个目标应用程序为例描述，在线学习方法可包括以下步骤：
S1201：获取终端在统计时长内传输的数据作为样本数据，对样本数据进行统计得到数据包间隔分布特性。
该步骤的具体实现方法，与图8中相应步骤的实现方式相同，在此不再重复。
S1202：确定至少一个候选RRC连接释放定时器时长集合。
该步骤的具体实现方式，与图8中相应步骤的实现方式相同，在此不再重复。
S1203：根据数据包间隔分布特性，确定每个候选RRC连接释放定时器时长集合对应的至少一个候选门限组。
该步骤的具体实现方式，与图8中相应步骤的实现方式相同，在此不再重复。
S1204：分别将每个候选集合rrcTimerSet与相应候选集合rrcTimerSet对应的每个候选门限组进行组合，得到至少一个候选组合。
其中，每个候选组合，包括一个候选RRC连接释放定时器时长集合以及一个该候选RRC连接释放定时器时长集合对应的候选门限组。
该步骤的具体实现方式，与图8中相应步骤的实现方式相同，在此不再重复。
S1205：根据数据包间隔分布特性，以及每个候选组合，分别确定每个候选组合对应的马尔科夫状态转移概率矩阵。
其中，一个候选RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中的元素为RRC连接释放定时器时长， 对应一个马尔科夫状态。
马尔科夫状态转移概率矩阵P t表示为：
Figure PCTCN2021121401-appb-000019
其中，K表示马尔科夫状态的个数。P 1,1表示状态1保持状态1不变的概率，P 1,2表示状态1跳转到状态2的概率，以此类推。非相邻的状态之间不存在跳转可能，因此非相邻的状态之间相互跳转的概率为0，比如P 1,3＝0。上述马尔科夫状态转移概率矩阵P t中，每行的概率之和等于1。
以对接收到的数据包的数量进行统计为例，当在RRC连接态状态T i下，数据包到达数目小于第二门限ThLow时，从当前状态T i跳转到状态T i+1的概率P i,i+1为：
Figure PCTCN2021121401-appb-000020
其中，t session表示数据包间隔，P rob(t session<T i)表示数据包间隔小于状态T i对应的RRC连接释放定时器时长的概率，n为正整数。
当在RRC连接态状态下T i，数据包到达数目达到第一门限ThHigh时，从当前状态T i跳转到状态T i-1的概率P i,i-1为：
P i,i-1＝P rob(t session<T i) ThHigh
当在RRC连接态状态T i下，数据包到达数目大于或等于ThLow且小于或等于ThHigh时，保持当前态T i不变的概率P i,i为：
P i,i＝1-P i,i-1-P i,i+1
当目标应用程序的概率密度函数已知时，马尔科夫状态T i的概率S t＝(P rob(T 1),P rob(T 2)…P rob(T K))可以由马尔科夫状态转移概率矩阵求出：
S t＝S 0P t
其中，S 0为初始状态概率，P t为马尔科夫状态转移概率矩阵。
S1206：根据每个候选组合对应的马尔科夫状态转移概率矩阵，计算用于评价最优候选组合的目标函数的值，并根据目标函数的值，确定最优的候选组合。
该最优候选组合中的门限组，可被配置为用于确定是否调整RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的门限组，该最优候选组合中的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合可用于确定RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的目标值。
根据图8所示的流程，可以学习得到通用的门限组以及通用的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合。如果在S801中获取当某个目标应用程序为前台应用程序时接收到的数据包作为样本数据，可以学习得到该应用程序对应的门限组以及RRC连接释放定时器时长集合。如果在S801中获取某一类型的应用程序中具有代表性的应用程序作为前台应用程序时接收到的数据包作为样本数据，可以将学习到的门限组以及RRC连接释放定时器时长集合 作为该应用类型对应的门限组以及RRC连接释放定时器时长集合。
在一些实施例中，目标函数可设置为最小化平均连接态驻留时间函数，该函数可表示为：
Figure PCTCN2021121401-appb-000021
其中：
Figure PCTCN2021121401-appb-000022
根据上述目标函数，目标函数值越小，表明处于连接态的时间越小，终端节省的功耗就越多。因此，可选择最小目标函数值所对应的候选组合，作为该目标应用程序对应的最优候选组合。
在一些实施例中，通过上述离线学习方式可以获得一个或多个应用类型或应用程序各自对应的最优的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合以及门限组，进而可以形成如表1或表2所示的RRC连接释放查找表。
需要说明的是，图12所示流程的各步骤的时序仅为示例，本申请实施例对此不作限制，比如S1201和S1202的顺序可以调整先后顺序，也可以并行执行。
根据上述一个实施例或者多个实施例的组合，下面以具体应用场景为例，对本申请实施例的实现过程进行描述。
场景一
对于尚未配置门限组以及RRC连接释放定时器时长集合的手机，比如新购买的手机，可按照系统约定的RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长，对RRC连接释放进行控制，比如，当基站为该手机默认配置的10秒长的RRC连接释放定时器超时的时候，基站释放与该手机的RRC连接。
当手机开机或者开机解锁后，如果用户点击手机屏幕上显示的用户界面中互联网长视频类应用程序A(比如
Figure PCTCN2021121401-appb-000023
视频应用)的图标以启动应用程序A，则应用处理器可以监听到该应用程序启动，并可以获得该应用程序的名称。当用户在该应用程序A的界面中触发一个电影缩略图形式的控件以请求播放该电影时，应用程序获得该事件后向应用处理器发送数据获取请求(比如HTTP get请求)，以请求获取该电影的视频数据；应用处理器向调制解调器发送传输控制协议(transmission control protocol，TCP)连接建立信息，该TCP连接建立信息可承载在收发数据的请求中发送给调制解调器，该请求具体可以是AT(attention)命令；调制解调器根据该AT命令与基站建立RRC连接。其中，该AT命令未携带用于指示RRC连接释放时长的指示信息。
当手机开机或者开机解锁后，如果用户点击手机屏幕上显示的用户界面中游戏类应用程序(比如赛车游戏)的图标以启动游戏应用，则应用处理器可以监听到该游戏应用启动，并可以获得该游戏应用的名称。当用户在该游戏应用的界面中触发“开始游戏”的选项后，游戏应用向应用处理器发送数据获取请求(比如UDP请求)；应用处理器向调制解调器发送用户数据报协议(user datagram protocol，UDP)数据，该UDP数据可承载在收发数据的请求中发送给调制解调器，该请求具体可以是AT命令；调制解调器根据该AT命令与基站建立RRC连接。其中，该AT命令未携带用于指示RRC连接释放时长的指示信息。
应用处理器确定是否需要设置RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长，如果确定需要，则 应用处理器可进一步向调制解调器发送AT命令，该命令中可携带用于指示RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的指示信息，以使得调制解调器将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长设置为等于该指示信息所指示的计时时长值，当RRC连接释放定时器超时时，手机向基站请求释放RRC连接；如果确定不需要设置RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长，则应用处理器不会向调制解调器发送用于设置RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的AT命令，当基站上为该手机默认配置的10秒长的RRC连接释放定时器超时的时候，基站释放与该手机的RRC连接。
本场景中，由于手机中尚未配置门限组以及RRC连接释放定时器时长集合，因此应用处理器确定无需向调制解调器发送用于设置RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的AT命令。具体地，以当前应用程序A被启动为例，应用处理器(AP)确定应用程序A所属的应用类型，根据该应用类型查询查找表。由于当前尚未配置查找表，因此查询失败，同时由于当前尚未配置通用门限组以及通用RRC连接释放定时器时长，因此应用处理器(AP)确定无需向调制解调器发送用于设置RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的AT命令。
本场景中，在手机亮屏状态下，RRC连接释放由基站进行控制，当基站为该手机配置的10秒长的RRC连接释放定时器超时时，基站释放与该手机的RRC连接。可选的，在手机息屏后，若1秒内没有数据传输，则在1秒后手机向基站请求释放RRC连接。
当手机与基站再次建立RRC连接后，如果手机上没有发生应用程序的前后台切换，也没有新的应用程序启动并请求获取数据，则在手机亮屏状态下，RRC连接释放由基站进行控制，比如当基站为该手机配置的10秒长的RRC连接释放定时器超时时，基站释放与该手机间的RRC连接。
场景二
对于尚未配置门限组以及RRC连接释放定时器时长集合的手机，在使用一段时间后，手机的应用处理器(AP)采用上述自学习方式学习得到用于确定是否需要调整RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的门限组，以及用于确定RRC连接释放定时器计时时长目标值的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合(以下简称rrcTimerSet)。举例来说，门限组以及RRC连接释放定时器时长集合的配置情况可包括：
情况1：一个通用RRC连接释放定时器时长集合以及一个通用门限组；
情况2：多个RRC连接释放定时器时长集合以及多个门限组，其中，每个RRC连接释放定时器时长集合对应一个应用程序，每个门限组对应一个应用程序；
情况3：多个RRC连接释放定时器时长集合以及多个门限组，其中，每个RRC连接释放定时器时长集合对应一个应用类型，每个门限组对应一个应用类型；
情况4：在情况2的基础上还包括一个通用RRC连接释放定时器时长集合以及一个通用门限组；
情况5：在情况3的基础上还包括一个通用RRC连接释放定时器时长集合以及一个通用门限组。
其中，一个RRC连接释放定时器时长集合中至少包括两个时长值，一个门限组中可包括一个门限或两个门限，比如包括ThHigh和ThLow，ThHigh≥ThLow。
下面以上述情况4所配置的门限组以及RRC连接释放定时器时长集合为例描述。
比如，应用处理器(AP)中设置有：
rrcTimerSetA＝{10.0,4.65,2.16,1.01}，门限组A(ThHighA，ThLowA)；
rrcTimerSetB＝{9.01,3.0,1.0}，门限组B(ThHighB，ThLowB)；
rrcTimerSetUN＝{6.51,2.0}，门限组UN(ThHighUN，ThLowUN)。
应用处理器(AP)中可设置有如表3所示的查找表：
表3
Figure PCTCN2021121401-appb-000024
其中，rrcTimerSetA和门限组A与互联网长视频类应用程序对应，rrcTimerSetB和门限组B与互联网短视频类应用程序对应，rrcTimerSetUN为通用RRC连接释放定时器时长集合，门限组UN为通用门限组，各rrcTimerSet中的时长按照从大到小的顺序排序。
场景三
对于已经配置有门限组以及RRC连接释放定时器时长集合的手机，用户开机后，手机进行网络接入。在手机开机后，如果用户没有开启任何应用程序，则手机保持非连接态。
在手机开机或者开机解锁后，在手机处于非连接态下，如果用户点击手机屏幕上显示的用户界面中互联网长视频类应用程序A的图标以启动长视频应用程序A，并触发长视频应用程序A的用户界面中某个电影的选项后(比如点击该电影缩略图形式的控件以请求获取该电影的视频数据)，长视频应用程序A获得该事件后向应用处理器发送TCP连接信息，应用处理器根据该TCP连接信息向调制解调器发送AT命令，调制解调器(modem)根据该AT命令，与基站建立RRC连接。
应用处理器进一步确定是否需要设置RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长。本场景中，应用处理器确定当前的前台应用程序为应用程序A，确定应用程序A所属的应用类型为互联网长视频类应用，根据该应用类型查询如表3所示的查找表，得到与该应用类型对应的门限组A以及RRC连接释放定时器时长集合rrcTimerSetA＝{10.0,4.65,2.16,1.01}，确定需要设置RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长，因此向调制解调器发送AT命令，以指示调制解调器将RRC连接释放定时器的时长设置为该集合rrcTimerSetA中的最大时长10秒。RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长被设置后该定时器以设置后的计时时长开始计时。
示例性地，该AT命令中各信息域的值分别为：
第一信息域的值等于1；
第二信息域的值等于1，表示“enable OPEN_RRC_QUICKLY_RELEASE_FEATURE”；
第三信息域预留；
第四信息域的值para1＝0，表示RRC连接释放后进入空闲态；
第五信息域的值para2＝10，表示将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长设置为10秒。
应用处理器(AP)进一步启动一计数器counter，用以在RRC连接态下对接收到的数 据包的个数进行计数。长视频应用程序A运行期间，网络侧发送的数据到达手机的调制解调器(modem)，经调制解调器解调处理后发送给应用处理器(AP)，应用处理器(AP)将该数据在应用程序A的视频播放窗口中播放。在此过程中，计数器counter对手机接收到的数据包个数进行计数，其中，手机接收到的数据包包括网络侧发送的长视频应用程序A的数据包，进一步的，可能还包括有数据传输的后台应用接收的数据包。
手机在接收到网络侧发送的电影视频数据后缓存到播放器的缓冲区，并将缓冲区中缓存的视频数据在场视频应用程序A的视频窗口中播放。在RRC连接建立后的第一时间段，由于网络性能较好，播放器的缓冲区中的数据量在较短时间内达到较高容量占比(比如100％)，长视频应用程序A暂停向网络侧发送视频数据下载请求，使得网络侧不再发送视频数据给该手机，当手机在10秒钟的时间内都未接收到网络侧的数据时，RRC连接释放定时器超时，此时手机向基站发送请求以请求释放RRC连接，基站接受该请求，释放与该手机之间的RRC连接。应用处理器读取计数器counter的计数值，并判断该计数值大于长视频类应用程序对应的门限组A中的ThLowA，因此确定无需调整RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长，无需向调制解调器发送用于设置RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的AT命令，此时RRC连接释放定时器的时长仍为10秒。应用处理器将该计数器counter清零，以便在RRC连接重新建立后对接收到的数据包进行计数。
在此后(即上述RRC连接释放后的)第二时间段，播放器的缓冲区中的数据量下降到较低阈值(比如40％)，长视频应用程序A向应用处理器发送数据收发请求，应用处理器向调制解调器发送AT命令，以触发调制解调器与基站重新建立RRC连接。由于应用处理器没有监听到发生应用程序前后台切换行为，也没有监听到有新的应用程序开启，则应用处理器无需向调制解调器发送用于设置RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的AT命令，因此当RRC连接重新建立后，手机上RRC连接释放定时器的时长仍为10秒。
在此后(即上述RRC连接重新建立后的)第三时间段，用户在观看电影的过程中点击播放器窗口中的暂停播放控制键，长视频应用程序A根据该用户操作事件暂停向网络侧发送下载请求，由于长视频应用程序A暂停发送下载请求，因此网络侧不再向该手机发送视频数据，手机在持续一段时间内没有接收到数据包，当该持续时间长度达到10秒时，RRC连接释放定时器超时，手机向基站发送请求以请求释放RRC连接，基站接受该请求，释放与该手机之间的RRC连接。应用处理器读取计数器counter的计数值，并判断该计数值小于长视频类应用程序对应的门限组A中的ThLowA，因此确定需要降低RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长，因此从rrcTimerSetA＝{10.0,4.65,2.16,1.01}中选取4.65秒作为RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的目标值(由于当前RRC连接释放定时器时长为10秒，因此从该集合中选取比10秒小的所有时长值中最大的一个)，并向调制解调器发送AT命令，以指示调制解调器将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长设置为等于该目标值4.65秒。RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长被设置后该定时器以设置后的计时时长开始计时。可选的，应用处理器在确定RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的目标值后，也可在RRC连接重新建立后向调制解调器发送用于设置RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的AT命令。进一步的，应用处理器将该计数器counter清零，以便在RRC连接重新建立后对接收到的数据包进行计数。
在此后(即上述RRC连接释放后的)第四时间段，用户点击播放器窗口中的播放控制键，以从暂停播放恢复为正常播放，长视频应用程序A根据该用户操作事件向应用处理器发送HTTP get请求以请求获取视频数据，应用处理器向调制解调器发送AT命令以使得 调制解调器与基站重新建立RRC连接，RRC连接建立后，由于应用处理器没有监听到发生应用程序前后台切换行为，也没有监听到有新的应用程序开启，因此无需调整RRC连接释放定时器计时时长，RRC连接释放定时器计时时长仍保持为4.65秒。手机接收网络侧根据手机发送的下载请求向该手机发送视频数据，但由于当前网络性能较差，使得手机在持续一段时间内没有接收到数据包，当该持续时间长度达到4.65秒时，RRC连接释放定时器超时，手机向基站发送请求以请求释放RRC连接，基站未接受该请求，保持与该手机之间的RRC连接。应用处理器读取计数器counter的计数值，并判断该计数值小于长视频类应用程序对应的门限组A中的ThLowA，因此确定需要降低RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长，因此从rrcTimerSetA＝{10.0,4.65,2.16,1.01}中选取2.16秒作为RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的目标值(由于当前RRC连接释放定时器计时时长为4.65秒，因此从该集合中选取比4.65秒小的所有时长值中最大的一个)，并向调制解调器发送AT命令，以指示调制解调器将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长设置为等于该目标值2.16秒。RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长被设置后该定时器以设置后的计时时长开始计时。可选的，应用处理器在确定RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的目标值后，也可在RRC连接重新建立后向调制解调器发送用于设置RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的AT命令。进一步的，应用处理器将该计数器counter清零，以便在RRC连接重新建立后对接收到的数据包进行计数。
在此后(即上述RRC连接释放定时器超时后降低RRC连接释放定时器计时时长到2.16秒)的第五时间段，用户点击增大播放倍速的控制键，长视频应用程序A根据该用户操作事件向网络侧发送下载请求，网络侧根据手机发送的下载请求向该手机发送视频数据，此时网络性能恢复为较好状态。由于用户点击了增大播放倍速的控制键，因此手机向网络侧请求下载的视频数据的数据量较大，使得手机在较短时间内接收到大量视频数据包，当计数器counter的计数值达到长视频类应用程序对应的门限组A中的ThHighA时，应用处理器确定需要增大RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长，因此从rrcTimerSetA＝{10.0,4.65,2.16,1.01}中选取4.65秒作为RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的目标值(由于当前RRC连接释放定时器计时时长为2.16秒，因此从该集合中选取比2.16秒大的所有时长值中最小的一个)，并向调制解调器发送AT命令，以指示调制解调器将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长设置为等于该目标值4.65秒。RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长被设置后该定时器以设置后的计时时长开始计时。进一步的，应用处理器将该计数器counter清零，以便在调整RRC连接释放定时器时长后对接收到的数据包进行计数。
在此后(即上述将RRC连接释放定时器增大到4.65秒后)的第六时间段，用户通过触控操作返回到主页面(即手机桌面)，从而将长视频应用程序A从前台切换到后台，此时，手机上没有前台应用程序。应用处理器监听到长视频应用程序A从前台切换到后台的事件后，由于没有监听到有应用程序切换到前台，也没有监听到有应用程序被开启，因此确定保持当前RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长为4.65秒不变，无需向调制解调器发送用于设置RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的AT命令。进一步的，应用处理器可保持计数器counter继续对手机接收到的数据包个数进行计数。
在此后(即上述将长视频应用程序A切换到后台)的第七时间段，用户通过触控操作将应用程序A切换到前台。应用处理器监听到长视频应用程序A从后台切换到前台的事件后，根据该应用类型查询如表3所示的查找表，得到与该应用类型对应的门限组A以及RRC连接释放定时器时长集合rrcTimerSetA＝{10.0,4.65,2.16,1.01}，确定需要设置RRC 连接释放定时器的计时时长，因此向调制解调器发送AT命令，以指示调制解调器将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长设置为该集合rrcTimerSetA中的最大时长10秒。RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长被设置后该定时器以设置后的计时时长开始计时。应用处理器将计数器counter清零，以便在调整RRC连接释放定时器计时时长后重新开始对接收到的数据包的个数进行计数。
在长视频应用程序A作为前台应用程序运行期间，在RRC连接态下，用户开启了短视频应用程序B(比如抖音应用程序)，则长视频应用程序A被切换为后台应用，短视频应用程序B为前台应用程序。应用处理器监听短视频应用程序B被开启且当前作为前台应用程序运行，则确定应用程序B所属的应用类型为互联网短视频类应用，根据该应用类型查询如表3所示的查找表，得到与该应用类型对应的门限组B以及RRC连接释放定时器时长集合rrcTimerSetB＝{9.01,3.0,1.0}，向调制解调器发送AT命令，以指示调制解调器将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长设置为该集合rrcTimerSetB中的最大时长9.01秒。RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长被设置后该定时器以设置后的计时时长开始计时。进一步的，应用处理器将计数器counter清零，以便在调整RRC连接释放定时器计时时长后重新开始对接收到的数据包的个数进行计数。
在场视频应用程序A作为后台应用程序运行，短视频应用程序B作为前台应用程序运行期间，在RRC连接态下，用户开启社交应用程序C(比如微信应用)，使得当前手机上，社交应用程序C作为前台应用程序运行，应用程序A和应用程序B作为后台应用程序运行。应用处理器监听到社交应用程序C被启动并作为前台应用程序运行后，确定社交应用程序C所属的应用类型，根据该应用类型查询如表3所示的查找表，未查找到与该应用类型对应的门限组以及RRC连接释放定时器时长集合(即未针对该应用类型配置对应的门限组和RRC连接释放定时器时长集合)，则获取通用门限组UN以及通用RRC连接释放定时器时长集合rrcTimerSetUN＝{6.51,2.0}，向调制解调器发送AT命令，以指示调制解调器将RRC连接释放定时器的时长设置为该集合rrcTimerSetUN中的最大时长6.51秒。RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长被设置后该定时器以设置后的计时时长开始计时。进一步的，应用处理器将计数器counter清零，以便在调整RRC连接释放定时器时长后重新开始对接收到的数据包的个数进行计数。
在社交应用程序C被启动后，用户使用该应用程序浏览公众号内容网页。由于一个网页的数据量可能较少，且用户浏览该网页的时间较长，因此在一段持续的时间内可能没有数据传输。当该持续时间达到6.51秒时，RRC连接释放定时器超时，手机请求基站释放RRC连接，基站接受该请求，释放与该手机之间的RRC连接。应用处理器将当前计数器counter的计数值与门限组UN中的ThLowUN进行比较，确定当前计数器counter的计数值小于ThLowUN，因此确定需要降低RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长，因此从rrcTimerSetUN＝{6.51,2.0}中选取2.0秒作为RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的目标值(由于当前RRC连接释放定时器计时时长为6.51秒，因此从该集合中选取比6.51秒小的2.0秒)，并向调制解调器发送AT命令，以指示调制解调器将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长设置为等于该目标值2.0秒。RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长被设置后该定时器以设置后的计时时长开始计时。可选的，应用处理器在确定RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的目标值后，也可在RRC连接重新建立后向调制解调器发送用于设置RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的AT命令。进一步的，应用处理器将该计数器counter清零，以便在RRC连接重 新建立后对接收到的数据包进行计数。
在RRC连接释放后，用户通过屏幕触控操作选择社交应用程序C中的视频进行观看，社交应用程序C获得该事件后向应用处理器发送连接信息，应用处理器根据该连接信息向调制解调器发送AT命令，调制解调器根据该AT命令，与基站建立RRC连接。由于应用处理器当前没有监听到有应用程序发生前后台切换，也没有监听到有新的应用程序被启动，因此确定无需调整RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长，因此RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长仍为2.0秒。由于用户选择的视频具有较大数据量且当前网络性能较好，因此在较短时间内手机接收到较大量的视频数据包，当应用处理器判断计数器counter的计数值达到门限组UN中的ThHighUN时，确定需要增大RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长，因此从rrcTimerSetUN＝{6.51,2.0}中选取6.51秒作为RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的目标值(由于当前RRC连接释放定时器计时时长为2.0秒，因此从该集合中选取比2.0秒大的6.51秒)，并向调制解调器发送AT命令，以指示调制解调器将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长设置为等于该目标值6.51秒。RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长被设置后该定时器以设置后的计时时长开始计时。进一步的，应用处理器将计数器counter清零，以便在调整RRC连接释放定时器时长后重新开始对接收到的数据包的个数进行计数。
此后，用户关闭社交应用程序C，短视频应用程序B被切换到前台，应用处理器监听到该应用程序前后台切换事件，确定当前的前台应用程序为短视频应用程序B，则确定应用程序B所属的应用类型为互联网短视频类应用，根据该应用类型查询如表3所示的查找表，得到与该应用类型对应的门限组B以及RRC连接释放定时器时长集合rrcTimerSetB＝{9.01,3.0,1.0}，向调制解调器发送AT命令，以指示调制解调器将RRC连接释放定时器的时长设置为该集合rrcTimerSetB中的最大时长9.01秒，使得RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长从6.51秒调整到9.01秒。RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长被设置后该定时器以设置后的计时时长开始计时。进一步的，应用处理器将计数器counter清零，以便在调整RRC连接释放定时器时长后重新开始对接收到的数据包的个数进行计数。
此后，用户关闭社交应用程序B，长视频应用程序A被切换到前台，长视频应用程序A的播放窗口中的电影视频恢复播放。应用处理器监听到该应用程序前后台切换事件，确定当前的前台应用程序为长视频应用程序A，则确定应用程序A所属的应用类型为互联网长视频类应用，根据该应用类型查询如表3所示的查找表，得到与该应用类型对应的门限组A以及RRC连接释放定时器时长集合rrcTimerSetA＝{10.0,4.65,2.16,1.01}，向调制解调器发送AT命令，以指示调制解调器将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长设置为该集合rrcTimerSetA中的最大时长10.0秒，使得RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长从9.01秒调整到10.0秒。RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长被设置后该定时器以设置后的计时时长开始计时。进一步的，应用处理器将计数器counter清零，以便在调整RRC连接释放定时器时长后重新开始对接收到的数据包的个数进行计数。
此后(即上述应用程序C和应用程序B被依次关闭后应用程序A被切换到前台)，用户开启手机分屏模式(比如可通过设定的手势开启手机分屏模式)，使得手机的屏幕划分为两个分屏窗口(第一分屏窗口和第二分屏窗口)，其中第一分屏窗口中运行长视频应用程序A，第二分屏窗口中显示主页面(即手机桌面)，主页面中显示有应用程序图标。第二分屏窗口中当前未有应用程序被启动。由于应用处理器未监听到应用程序前后台切换事件，也未监听到有新的应用程序被启动，因此确定无需调整RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长， RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长仍为10.0秒。
此后，用户点击第二分屏窗口中短视频应用程序B的图标以在第二分屏窗口中开启短视频应用程序B。应用处理器监听到有应用程序被启动的事件，并确定当前为分屏模式(应用处理器可以获得分屏事件以得知手机当前处于分屏模式)，因此根据长视频应用程序A所属的长视频类应用类型和短视频应用程序B所属的短视频类应用类型的优先级，获取其中优先级高的短视频应用类型对应的门限组B和RRC连接释放定时器时长集合rrcTimerSetB＝{9.01,3.0,1.0}，向调制解调器发送AT命令，指示调制解调器将RRC连接释定时器的计时时长设置为该集合中的最大值9.01，使得RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长从10.0秒调整为9.01秒。RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长被设置后该定时器以设置后的计时时长开始计时。进一步的，应用处理器将计数器counter清零，以便在调整RRC连接释放定时器时长后重新开始对接收到的数据包的个数进行计数。
其中，可根据是否对时延敏感等因素设置不同应用类型的优先级。比如，可以将对时延敏感的应用程序所属的应用类型的优先级设置为较高，将对时延不敏感的应用程序所属的应用类型的优先级设置为较低。
可选的，作为选择优先级高的应用类型对应的门限组以及RRC连接释放定时器时长集合的替代方案，应用处理器也可从长视频应用程序A所属的长视频应用类型所对应的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合rrcTimerSetA＝{10.0,4.65,2.16,1.01}以及短视频应用程序B所属的短视频应用类型所对应的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合rrcTimerSetB＝{9.01,3.0,1.0}中，选取时长值较大的集合rrcTimerSetA以及该集合对应的门限组A，向调制解调器发送AT命令，指示调制解调器将RRC连接释定时器的计时时长设置为该集合中的最大值10.0。RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长被设置后该定时器以设置后的计时时长开始计时。
当短视频应用程序B在第二分屏窗口启动后，该短视频应用程序B需要播放系统推荐的或者用户已关注的短视频，因此向网络侧发送下载请求，以请求下载相应视频数据，网络侧根据该下载请求向该手机发送视频数据包，手机在接收到视频数据包后在该应用程序的播放窗口中播放。当用户通过触控操作暂停播放短视频应用程序B的播放窗口中的视频后，由于长视频应用程序A的播放窗口中的电影视频正在播放，手机持续向网络侧获取视频数据，使得计数器counter的计数值持续增加，当达到门限组B中的ThHighB(本实施例中以使用优先级高的短视频应用类型对应的门限组B以及rrcTimerSetB＝{9.01,3.0,1.0}为例描述)时，应用处理器确定需要调整RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长，由于当前RRC连接释放定时器的时长已经是rrcTimerSetB＝{9.01,3.0,1.0}中的最大值，因此应用处理器可以不向调制解调器发送用于设置RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的AT命令，当然也可以向调制解调器发送用于设置RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的AT命令，以使调制解调器将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长设置为9.01秒。进一步的，应用处理器将计数器counter的计数值清零，以便对后续接收到的数据包的个数进行计数。
当用户通过屏幕触控操作取消手机分屏模式使得短视频应用程序B被关闭且长视频应用程序A仍为前台应用程序后，应用处理器监听到上述事件，确定前台应用程序切换为仅有长视频应用程序A，则确定长视频应用程序A所属的应用类型为互联网长视频类应用，根据该应用类型查询如表3所示的查找表，得到与该应用类型对应的门限组A以及RRC连接释放定时器时长集合rrcTimerSetA＝{10.0,4.65,2.16,1.01}，向调制解调器发送AT命令，以指示调制解调器将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长设置为该集合rrcTimerSetA中 的最大时长10.0秒，使得RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长从9.01秒调整为10.0秒。RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长被设置后该定时器以设置后的计时时长开始计时。进一步的，应用处理器将计数器counter清零，以便在调整RRC连接释放定时器时长后重新开始对接收到的数据包的个数进行计数。
当用户关闭长视频应用程序A后，手机当前没有前台应用程序运行。应用处理器监听到长视频应用程序A被关闭的事件后，确定当前没有前台应用程序，因此可以保持当前RRC连接释放定时器的时长不变，因此应用处理器无需向调制解调器发送用于设置RRC连接释放定时器时长的AT命令。作为此种情况下(即应用处理器监听到应用程序关闭后当前没有前台应用程序)的一种替代方案，应用处理器也可以向调制解调器发送AT命令，以使调制解调器根据该AT命令将RRC连接释放定时器设置为无效状态或设置为非激活状态，在RRC连接释放定时器无效或非激活状态下，由基站对该手机与基站间的RRC连接的释放进行控制(比如，当持续10秒没有与该手机的数据传输时，基站释放与该手机间的RRC连接)。当有应用程序被开启时，应用处理器向调制解调器发送用于设置RRC连接释放定时器时长的AT命令，该AT命令可以使得RRC连接释放定时器被激活或有效，并可将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长设置为目标时长。
场景四
手机在使用过程中，获取统计时长内(比如1个小时)长视频应用程序A作为前台应用程序运行时的数据包接收情况，比如统计该统计时长内接收到的数据包的包间隔以获得数据包间隔分布特性，并基于该数据包间隔分布特性，采用图8所示的方式，学习得到一个RRC连接释放定时器时长集合以及一个门限组。新学习到的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合以及门限组将被配置为长视频应用程序A所属的应用类型所对应的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合以及门限组。
可在手机重新开机后，启用新学习到的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合以及门限组，也可在长视频应用程序A以及同类型的应用程序均被关闭后，或者所有前台运行的应用程序被关闭后，启用新学习到的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合和门限组。
对于长视频应用程序A所属的应用类型，当前使用的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合为rrcTimerSetA1＝{10.0,4.65,2.16,1.01}，当前使用的门限组为A1(ThHighA1，ThLowA1)，新学习到的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合为rrcTimerSetA2＝{10,5,2.5,1.25}，当前使用的门限组为A2(ThHighA2，ThLowA2)，则当手机上的前台应用程序均被关闭后，该新学习到的rrcTimerSetA2＝{10,5,2.5,1.25}以及门限组A2被启用。
此时，如果用户点击手机屏幕上互联网长视频类应用程序A的图标以启动长视频应用程序A，并触发长视频应用程序A的用户界面中某个电影的选项后(比如点击该电影缩略图形式的控件以请求获取该电影的视频数据)，长视频应用程序A获得该事件后向应用处理器发送TCP连接信息，应用处理器根据该TCP连接信息向调制解调器发送AT命令，调制解调器(modem)根据该AT命令，与基站建立RRC连接。
应用处理器确定当前的前台应用程序为应用程序A，确定应用程序A所属的应用类型为互联网长视频类应用，根据该应用类型查询如表3所示的查找表，得到与该应用类型对应的门限组A2以及RRC连接释放定时器时长集合rrcTimerSetA2＝{10,5,2.5,1.25}，确定需要设置RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长，因此向调制解调器发送AT命令，以指示调制解调器将RRC连接释放定时器的时长设置为该集合rrcTimerSetA中的最大时长10秒。RRC 连接释放定时器的计时时长被设置后该定时器以设置后的计时时长开始计时。
应用处理器(AP)进一步启动一计数器counter，用以在RRC连接态下对接收到的数据包的个数进行计数。长视频应用程序A运行期间，网络侧发送的数据到达手机的调制解调器(modem)，经调制解调器解调处理后发送给应用处理器(AP)，应用处理器(AP)将该数据在应用程序A的视频播放窗口中播放。在此过程中，计数器counter对手机接收到的数据包个数进行计数。
手机在接收到网络侧发送的电影视频数据后缓存到播放器的缓冲区，并将缓冲区中缓存的视频数据在场视频应用程序A的视频窗口中播放。在RRC连接建立后的第一时间段，由于网络性能较好，播放器的缓冲区中的数据量在较短时间内达到较高容量占比(比如90％)，长视频应用程序A暂停向网络侧发送视频数据下载请求，使得网络侧不再发送视频数据给该手机，当手机在10秒钟的时间内都未接收到网络侧的数据时，RRC连接释放定时器超时，此时手机向基站发送请求以请求释放RRC连接，基站接受该请求，释放与该手机之间的RRC连接。应用处理器读取计数器counter的计数值，并判断该计数值大于长视频类应用程序对应的门限组A2中的ThLowA2，因此确定无需调整RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长，无需向调制解调器发送用于设置RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的AT命令，此时RRC连接释放定时器的时长仍为10秒。应用处理器将该计数器counter清零，以便在RRC连接重新建立后对接收到的数据包进行计数。
在此后(即上述RRC连接释放后的)第二时间段，播放器的缓冲区中的数据量下降到较低阈值(比如40％)，长视频应用程序A向应用处理器发送数据收发请求，应用处理器向调制解调器发送AT命令，以触发调制解调器与基站重新建立RRC连接。由于应用处理器没有监听到发生应用程序前后台切换行为，也没有监听到有新的应用程序开启，则应用处理器无需向调制解调器发送用于设置RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的AT命令，因此当RRC连接重新建立后，手机上RRC连接释放定时器的时长仍为10秒。
在此后(即上述RRC连接重新建立后的)第三时间段，用户在观看电影的过程中点击播放器窗口中的暂停播放控制键，长视频应用程序A根据该用户操作事件暂停向网络侧发送下载请求，由于长视频应用程序A暂停发送下载请求，因此网络侧不再向该手机发送视频数据，手机在持续一段时间内没有接收到数据包，当该持续时间长度达到10秒时，RRC连接释放定时器超时，手机向基站发送请求以请求释放RRC连接，基站接受该请求，释放与该手机之间的RRC连接。应用处理器读取计数器counter的计数值，并判断该计数值小于长视频类应用程序对应的门限组A2中的ThLowA2，因此确定需要降低RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长，因此从rrcTimerSetA2＝{10,5,2.5,1.25}中选取5秒作为RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的目标值(由于当前RRC连接释放定时器时长为10秒，因此从该集合中选取比10秒小的所有时长值中最大的一个)，并向调制解调器发送AT命令，以指示调制解调器将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长设置为等于该目标值5秒。RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长被设置后该定时器以设置后的计时时长开始计时。可选的，应用处理器在确定RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的目标值后，也可在RRC连接重新建立后向调制解调器发送用于设置RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的AT命令。进一步的，应用处理器将该计数器counter清零，以便在RRC连接重新建立后对接收到的数据包进行计数。
在此后(即上述RRC连接释放后的)第四时间段，用户点击播放器窗口中的播放控制键，以从暂停播放恢复为正常播放，长视频应用程序A根据该用户操作事件向应用处理 器发送HTTP get请求以请求获取视频数据，应用处理器向调制解调器发送AT命令以使得调制解调器与基站重新建立RRC连接，RRC连接建立后，由于应用处理器没有监听到发生应用程序前后台切换行为，也没有监听到有新的应用程序开启，因此无需调整RRC连接释放定时器计时时长，RRC连接释放定时器计时时长仍保持为5秒。手机接收网络侧根据手机发送的下载请求向该手机发送视频数据，但由于当前网络性能较差，使得手机在持续一段时间内没有接收到数据包，当该持续时间长度达到5秒时，RRC连接释放定时器超时，手机向基站发送请求以请求释放RRC连接，基站未接受该请求，保持与该手机之间的RRC连接。应用处理器读取计数器counter的计数值，并判断该计数值小于长视频类应用程序对应的门限组A2中的ThLowA2，因此确定需要降低RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长，因此从rrcTimerSetA2＝{10,5,2.5,1.25}中选取2.5秒作为RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的目标值(由于当前RRC连接释放定时器计时时长为5秒，因此从该集合中选取比5秒小的所有时长值中最大的一个)，并向调制解调器发送AT命令，以指示调制解调器将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长设置为等于该目标值2.5秒。RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长被设置后该定时器以设置后的计时时长开始计时。可选的，应用处理器在确定RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的目标值后，也可在RRC连接重新建立后向调制解调器发送用于设置RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的AT命令。进一步的，应用处理器将该计数器counter清零，以便在RRC连接重新建立后对接收到的数据包进行计数。
在此后(即上述RRC连接释放定时器超时后降低RRC连接释放定时器计时时长到2.5秒)的第五时间段，用户点击增大播放倍速的控制键，长视频应用程序A根据该用户操作事件向网络侧发送下载请求，网络侧根据手机发送的下载请求向该手机发送视频数据，此时网络性能恢复为较好状态。由于用户点击了增大播放倍速的控制键，因此手机向网络侧请求下载的视频数据的数据量较大，使得手机在较短时间内接收到大量视频数据包，当计数器counter的计数值达到长视频类应用程序对应的门限组A2中的ThHighA2时，应用处理器确定需要增大RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长，因此从rrcTimerSetA2＝{10,5,2.5,1.25}中选取5秒作为RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的目标值(由于当前RRC连接释放定时器计时时长为2.5秒，因此从该集合中选取比2.5秒大的所有时长值中最小的一个)，并向调制解调器发送AT命令，以指示调制解调器将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长设置为等于该目标值5秒。RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长被设置后该定时器以设置后的计时时长开始计时。进一步的，应用处理器将该计数器counter清零，以便在调整RRC连接释放定时器时长后对接收到的数据包进行计数。
在此后(即上述将RRC连接释放定时器增大到5秒后)的第六时间段，用户通过触控操作返回到主页面(即手机桌面)，从而将长视频应用程序A从前台切换到后台，此时，手机上没有前台应用程序。应用处理器监听到长视频应用程序A从前台切换到后台的事件后，由于没有监听到有应用程序切换到前台，也没有监听到有应用程序被开启，因此确定保持当前RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长为5秒不变，无需向调制解调器发送用于设置RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的AT命令。进一步的，应用处理器可保持计数器counter继续对手机接收到的数据包个数进行计数。
在此后(即上述将长视频应用程序A切换到后台)的第七时间段，用户通过触控操作将应用程序A切换到前台。应用处理器监听到长视频应用程序A从后台切换到前台的事件后，根据该应用类型查询如表3所示的查找表，得到与该应用类型对应的门限组A2以及 RRC连接释放定时器时长集合rrcTimerSetA2＝{10,5,2.5,1.25}，确定需要设置RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长，因此向调制解调器发送AT命令，以指示调制解调器将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长设置为该集合rrcTimerSetA2中的最大时长10秒。RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长被设置后该定时器以设置后的计时时长开始计时。应用处理器将计数器counter清零，以便在调整RRC连接释放定时器计时时长后重新开始对接收到的数据包的个数进行计数。
本申请的一些实施例中，可以在手机亮屏的状态和息屏的状态下，采用本申请实施例提供的上述方式调整RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长。进一步的，当手机息屏后，应用处理器无需向调制解调器发送用于设置RRC连接释放定时器的AT命令，从而使得RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长保持不变。当手机亮屏后，应用处理器无需向调制解调器发送用于设置RRC连接释放定时器计时时长的AT命令，从而使得RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长保持不变。
本申请的另一些实施例中，作为一种替代方案，当手机息屏后，应用处理器向调制解调器发送AT命令，使得调制解调器将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长设置为一固定值(比如2秒)，并在手机息屏状态下保持RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长不变。当手机处于息屏状态下，RRC连接释放定时器超时时，手机向基站发送请求，以请求释放基站与该手机之间的RRC连接，基站可以根据数据传输需求，确定是否接受该请求，比如，当基站判断后续有数据需要发送给该手机，则拒绝该手机的请求，仍保持与该手机间的RRC连接。当手机亮屏后(如果设置了屏幕锁，则在亮屏并对屏幕解锁后)，应用处理器确定需要调整RRC连接释放定时器计时时长，采用调用topActivity.getPackageName()函数的方式或其他方式，确定当前前台应用程序的名称，根据前台应用程序所属的应用类型查询对应的RRC连接释放定时器时长集合，向调制解调器发送AT命令，使得调制解调器将RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长设置为该集合中的最大值。RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长被设置后该定时器以设置后的计时时长开始计时。进一步的，应用处理器将计数器清零以重新开始对接收的数据包个数进行计数，从而使得当在手机亮屏状态下采用本申请实施例提供的方法对RRC连接释放定时器的计时时长进行动态调整。
以上实施例中所使用的术语只是为了描述特定实施例的目的，而并非旨在作为对本申请的限制。如在本申请的说明书和所附权利要求书中所使用的那样，单数表达形式“一个”、“一种”、“所述”、“上述”、“该”和“这一”旨在也包括例如“一个或多个”这种表达形式，除非其上下文中明确地有相反指示。还应当理解，在本申请实施例中，“一个或多个”是指一个、两个或两个以上；“和/或”，描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系；例如，A和/或B，可以表示：单独存在A，同时存在A和B，单独存在B的情况，其中A、B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。
在本说明书中描述的参考“一个实施例”或“一些实施例”等意味着在本申请的一个或多个实施例中包括结合该实施例描述的特定特征、结构或特点。由此，在本说明书中的不同之处出现的语句“在一个实施例中”、“在一些实施例中”、“在其他一些实施例中”、“在另外一些实施例中”等不是必然都参考相同的实施例，而是意味着“一个或多个但不是所有的实施例”，除非是以其他方式另外特别强调。术语“包括”、“包含”、“具有”及它们的变形都意味着“包括但不限于”，除非是以其他方式另外特别强调。
上述本申请提供的实施例中，从电子设备(例如手机)作为执行主体的角度对本申请 实施例提供的方法进行了介绍。为了实现上述本申请实施例提供的方法中的各功能，终端可以包括硬件结构和/或软件模块，以硬件结构、软件模块、或硬件结构加软件模块的形式来实现上述各功能。上述各功能中的某个功能以硬件结构、软件模块、还是硬件结构加软件模块的方式来执行，取决于技术方案的特定应用程序和设计约束条件。
以上实施例中所用，根据上下文，术语“当…时”或“当…后”可以被解释为意思是“如果…”或“在…后”或“响应于确定…”或“响应于检测到…”。类似地，根据上下文，短语“在确定…时”或“如果检测到(所陈述的条件或事件)”可以被解释为意思是“如果确定…”或“响应于确定…”或“在检测到(所陈述的条件或事件)时”或“响应于检测到(所陈述的条件或事件)”。另外，在上述实施例中，使用诸如第一、第二之类的关系术语来区份一个实体和另一个实体，而并不限制这些实体之间的任何实际的关系和顺序。
在上述实施例中，可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时，可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序指令时，全部或部分地产生按照本发明实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中，或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输，例如，所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质，(例如，软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如，DVD)、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘Solid State Disk(SSD))等。
需要指出的是，本专利申请文件的一部分包含受著作权保护的内容。除了对专利局的专利文件或记录的专利文档内容制作副本以外，著作权人保留著作权。

Claims (24)

  1. 一种无线资源控制RRC连接释放控制方法，应用于终端，其特征在于，所述终端存储有第一类应用程序对应的第一定时器的定时时长，所述第一类应用程序对应的所述第一定时器的定时时长包含至少两个时长值，所述第一定时器为所述终端处于RRC连接态时使用的定时器，当所述终端处于RRC连接态时，所述第一定时器开始计时，当所述终端接收到所述网络设备发送的数据时，所述第一定时器复位，所述方法还包括：
    当终端的第一应用程序运行到前台时，所述终端确定所述第一应用程序的应用类型；
    判断所述第一应用程序的应用类型是否属于所述第一应用类型；
    当所述第一应用程序的应用类型属于所述第一应用类型时，所述终端从所述至少两个时长值中确定出第一时长值作为所述第一定时器的定时时长；
    检测到针对所述第一应用程序的预设操作，所述终端与网络设备建立RRC连接；
    在所述终端与所述网络设备建立所述RRC连接时，所述第一定时器开始计时；
    当所述第一定时器的计时值超过所述第一时长值时，所述终端请求所述网络设备释放所述RRC连接。
  2. 一种无线资源控制RRC连接释放控制方法，其特征在于，包括：
    当终端的第一应用程序运行在前台期间，确定所述第一应用程序对应的第一定时器的定时时长，所述第一定时器为所述终端处于RRC连接态时使用的定时器，当所述终端处于RRC连接态时，所述第一定时器开始计时，当所述终端与网络设备存在信息交互时，所述第一定时器复位；
    检测到针对所述第一应用程序的预设操作时，所述终端与网络设备建立RRC连接；
    在所述终端与所述网络设备建立所述RRC连接时，所述第一定时器开始计时；
    当所述第一定时器的计时值超过所述定时时长时，所述终端请求所述网络设备释放所述RRC连接。
  3. 如权利要求2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述信息交互包含以下至少一种情况：
    所述终端接收到所述网络设备发送的下行数据；
    所述终端接收到所述网络设备发送的下行信令；
    所述终端向所述网络设备发送上行数据；
    所述终端向所述网络设备发送上行信令。
  4. 如权利要求2或3所述的方法，其特征在于，所述确定所述第一应用程序对应的第一定时器的定时时长，包括：
    确定所述第一应用程序所属的应用类型对应的第一定时器的定时时长。
  5. 如权利要求4所述的方法，其特征在于，所述确定所述第一应用程序所属的应用类型对应第一定时器的定时时长，包括：
    若所述第一应用程序所属的应用类型为第一应用类型，则所述第一定时器的定时时长为所述第一应用类型对应的定时时长；
    若所述第一应用程序所属的应用类型为与所述第一应用类型不同的第二应用类型，则所述第一定时器的定时长为所述第二应用类型对应的定时时长，所述第二应用类型对应的定时时长与所述第一类型对应的定时时长相同或不同。
  6. 如权利要求2-5任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述确定所述第一应用程序对 应的第一定时器的定时时长之后，所述方法还包括：
    对所述终端处于所述RRC连接态下的数据传输量进行统计；
    基于统计结果，对所述第一定时器的定时时长进行调整。
  7. 如权利要求6所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一应用程序对应至少两个时长值，所述确定所述第一应用程序对应的第一定时器的定时时长，包括：确定所述第一定时器的定时时长为所述至少两个时长值中的第一时长值；
    所述基于所述统计结果，对所述第一定时器的定时时长进行调整，包括：
    若所述统计结果大于第一门限，将所述第一定时器的定时时长由所述第一时长值增大为第二时长值；或，
    当在所述第一定时器的定时时长内所述终端与网络设备不存在所述信息交互后，若所述统计结果小于第二门限，则将所述第一定时器的定时时长由所述第一时长值降低为第三时长值；或，
    若所述统计结果大于第一门限，将所述第一定时器的定时时长由所述第一时长值增大为第二时长值；当在所述第一定时的定时时长内所述终端与网络设备不存在所述信息交互后，若所述统计结果小于第二门限，则将所述第一定时器的定时时长由所述第一时长值降低为第三时长值，其中，所述第二门限小于或等于所述第一门限。
  8. 如权利要求7所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二时长值是所述第一时长值的α倍，所述第一时长值是所述第三时长值的α倍，α为大于1的固定值。
  9. 如权利要求7所述的方法，其特征在于，若所述统计结果小于所述第二门限，则将所述第一定时器的定时时长由所述第一时长值降低为第三时长值之后，所述方法还包括：
    所述终端重新进入RRC连接态，所述第一定时器开始计时，所述第一定时器的定时时长为所述第三时长值；
    当所述终端与所述网络设备存在信息交互时，所述第一定时器复位；
    当所述第一定时器的计时值超过所述定时时长时，所述终端请求所述网络设备释放所述RRC连接。
  10. 如权利要求2-9任一所述的方法，其特征在于，所述确定所述第一应用程序对应的第一定时器的定时时长之后，所述方法还包括：
    所述终端的第一模块向所述终端的第二模块发送第一指令，所述第一指令中携带用于指示所述第一定时器的定时时长的指示信息；
    所述第二模块根据所述指示信息设置所述终端的所述第一定时器的定时时长。
  11. 如权利要求10所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一模块包括所述终端的应用处理器，所述第二模块包括所述终端的调制解调器。
  12. 如权利要求2-11任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一应用程序保持运行在前台。
  13. 如权利要求2-12任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述当终端的第一应用程序运行在前台期间，确定所述第一应用程序对应的第一定时器的定时时长，包括：
    当所述第一应用程序运行到前台时，确定所述第一应用程序对应的第一定时器的定时时长，其中，在第一时间运行所述第一应用程序时，所述定时时长的取值为第一时长值，在第二时间运行所述第一应用程序时，所述定时时长的取值为第四时长值，所述第一时长值与所述第四时长值不同。
  14. 如权利要求2-13任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一应用程序所属的应用类型对应至少两个时长值，所述确定所述第一应用程序对应第一定时器的定时时长，包括：
    确定所述至少两个时长值中的最大值作为所述第一定时器的定时时长；和/或，所述第一时长值小于或等于网络设备上配置的非活动定时器的定时时长。
  15. 一种无线资源控制RRC连接释放控制方法，其特征在于，包括：
    在终端处于RRC连接态下，对所述终端的数据传输量进行统计；
    基于统计结果，对所述终端的第一定时器的定时时长进行调整，所述第一定时器为所述终端处于RRC连接态下使用的定时器，在所述第一定时器的计时值超过调整后的定时时长时，所述终端请求网络设备释放所述终端的RRC连接。
  16. 如权利要求15所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：在满足以下至少一个条件时，所述第一定时器复位：
    所述终端接收到下行数据；
    所述终端接收到下行信令；
    所述终端发送上行数据；
    所述终端发送上行信令。
  17. 如权利要求15所述的方法，其特征在于，所述基于所述统计结果，对第一定时器的定时时长进行调整，包括：
    若所述统计结果大于第一门限，将所述第一定时器的定时时长的取值由第一时长值增大为第二时长值；
    当所述第一定时器的计时值超过所述定时时长时，若所述统计结果小于第二门限，则将所述第一定时器的定时时长的取值由所述第一时长值降低为第三时长值，所述第二门限小于或等于所述第一门限。
  18. 如权利要求17所述的方法，其特征在于，所述若所述统计结果大于第一门限，将所述第一定时器的定时时长的取值由第一时长值增大为第二时长值，包括：
    当所述第一定时器的计时值超过所述定时时长时，若所述统计结果大于第一门限，将所述第一定时器的定时时长的取值由所述第一时长值增大为所述第二时长值；或，
    在所述终端处于所述RRC连接态时，若所述统计结果大于第一门限，将所述第一定时器的定时时长的取值由所述第一时长值增大为所述第二时长值。
  19. 如权利要求18所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二时长值是所述第一时长值的α倍，所述第一时长值是所述第三时长值的α倍，α为大于1的固定值。
  20. 如权利要求17所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    根据前台运行的应用程序所属的应用类型，获取与所述应用类型对应的所述第一门限和所述第二门限；或者，
    获取通用的所述第一门限和所述第二门限。
  21. 如权利要求15-20任一项所述的方法，其特征在于：所述对所述终端的第一定时器的定时时长进行调整，包括：
    所述终端的第一模块向所述终端的第二模块发送指令，所述指令中携带用于指示所述第一定时器的定时时长指示信息，其中，所述第一模块为应用处理器，所述第二模块为调制解调器；
    所述第二模块根据所述指示信息设置所述第一定时器的定时时长。
  22. 如权利要求21所述的方法，其特征在于，所述指示信息中还携带用于指示RRC连接释放后终端进入空闲态或非激活态的指示信息。
  23. 如权利要求15-22任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述统计结果，包括以下至少一项：
    接收到的数据包的个数；
    接收到的数据的数据量；
    接收到的数据的吞吐率；
    接收到的数据的比特率。
  24. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括至少一个处理器，所述至少一个处理器与存储器相连，所述至少一个处理器用于读取并执行所述存储器中存储的程序，以使得所述装置执行如权利要求1或者2-14或者15-23中任一项所述的方法。
PCT/CN2021/121401 2020-10-30 2021-09-28 Rrc连接释放控制方法和装置 WO2022089136A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP21884866.1A EP4221363A4 (en) 2020-10-30 2021-09-28 RRC CONNECTION RELEASE CONTROL METHOD AND APPARATUS
US18/309,155 US20230276532A1 (en) 2020-10-30 2023-04-28 RRC Connection Release Control Method and Apparatus

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202011194036 2020-10-30
CN202011194036.X 2020-10-30
CN202011315017.8 2020-11-20
CN202011315017.8A CN114449688A (zh) 2020-10-30 2020-11-20 Rrc连接释放控制方法和装置

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US18/309,155 Continuation US20230276532A1 (en) 2020-10-30 2023-04-28 RRC Connection Release Control Method and Apparatus

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022089136A1 true WO2022089136A1 (zh) 2022-05-05

Family

ID=81362116

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2021/121401 WO2022089136A1 (zh) 2020-10-30 2021-09-28 Rrc连接释放控制方法和装置

Country Status (4)

Country Link
US (1) US20230276532A1 (zh)
EP (1) EP4221363A4 (zh)
CN (1) CN114449688A (zh)
WO (1) WO2022089136A1 (zh)

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN116233989B (zh) * 2023-05-10 2023-09-22 荣耀终端有限公司 网络连接的控制方法和设备

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN103747471A (zh) * 2013-12-27 2014-04-23 北京邮电大学 一种无线链路恢复方法和无线终端
CN106804050A (zh) * 2017-02-28 2017-06-06 宇龙计算机通信科技(深圳)有限公司 一种网络切换的方法及装置
CN107484260A (zh) * 2017-08-02 2017-12-15 武汉虹信通信技术有限责任公司 一种ue rrc状态转换方法及基站
CN108270526A (zh) * 2017-01-04 2018-07-10 华为技术有限公司 无线通信的方法和设备
US20180316617A1 (en) * 2015-09-08 2018-11-01 Parallel Wireless, Inc. RAN for Multimedia Delivery
CN110493855A (zh) * 2019-08-07 2019-11-22 深圳市锐尔觅移动通信有限公司 通信模式控制方法、装置、存储介质及终端

Family Cites Families (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8208950B2 (en) * 2007-11-13 2012-06-26 Research In Motion Limited Method and apparatus for state/mode transitioning
US9198219B2 (en) * 2012-09-06 2015-11-24 Qualcomm Incorporated Adaptive fast dormancy controller

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN103747471A (zh) * 2013-12-27 2014-04-23 北京邮电大学 一种无线链路恢复方法和无线终端
US20180316617A1 (en) * 2015-09-08 2018-11-01 Parallel Wireless, Inc. RAN for Multimedia Delivery
CN108270526A (zh) * 2017-01-04 2018-07-10 华为技术有限公司 无线通信的方法和设备
CN106804050A (zh) * 2017-02-28 2017-06-06 宇龙计算机通信科技(深圳)有限公司 一种网络切换的方法及装置
CN107484260A (zh) * 2017-08-02 2017-12-15 武汉虹信通信技术有限责任公司 一种ue rrc状态转换方法及基站
CN110493855A (zh) * 2019-08-07 2019-11-22 深圳市锐尔觅移动通信有限公司 通信模式控制方法、装置、存储介质及终端

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
See also references of EP4221363A4 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP4221363A1 (en) 2023-08-02
EP4221363A4 (en) 2024-04-03
CN114449688A (zh) 2022-05-06
US20230276532A1 (en) 2023-08-31

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP7370479B2 (ja) 構成情報伝送方法および装置、通信機器および記憶媒体
WO2020029798A1 (zh) 一种控制信息的传输方法及设备
US11612000B2 (en) Methods and apparatuses for requesting system information
WO2021243618A1 (zh) 一种资源调度的方法、装置、通信设备及存储介质
WO2021004512A1 (zh) 一种释放无线资源控制连接的方法、终端设备及存储介质
US9144015B2 (en) Methods of UE indicating traffic-related information to network
WO2021052245A1 (zh) 一种数据收发方法、电子设备与计算机可读存储介质
EP3918873A1 (en) Data transmission preemption
WO2022262398A1 (zh) 通道切换方法、电子设备及存储介质
WO2021168664A1 (zh) 通信方法、装置及计算机存储介质
CN110493855B (zh) 通信模式控制方法、装置、存储介质及终端
US20220217810A1 (en) Data receiving method, data sending method, terminal, and network side device
CN107402813B (zh) 一种资源分配的方法及移动终端、计算机可读存储介质
US20220264462A1 (en) Wake-up signal configuration method, wake-up signal processing method, and related device
WO2020082373A1 (zh) 一种通信系统的切换方法和终端设备
WO2021243600A1 (zh) 数据传输处理方法、装置、用户设备及存储介质
WO2022089136A1 (zh) Rrc连接释放控制方法和装置
CN111050422A (zh) 一种非连续接收的控制方法及终端
US8792437B2 (en) Synchronized use of a wireless channel by multiple applications
CN114928877B (zh) 一种降低耗电的方法和设备
CN111836311B (zh) 能力协商方法、终端及网络设备
WO2023087853A1 (zh) 一种网络加速方法、电子设备、芯片系统及存储介质
WO2023087852A1 (zh) 一种网络加速方法、电子设备、芯片系统及存储介质
WO2022077520A1 (zh) 通信方法及装置
WO2017166161A1 (zh) 一种寻呼方法以及相关设备

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21884866

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2021884866

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20230425

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE